T3903-390-02 SG-Ins Lec EN

Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.
T3903-390-02
Authored and published using

Copyright © 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its
subsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”), and their respective licensors. This software
is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and
proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and
other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to
third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN
CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright
laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement
that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to
the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation
if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance
with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy
made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided
by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of
PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to
any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any
means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make
copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to
change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by
PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may
appear in this document.
For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see
backside of this guide.
About PTC University
Welcome to PTC University!

With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge,
PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only
PTC University offers:
• An innovative learning methodology – PTC’s Precision Learning
Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and
deliver learning solutions.
• Flexible Delivery Options – PTC University ensures you receive the same
quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive
experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules
facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.
• Premier Content and Expertise – A thorough instructor certification process
and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting
organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified
instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices
derived from thousands of deployments.
• Global Focus – PTC University delivers training where and when you
need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries
offering content in nine languages.
• Delivering Value – A role-based learning design ensures the right people
have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the
organization’s overall performance goals.
The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning
offerings that PTC University has available. These include:
• Instructor-led Training (ILT) – The ideal blend of classroom lectures,
personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and
post-classroom tools.
• Pro/FICIENCY – This Web-based, skills assessment and
development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity.
• eLearning Libraries – 24/7 access to Web-based training that will
compliment your instructor-led course.
• Precision LMS – A powerful learning management system that will manage
your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are
corporate learning programs designed to your organization’s specific goals,
current skills, desired competencies, and training preferences.
Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most
out of your PTC products.
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
North America
• Education Services Registration
– Tel: (888) 782-3773
– Fax: (781) 370-5307
• Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
– Tel: (800) 477-6435
– Fax: (781) 707-0328
• License Management and Contracts
– Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)
– Fax: (781) 707-0331
Europe
• Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting
– Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)
Asia
• Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact
information.
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web
site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions
to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical
support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base
searches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also find general
information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer
Support, and PTC Partners.
Precision Learning
Precision Learning in the Classroom

PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop
effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity
of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven
instructional design principal of ‘Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do’:
• Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key
concepts.
• These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the
software application.
• You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.
After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided to enable you to
assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also
identify the class topics that require further review.
At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via
your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training
on how to do this after the class.
Precision Learning After the Class

Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning
account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already
have one.
As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:
• A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a
Recommended Learning Report based on your results.
• A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same
instructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. The
Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training
that you may want to review.
Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.
The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the
live class.
Precision Learning Recommendations
PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated
training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are
available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of
our Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.
Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and
that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.
Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map
corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor
recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that
corresponds to your role and job functions.
Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01 ― Advanced Selection
Module 02 ― Advanced Datum Features
Module 03 ― Advanced Sketching
Module 04 ― Advanced Hole Creation
Module 05 ― Advanced Drafts and Ribs
Module 06 ― Advanced Shells
Module 07 ― Advanced Rounds and Chamfers
Day 2
Module 08 ― Relations and Parameters
Module 09 ― Advanced Blends
Module 10 ― Sweeps with Variable Sections
Module 11 ― Helical Sweeps
Module 12 ― Swept Blends
Day 3
Module 13 ― Advanced Layers
Module 14 ― Advanced Reference Management
Module 15 ― Family Tables
Module 16 ― Reusing Features
Module 17 ― Advanced Copy
Module 18 ― Advanced Patterns
Table of Contents
Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.0

Advanced Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Advanced Chain Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Advanced Surface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Advanced Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Creating Datum Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Creating Datum Coordinate Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Creating Points On or Offset from Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Creating Points at Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Sketching Geometry Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Creating a Curve Through a Point Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Creating a Curve From Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Creating Composite Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Projecting and Wrapping Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Trimming Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Creating Offset Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Creating Cosmetic Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Advanced Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Using Sketched Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Sketching Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Sketching Elliptical Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Sketching Splines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Modifying Splines — Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Modifying Splines — Advanced Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Importing and Exporting Spline Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Sketching Conics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Sketching Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Locking Sketcher Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Sketcher Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Advanced Hole Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Creating Standard Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Lightweight Hole Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Creating Sketched Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Creating On Point Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Creating Cosmetic Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Advanced Drafts and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Drafting Intent Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Creating Drafts Split at Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Creating Drafts Split at Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Creating Drafts Split at Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Creating Trajectory Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Advanced Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Analyzing Shell References and Thickness Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Excluding Surfaces from Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Extending Shell Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Analyzing Shell Corner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Advanced Rounds and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Analyzing Round Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Analyzing Round Creation Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Creating Rounds Through Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Creating Variable Radius Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Auto Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Creating Rounds by Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Analyzing Round References and Pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Using Intent Edges for Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Using Round Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Creating Corner Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Creating Chamfers by Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Analyzing Chamfer References and Pieces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Using Intent Edges for Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Using Chamfer Transitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Relations and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Understanding Relation Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Understanding Relation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and Functions . . . . . 8-10
Exact Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Creating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Understanding Advanced Parameter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Creating Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Creating Relations for Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Creating Section Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Using the Evalgraph Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Using Simultaneous Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Advanced Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Creating Blends by Selecting Non-Parallel Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Analyzing Blend Section Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Analyzing Blend Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Creating Rotational Blends by Selecting Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Creating Rotational Blends by Sketching Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Analyzing Rotational Blend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Analyzing Rotational Blend Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Sweeps with Variable Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Creating Sweeps using a Constant Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal to Projection . . . 10-16
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple
Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using Tangent Trajectories10-29
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options and
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Using Trajpar with Solid Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid Features. . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Helical Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch Variations . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Understanding Swept Blend Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend . . . . . 12-22
Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Analyzing Swept Blend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
Analyzing Swept Blend Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34
Advanced Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Understanding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Creating and Managing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Creating Layer Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Creating Layers in Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Advanced Reference Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Editing Feature References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Replacing Feature References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Replacing Sketcher References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Replacing Sketcher Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Family Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Understanding Family Table Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Creating a Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Patternizing Family Table Instances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Creating a Multi-Level Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Editing Family Table Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Reusing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Creating UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Placing UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . 16-11
Creating Inheritance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Using External Merge to Add Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Using External Merge to Remove Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-28
Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Configuring Independency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options to Vary. . . . . . . . 17-12
Advanced Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Understanding Pattern Regeneration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Creating Geometry Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Creating Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Specifying Fill Pattern Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
Creating Pattern Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-29
Applying Pattern Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-33
Creating Curve Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-38
Creating Point Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-42
Unpatterning Group Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-45
Creating Patterns of Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-49
Moving/Mirroring Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-54
Student Preface — Using the Header
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and
the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.
Course Handbook Layout:

• Modules
– Topics
♦ Concept
♦ Theory
♦ Procedure
♦ Exercise (if applicable)
Procedure / Exercise Header:
Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate
information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into
modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics,
with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:
• Concept — This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and
is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with
figures and bullets.
• Theory — This section provides detailed information about content
introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not
shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional
paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.
• Procedure — This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to
complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused,
and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook
only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that
contain only Concept and Theory.
• Exercise — Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are
typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models.
Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an
associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide
and/or the online exercise HTML files.
The first module for certain courses is known as a “process
module.” Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level
processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.
Procedure / Exercise Header

To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) as
concise as possible, each begins with a “header.” The header lists the name
of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.
The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:
1. Procedure/Exercise Name — This is the name of the lab.
2. Scenario — This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The
Scenario is only found in Exercises.
3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed — A reminder that you should
close any open files and erase them from memory:
• Click Close until the icon is no longer displayed.
• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.
4. Folder Name — This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are
stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to
the lab files is:
• PTCU\CreoParametric2\functional_area_folder\topic_folder
In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable
is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to
PTCU\CreoParametric2\Round\Variable.
• To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or
browser, and select Set Working Directory.
5. Model to Open — This is the file to be opened from the working
directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to
open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If
you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead
create a new model, you will see Create New.
• To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and
select Open.
6. Task Name — Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one
or more tasks within a lab.
7. Lab Steps — These are the individual steps required to complete
a task.
Two other items to note for labs:
• Saving — Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless
otherwise stated.
• Exercises — Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs
Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you
configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab
exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a
computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:
• Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
– The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such
as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\.
• Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
– Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as
the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\.
• Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric2 folder.
You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the Header
In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo
Parametric working environment for each lab in the course.
Close Window Erase Not Displayed
SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder EXTRUDE_1.PRT
Step 1: Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run

the lab exercises properly.
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer
outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
• The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically,
such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2.
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
• Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
• Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be
PTCU\CreoParametric2.
3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric2 folder.
You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
Step 2: Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to
avoid any possible conflicts.
1. If you currently have files open, click Close from the Quick Access
toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.
2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon.
• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
Step 3: Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure
and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric
working directory.
1. Notice the SampleFunc-

tionalArea\Topic1_Folder as
indicated in the header above.
2. If necessary, select the Folder
Browser tab from the
navigator.
3. Click Working Directory

to view the current working
directory folder in the browser.
• Double-click
SampleFunctionalArea.
4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working
Directory.
5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display
the contents of the new working directory in the browser.
Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the

browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and
select Set Working Directory from the browser.
Step 4: Open the file for this procedure.
1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header

above.
• Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.
2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:
• Read the first task.
• Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial
datum display for the procedure or exercise.
• Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 5: Set the initial datum display options.
1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum
Display types to enable and disable. For example, “Enable only the
following Datum Display types: .”
2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-down
menu from the In Graphics tool
bar.
3. Next, enable and disable the
check boxes as necessary. For
example you could disable the
Select All check box, and then
enable only the desired datum
types.
4. The model should now appear

as shown.
This completes the procedure.

Module 1
Advanced Selection
Module Overview
In this module, you learn advanced methods for selecting edges and
geometry within a part model. Learning advanced methods for selection
enables you to create more robust models in a shorter period of time.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Understand advanced chain selection.
• Understand advanced surface selection.
© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Advanced Chain Selection
You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different
types of chains to increase efficiency and feature robustness.
• Chain types:
– Intent chain
– One-by-one
– Tangent chain
– Surface loop
– Surface loop from to
– Boundary Figure 1 – Intent Chain
– From-to Boundary loop
– Multiple chains
• Selection methods:
– Direct with mouse
– Chain dialog box
Figure 2 – Surface Loop
Advanced Chain Selection

You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different types of
chains to increase efficiency and feature robustness. A chain is a collection
of adjacent edges and curves that share common endpoints. Chains can be
open-ended or closed-loop, but they are always defined by two ends.
Chain Types
The following are the different types of chains that can be used to select
edges:
• Intent chain – Enables you to select edges based on their intent. For
example, say you use an intent chain to select the four edges of a square
cut for purposes of rounding them. If the square cut is redefined into a
hexagon cut, the intent chain automatically adds the two additional edges
and rounds them, because your intent was to round the edges of the cut.
If you instead select the edges one at a time and round them, the round
feature either fails or does not round the newly added edges.
• One-by-one – Enables you to select adjacent edges one at a time along a
continuous path.
• Tangent chain – Enables you to select all the edges that are tangent to
an anchor edge.
• Surface loop – Enables you to select a loop of edges on a surface.
• Surface loop from to – Enables you to select a range of edges from the
surface loop.
• Boundary – Enables you to select the outermost boundaries of a quilt.
• From-to Boundary loop – Enables you to select a range of edges from
the boundary.
Module 1 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

• Multiple chains – You can select multiple chains by selecting the first chain,
pressing CTRL and selecting an edge for a new chain, then holding down
SHIFT and completing the new chain from the selected edge.
Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities:
• Directly with the mouse.
• Using the Chain dialog box –

The Chain dialog box enables a
GUI approach to selection. This
dialog box is only available in the
context of a tool. You can click
the Details button near the tool's
reference collector to display the
Chain dialog box.
Figure 3 – Chain Dialog Box

PROCEDURE - Advanced Chain Selection
Selection\Adv_Chain ADV_CHAINS.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with the different chain selection types.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Extrude 3.
3. Cursor over one of the top edges
and right-click to query-select the
end edges Intent chain.
4. Cursor over one of the vertical

edges and right-click to
query-select the side edges
Intent chain.
5. De-select all geometry.
6. Select the top, front horizontal

edge.
7. Press SHIFT and select the two
adjacent edges One-by-one.
10. Select the top, front horizontal
edge.
11. Press SHIFT and select the top,
right front edge to select the
Tangent chain.

14. Select one of the top, front
edges.
right flat surface to select the
Surface loop.

18. Select the top, front edge.
back edge to select the Surface
loop from to chain.
20. Select the quilt on the right.

21. Select an edge of the quilt.
22. Press SHIFT and select the quilt
to select the Boundary.
24. Select the quilt again.

25. Select the front, vertical edge.
26. Press SHIFT and select the
back, vertical edge to select the
From-to Boundary loop.

Advanced Surface Selection
You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using
different types of sets.
• Surface set types:

– Individual Surfaces
– Solid Surfaces
– Intent Surfaces
– Seed and Boundary
– Loop Surfaces
– Exclude Surfaces
• Selection methods: Figure 1 – Selecting Multiple
– Direct with mouse Individual Surfaces
– Chain dialog box
Figure 2 – Selecting a Surface Loop
Advanced Surface Selection

You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using different types of
sets. A surface set is a collection of surface patches from solids or quilts.
Surface patches do not need to be adjacent.
Surface Set Types

The following are the different types of surface sets that can be used to
select surfaces:
• Individual Surfaces – Enables you to select surfaces from solids or quilts
one at a time. To select multiple individual surfaces, press CTRL.
• Solid Surfaces – Enables you to select all surfaces of the solid geometry
in a part model.
• Intent Surfaces – Enables you to select surfaces based on their intent.
An intent surface set tends to be more robust because it can account for
changes made to geometry.
• Seed and Boundary Surfaces – Enables you to select all surfaces from the
selected seed surface up to the boundary or boundaries.
• Loop Surfaces – Enables you to select all the surfaces that are adjacent
to the edges of a surface.
• Exclude Surfaces – Enables you to exclude surface patches during or
after a surface set has been created.

Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities:
• Directly with the mouse.
• Using the Surface Sets dialog

box – The Surface Sets dialog
box enables a GUI approach
to selection. This dialog box is
only available in the context of
a tool. You can click the Details
button next to the tool's reference
collector to display the Surface
Sets dialog box.
Figure 3 – Surface Sets Dialog Box

PROCEDURE - Advanced Surface Selection
Selection\Adv_Surface ADV_SURFACE-SETS.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with the different surface set selections.

3. Select the front surface of
Extrude 1.
4. Press CTRL and select the
second individual surface.
6. Select any feature.

7. Select any surface on that
feature.
8. Right-click and select Solid
Surfaces.
10. Right-click to query and select

cut Extrude 2.
11. Select the Intent surface.

13. Select the front surface on the
silver protrusion as the seed
surface.
top, right flat surface as the
Boundary.

15. Release SHIFT to select all the
surfaces from the seed surface
up to the Boundary.
You can continue to use
SHIFT to select additional
boundaries.
16. Select the top, flat surface.

17. Press SHIFT and select the front
edge.
18. Release SHIFT to select the
Surface loop.
19. Press CTRL and click to

de-select the two surfaces,
excluding them from the loop.

Module 2
Advanced Datum Features
Module Overview
Datum features often serve as the foundation when modeling advanced
geometry. A datum feature framework can efficiently capture the design
intent of the model, and then solid features can be created on the framework.
Datum curves and sketches may reference other datum features, such as
datum points and coordinate systems. In addition, you can create datum
graphs that can be utilized by relations to control part geometry.
In this module, you learn how to create datum points and several types of
datum curves. You will also learn how to create datum graphs and coordinate
systems.
Objectives
• Create datum graphs.
• Create datum coordinate systems.
• Sketch geometry datums.
• Create numerous types of datum points.
• Create numerous types of datum curves.
• Create cosmetic sketches.

Creating Datum Graphs
A 2-D datum graph can be created as a feature in the model.
• Created like a Sketch feature:

– Used as an X-Y function.
– Can be used to control
part geometry.
• Must contain a Sketcher
coordinate system.
• Must contain sketched
geometry.
Figure 1 – Datum Graph Features
Figure 2 – Creating a Datum

Graph using Lines Figure 3 – Creating a Datum Graph
from a Spline
Creating Datum Graphs

A 2-D datum graph can be created as a feature in the model, as shown in
Figure 1. The datum graph is created much like a sketch feature, except that
a visible datum curve is not created. Instead, the system is able to use the
sketch as an X-Y function. This function can then be utilized by relations to
control part geometry based on the X-Y relation of the graph.
The datum graph must contain a Sketcher coordinate system, and sketched
geometry. Centerlines and construction geometry can be used to simplify the
sketch creation, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3. However, the system
only recognizes solid sketched geometry such as lines, arcs, and splines
for the graph function.

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Graphs
Datum\Graph DATUM_GRAPH.PRT
Task 1: Create a datum graph comprised of lines.

2. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Graph .
3. Press ENTER to accept the default graph name GRAPH_1.
4. A new Sketcher window opens.
5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
6. Click Centerline from the

Sketching group and sketch a
vertical and horizontal centerline.
7. Click Coordinate System
from the Sketching group.
• Click the intersection of
the centerlines to place the
coordinate system.
8. Click Line Chain and sketch

an angled line and a horizontal
line. The left endpoint of the
angled line should be aligned to
the vertical centerline.
9. Click Normal from the

Dimension group and dimension
the sketch, editing the values as
shown.
10. Click OK .

11. Notice the datum graph feature
in the model tree.
Task 2: Create a datum graph comprised of two arcs.
1. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Graph .

2. Press ENTER to accept the default graph name GRAPH_2.
3. A new Sketcher window opens.

Sketching group and sketch
two vertical centerlines and one
horizontal centerline.
and click the left intersection
of the centerlines to place the
coordinate system.
6. Click 3-Point / Tangent End

and sketch two arcs. The
arcs should be tangent to
one-another, and their endpoints
aligned to the vertical centerlines.
7. Click Perpendicular from the Constrain group and constrain the

arc endpoints perpendicular to the vertical centerlines.
8. Click Normal from the

Dimension group and dimension
the arcs and centerlines,
pressing ENTER to accept the
default values.
9. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.
10. Click OK .

11. Notice the datum graph feature
in the model tree.

Creating Datum Coordinate Systems
Datum coordinate systems can be used as a modeling or
assembly reference, as the basis for calculations, and for
assembling components.
• Define References:
– Datum features
– Existing model geometry
• Define Orientation:
– References selection
– Selected CSYS axes
Figure 1 – Datum Coordinate

System Types
Coordinate Systems
Datum coordinate systems are individual features that can be redefined,
suppressed, hidden, or deleted. A coordinate system defines a specific
location in space based on coordinates. Datum coordinate systems can be
used as a modeling or assembly reference, as the basis for calculations, and
for assembling components.
Creating Datum Coordinate Systems

To create a new datum coordinate system, you must define the following
two items:
• References – Used to define the coordinate system location. You can
select existing datum references including datum planes, datum axes,
datum points, or other datum coordinate systems. You can also select
existing geometry including edges, vertices, and surfaces.
• Orientation – Used to define the position of the coordinate system's axes.
There are two different ways to orient the datum coordinate system:
– References selection – Enables you to select reference geometry for
any two of the coordinate system's axes.
– Selected CSYS axes – Is available only when another coordinate
system is specified as the reference. This option enables you to rotate
the coordinate system about the axes of the reference coordinate

system. You can also use the Set Z Normal To Screen option to orient
the z-axis perpendicular to the screen.
Defining Coordinate System Offset Types

If a coordinate system is selected as a reference, there are three coordinate
system offset types that can be created in Creo Parametric.
• Cartesian – Created by defining X, Y, and Z parameters.
• Cylindrical – Created by defining R, Theta (θ), and Z parameters.
• Spherical – Created by defining r, Theta (θ), and Phi (Φ) parameters.
Defining Coordinate System Placement Types

If datum planes or surfaces are specified as references, there are up to three
coordinate system types that can be defined in Creo Parametric. The type
defines the dimensioning scheme used to locate the coordinate system. The
three types are as follows:
• Linear – Places the coordinate system using two linear dimensions.
• Radial – Places the coordinate system using a linear dimension and an
angular dimension.
• Diameter – Places the coordinate system using a linear dimension and
an angular dimension.
You must specify the offset references from which to define the dimensions.

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Coordinate Systems
Datum\Coord_Sys COORD-SYS.PRT
Task 1: Create an offset datum coordinate system.
1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

from the Datum group in the
ribbon.
3. Select coordinate system DEF.
4. In the Coordinate System dialog
box, edit the Offset type to
Cartesian, if necessary.
• Edit the Z offset to 10.
• Select the Orientation tab.
• Select the Selected CSYS
axes option.
• Edit the About Z angle to 180.
• Click OK.
5. De-select the geometry.
Task 2: Create a datum coordinate system using three planes.
1. Click Coordinate System .

2. Select the front surface of the
model.
3. Press CTRL and select datum
planes TOP and RIGHT from the
model tree.
box, select the Orientation tab.
• Use the surface to determine
Z.
• Use datum plane TOP to
project Y.
• Click OK.

Task 3: Create a datum coordinate system using axes and planes.
1. Start the Coordinate System

.
axis A_4 and datum plane DTM1
as references.
box, select the Orientation tab.
4. In the Orientation tab, click in the
First Direction collector.
• Select datum coordinate
system CS1 and use Z to
determine Z.
5. In the Orientation tab, click in the

Second Direction collector.
• Select datum axis A_4.
• Use datum axis A_4 to project
Y.
• Click Flip to flip the Y
projection.
6. Click OK from the Coordinate
System dialog box.
Task 4: Create a datum coordinate system on a surface.
1. Start the Coordinate System

.
2. Select the top, rounded surface.
3. Right-click and select Offset
References.
plane RIGHT from the model
tree and the front surface.
5. Edit the Angle from datum plane
RIGHT to 0.
6. Edit the Axial distance from the
front surface to 30.
7. Click OK.

Display types: .

Creating Points On or Offset from Entities
You can create datum points both on and offset from geometry
or other datum features.
• Reference types:
– Placement
– Offset
• Reference combinations:
– On/Offset surface or datum
plane
– On/Offset axis
– On curve:
♦ Length Ratio
♦ Real Length
♦ Reference
– Center of surface or curve Figure 1 – Datum Point on a
Surface Offset from Datum Planes
Figure 2 – Datum Point on Figure 3 – Datum Point at

Curve Ratio Offset Center of Curve
Creating Points On or Offset from Entities

You can create datum points as reference geometry for other datum features,
for solid features, or for surface features. You can create points both on and
offset from geometry or other datum features. Most geometry that defines or
locates a point in 3-D space can be specified as a reference. Both Placement
references and Offset references can be selected, depending upon the
combination.
The following reference combinations are available:
• On/Offset surface or datum plane – Locate a point directly on a surface or
datum plane, or offset a specified distance. In Figure 1, the datum point is
on the selected surface, and offset from the two datum planes.
• On/Offset axis – Locate a point on a datum axis, or offset a specified
distance.
• On curve – You can locate a point on a curve. There are three ways to
further define the point location on the curve:

– Length ratio – Enables you to locate the point as a function of the curve's
overall length. For example, if you want to locate the curve 3/4 from the
end of the curve you type 0.75 as the ratio. You can also switch from
which curve endpoint the ratio is determined by clicking Next End. In
Figure 2, the point is on the curve, offset from the right endpoint a ratio
of 0.75.
– Real length – Enables you to locate the point a specified distance from
the curve's endpoint. You can switch from which curve endpoint the
distance is measured by clicking Next End.
– Use reference – You can specify another entity as an offset reference
and specify the offset value from that reference.
• Center of surface or curve – Selecting a rounded surface or curve enables
you to locate a point at the center of the surface or curve, as shown in
Figure 3.

PROCEDURE - Creating Points On or Offset from Entities
Datum\Points_On-Offset POINTS_ON-OFFSET.PRT
Task 1: Create datum points on and offset from surfaces.

Display types: .
2. Click Point from the Datum
group in the ribbon.
3. Select the top surface in the
back, left quadrant.
4. In the Datum Point dialog box,
click in the Offset references
collector.
planes FRONT and RIGHT from
the model tree.
6. Edit both offset values to 5.

click New Point.
8. Select the right, drafted surface
near the front center.
• Edit the Offset from On to
Offset.
• Edit the Offset value to 2.
9. In the graphics window,

right-click and select Offset
References.
• Press CTRL and select datum
plane FRONT from the model
tree and the bottom, flat
surface.
• Edit the offset from datum
plane FRONT to 3.00.
• Edit the offset from the bottom
surface to 7.00.

click New Point.
11. Select the top, curved surface.
• Edit the Offset from Offset to
Center.
12. Click OK from the Datum Point
dialog box.
Task 2: Create datum points on axes and curves.
1. Click Point .
2. Select datum axis A_2 in the
model tree.
right-click and select Offset
References.
• Right-click to query and select
the bottom, flat surface.
4. In the graphics window, edit the
offset value to 25.00.

click New Point.
6. Select the back, top vertex.

click New Point.
8. Select the curve on the right,
drafted surface.
9. Edit the offset from On to Center.
10. Click OK.

Task 3: Create datum points on curves.
1. Click Point .
2. Select the front datum curve to
the right of the datum plane that
intersects it.
• Edit the Offset drop-down to
Ratio.
• Edit the Offset value to 0.75.
• Click Next End twice.

click New Point.
intersects it.
• Edit the Offset drop-down to
Real.
• Click Next End twice.

click New Point.
intersects it.
• Select Reference as the
Offset reference.
• Select datum plane RIGHT as
the reference.
• Click OK.

Creating Points at Intersections
You can create points at the intersections of two or three
references from geometry or other datum features.
• Combinations include:
– Three planes/three surfaces
– Two curves
– Two edges
– A curve and edge
– Two axes
– Curves/Edges/Axes with
Surfaces/Planes
• References do not need to
physically intersect
• Next Intersection
Figure 1 – Point at the Intersection
of Three Planes
Figure 2 – Points at the Intersections Figure 3 – Point at the Intersection

of Curves and Planes of a Surface and Datum Axis
Creating Points at Intersections

You can create datum points as reference geometry for other datum features,
for solid features, or for surface features. You can create points at the
intersections of two or three references from geometry or other datum
features. Most geometry that defines or locates a point in 3-D space can
be specified as a reference.
The following reference combinations are available for creating intersections:
• Three planes/three surfaces – Locate a point at the intersection of three
planes, three surfaces, or a combination. In Figure 1, the point is located at
the intersection of the three datum planes.
• Two curves – Locate a point at the intersection of two curves. In Figure 2,
points 4 and 5 are located at the intersection of the two curves.
• Two edges – Locate a point at the intersection of two edges.
• A curve and edge – Locate a point at the intersection of a curve and edge.
• Two axes – Locate a point at the intersection of two axes.

• Curves/Edges/Axes with Surfaces/Planes – Locate a point at the
intersection of a curve, edge, or axis, and a surface or plane. In Figure 2,
point 6 is located at the intersection of a datum plane and a curve. In Figure
3, the point is located at the intersection of the datum axis and the surface.
There does not need to be a physical intersection between the selected
entities. The system extrapolates to find an intersection, if one exists. If
more than one intersection exists between the selected entities, you can
click Next Intersection to toggle between all available intersections for the
specified entities. In Figure 2, there are two intersections between the two
datum curves. Point 4 is located at one intersection, and point 5 is located at
the other intersection.

PROCEDURE - Creating Points at Intersections
Datum\Points_Intersect POINTS_INTERSECT.PRT
Task 1: Create points at the intersections of different entities.

Display types: .
group.
axis A_1 and the top surface.

click New Point.
5. Press CTRL and select the top,
rear edge and datum plane
RIGHT from the model tree.
6. Click OK.
7. Disable .
8. Click Point .
planes TOP, RIGHT, and
FRONT from the model tree.
10. Disable the following Datum

Display types: .
click New Point.
12. Press CTRL and select the rear,
right, and front surfaces.
13. Click OK.
14. Notice that the selected
references do not have to
physically touch. The point
determines the intersection.

15. Click Point .
16. Press CTRL and select the two
datum curves to the left side of
the model.

click New Point.
datum curves on the left side of
the model.
click Next Intersection.

click New Point.
21. Press CTRL and select the top
datum curve and datum plane
RIGHT.
22. Click OK.

Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate
System
You can create an array of datum points by referencing a
coordinate system.
• Array is one feature in model tree.

• Specify reference coordinate system.
• Specify coordinate system type:
– Cartesian
– Cylindrical
– Spherical
• Specify parameters based on coordinate system type.
Figure 1 – Creating an Array of Points using an Offset Coordinate System
Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System

You can create an array of datum points by referencing a coordinate system.
The entire array of points created becomes a single feature in the model tree.
To create the array of points you must first select a reference coordinate
system. You can then specify the type of coordinate system selected. The
coordinate system type specified determines the parameters that must be
typed for each datum point. The locations of all points in the array are based
on the coordinates for each parameter. The following coordinate system
types are available:
• Cartesian – You must specify X, Y, and Z parameters for the points.
• Cylindrical – You must specify R, Theta (θ), and Z parameters for the points.
• Spherical – You must specify r, Theta (θ), and Phi (Φ) parameters for the
points.
You can create new points in the array by clicking in the empty row at the
bottom of the existing point array. You can edit the point coordinate values
within the table by editing the values in the graphics window, or by dragging
the handle in the appropriate parameter direction. For example, if the

reference coordinate system type is Cartesian, the drag handle parameters
are X, Y, and Z.
You can also specify the option for Use Non Parametric Array. Enabling this
option converts the point array to a Non Parametric Array, which does not
include any dimensions. You are not able to modify the values using the
Edit command in the right mouse button menu, as this option is removed
from the menu.
The following file options are available for creating points using an offset
coordinate system:
• Import – Enables you to import a text file of coordinate data. The file type
that can be imported is a .pts file.
• Update Values – Enables you to add, delete, or update the point
coordinates using a text editor. Upon saving the file in the text editor, the
list of points in the Offset Csys Datum Point dialog box updates.
• Save – Enables you to save an array of points as a .pts file.

PROCEDURE - Creating Points using an Offset
Coordinate System
Datum\Points_Offset-Csys POINTS_OFFSET-CSYS.PRT
Task 1: Create a set of datum points using an offset coordinate system.

Display types: .
2. In the ribbon, select Offset
Coordinate System from the
Point types drop-down menu in
the Datum group.
3. Select coordinate system CS0.
4. Click in the first row of the Datum

Point dialog box to create the
first row of points.
• Right-click the first row of
points and select Rename.
• Edit the name to START.
• Verify that the X, Y, and Z
coordinates are 0, 0, and 0,
respectively.
5. Click in the second row of the

Datum Point dialog box to create
the second row of points.
• Edit the X, Y, and Z coordinates
to 0, 10, and 0, respectively.
6. Click in the third row of the

Datum Point dialog box and
create seven more rows of
points.
7. Edit the values as shown.

8. Click OK from the Datum Point
dialog box.
9. Disable the following Datum
Display types: .

Sketching Geometry Datums
Create points, axes, and coordinate systems in a Sketch.
• Geometry Points Create:
– Datum Points (External Sketch)
– Datum Axes (Internal Sketch)
• Geometry Centerlines Create:
– Datum Axes
• Geometry Csys Create:
– Datum Csys
Figure 1 – Geometry Points
Figure 3 – Datum Features

Figure 2 – Geometry Centerline and Csys Created
Sketching Geometry Datums

You can create datum points, datum axes, and datum coordinate systems
in a sketch. A sketch may contain any number of sketched datum features
without any further geometry. Likewise, a sketch may contain sketched
geometry or construction geometry in addition to sketched geometry datums.
You can also use a sketch that contains sketched datum features to create
features, such as an extrude or revolve.
The following tools, found in the Datum group of the ribbon, are used to
create geometry datums:
• Point
• Centerline
• Coordinate System
Traditional sketched points, centerlines, and coordinate systems
now have new icons with a dashed appearance to distinguish from
the new sketched geometry tools.
Geometry datums can be created in external or internal sketches:

• For external sketches existing on their own, the geometry datums are
created in the sketching plane.
• For an internal sketch within an Extrude, the Geometry Point tool creates
an axis normal to the sketching plane.
Note the following when creating geometry datums:
• When a sketch containing geometry datums is used for a feature, the
geometry datums are hidden along with the sketch.
• When a geometry datum is selected, you can right-click and select
Construction to convert it to a sketch entity. Likewise you can select
a construction point, centerline, or sketched coordinate system, and
right-click and select Geometry to convert the entity to a geometry datum.

PROCEDURE - Sketching Geometry Datums
Datum\Geometry_Datums SKETCH_DATUMS.PRT
Task 1: Create geometry points in an external sketch.

Display types: .
2. Select Sketch 1 from the model
tree.
• Right-click and select Edit
Definition.
3. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
.
4. Select the arc, then right-click
and select Construction.

• Place three points on the
construction arc: one on each
centerline, and one on the
vertical reference.
6. Click OK .
7. Notice that datum points are
created as part of Sketch 1 in the
model tree.
Task 2: Place geometry points in an internal sketch for an extrude.
1. Click Extrude from the Shape group in the ribbon.

• Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
• Click Use Previous.

2. Click Center and Ends from
the Arc drop down menu in the
Sketching group in the ribbon.
Sketch and dimension an arc as
shown.
3. Click Point , and place a
geometry point on each arc
endpoint.
4. Click OK .
5. Right-click and select Remove

Material.
6. Right-click and select Flip Depth
Direction.
7. Right-click the depth handle and
select Through All.
8. Click Complete Feature .
9. Notice the created axes.
Task 3: Create a geometry centerline and a geometry coordinate system.
1. Click Sketch . Click Use

Previous.
2. Right-click and select
References. Select PNT1
and click Close.

Datum group in the ribbon.
• Place a horizontal geometry
axis through PNT1.

from the Datum group.
• Place a geometry coordinate
system as shown.

5. Click OK .
6. Notice the axis and coordinate
system.

Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex
You can create a curve through a series of at least two datum
points, or edge/curve vertices.
• Curve Dashboard options:
– Use Line – Line
– Use Spline – Spline
• Curve Attributes:
– Free
– Place curve on surface
• Ends conditions:
– Free
– Tangent
– Normal
– Curvature Continuous
Figure 1 – Defining Curve
• Tweak: Placement
– Move type
– Style Points
– Movement Plane
– Motion direction
– Region
– Sliders
– Diagnostics
Figure 2 – Displaying Curvature Plot
Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex

You can create a curve through a series of at least two datum points, or
edge/curve vertices. Each point to point segment can be defined as either a
line (Use Line ) or a spline (Use Spline ).
Segments defined as straight lines can be filleted at the points where they
connect to one another using the Add fillet option. When this option is used,
the segments are selectable so that a dragger for a radius value can be
accessed. If no radius is added, the segments are joined through each point.
You can group points of equal fillet radii together, thereby controlling multiple
radii with a single dimension.
Defining Curve Placement Options
When creating a curve through points, you can define the following placement
options:
• Free (Default) – The curve passes through the selected points using the
Free option. The curve in the upper image of Figure 1 is Free.
• On Surface – The curve passes through the selected points and lies on
a specified quilt or surface using the Place curve on surface option. Only

one surface can be selected, so it may be necessary to merge surfaces if
more than one is to be selected. The curve in the lower image of Figure
1 lies on the surface.
Defining Tangency Conditions

Using the Ends Condition tab in the dashboard, you can define tangency
conditions for both the start point and end point of the curve. The following
options are available for tangency conditions:
• Free – Enables you to set the end tangencies to be free (default).
• Tangent – Enables you to define the curve endpoints tangent to the
selected reference.
• Normal – Enables you to define the curve endpoints normal to the selected
reference.
• Curvature Continuous – Enables you to define the curve as curvature
continuous. This means that the curvature equals the curvature of the
selected tangency reference. This option is only available for the tangent
condition.
When specifying the tangency condition, you must select a reference that is
used to set the tangency condition against. For example, if you define a
tangent condition, you must select a reference to which the curve endpoint
is tangent. The reference types that can be selected include curves, edges,
axes, surfaces, or a surface normal to the edge. You can also create an axis.
You can always remove a tangency condition from either end point by
selecting Free from the End condition drop down list.
Defining Tweak Options

The Tweak curve option enables you to click Tweak Curve Settings and
dynamically manipulate the spline. The following types of manipulations can
be performed to the curve:
• Move type – Enables you to move the curve either using its control
polyhedron or by its spline points. In Figure 2, the spline's control
polyhedron is displayed.
• Style Points – Enables you to move, add, delete, or redistribute points.
This option is only available when the Move type is set to spline points.
• Movement Plane – Enables you to specify the movement plane as the
Curve Plane, a Defined Plane, or the View Plane.
• Motion direction – Enables you to move the curve in the First direction,
Second direction, or the Normal direction.
• Region – Enables you to determine which area of the curve to move,
whether Local, Smooth Region, Linear Region, or Constant Region.
• Sliders – You can move the curve using sliders for First direction, Second
direction, and Normal direction. You can also adjust the sensitivity of the
sliders.
There is also a series of diagnostics available to help you achieve the desired
curve shape. Available diagnostics include:
• Curvature display
• Radius display

• Tangents display
• Interpolation Points display

PROCEDURE - Creating Curves Through a Point or
Vertex
Datum\Curve_Thru-Pnt-Vtx CURVE_THRU-PNT-VTX.PRT
Task 1: Create a curve through two vertices.

Display types: .
2. Click the Datum group drop-down
menu and select Curve through
Points from the Curve types
drop-down list.
3. Select the two vertices.
4. Select the Ends Condition tab

from the Curve dashboard.
5. Select Start Point from the Curve
side list and select Tangent from
the End condition drop-down
menu.
• Select the front edge on the
left surface.
6. Select End Point from the Curve

side list and select Tangent from
the End condition drop-down
menu and select the front edge
on the right surface.
7. Select the Options tab, select

Tweak curve and click Tweak
Curve Settings.
8. In the Modify Curve dialog box,
click Diagnostics and display
the Curvature plot.
9. In the graphics window, click the
middle two points and drag them
outward so the curvature plot
line resembles an arc.

10. Click Apply Changes from
the Modify Curve dialog box.
11. Click Complete Feature from
the dashboard.
Task 2: Create a curve through two vertices and a point.
1. Click Curve from the Datum

drop-down menu.
2. Select the left vertex, the datum
point, and the right vertex.
3. Cursor over the left control

handle, then right-click and
select Normal.
4. Select the long adjacent edge on
the left surface.
5. Cursor over the right control

handle, then right-click and
select Normal.
6. Select the long adjacent edge on
the right surface.
the dashboard.
8. Right-click datum plane DTM2

from the model tree and select
Edit.
9. Edit the offset value to -1.

Task 3: Create a curve through a point and vertex.
1. Click Curve .
2. Select datum point PNT1, and
the rear vertex.
3. Spin the model and notice that

the curve is above the surface.
• Select the Placement tab
in the dashboard and select
Place curve on surface.
• Right-click to query, select
Quilt:F11.
• Notice that the curve now lies
on the quilt.
4. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

Creating a Curve Through a Point Array
You can quickly create a datum curve through a number of
points.
• Connection types:
– Spline
– Single Radius
– Multiple Radius
• Point selections:
– Single Point
– Whole Array
Figure 1 – Fitting a Spline Curve
Figure 2 – Fitting a Single Figure 3 – Fitting a Multiple

Radius Curve Radius Curve
Creating a Curve Through a Point Array

You can quickly create a datum curve through a number of points when those
points are created as a point array. When selecting the points, query the
array until all points highlight, then select the whole array. You can fit the
following types of curves through an array of datum points:
• Use Spline – Enables you to create a spline curve through the
selected array of datum points.
• Use Line – Enables you to join points with line segments and, if
desired, to add a radius to the line segments, making the resulting curve
smoother.
– Zero Radius
– Single Radius – A single radius value controls the fit of the curve.

– Multiple Radii – Provided the points are selected individually within the
array, multiple radii can be used to control the fit. Enable the Group with
equal radius points option to group separate radii controls together,
thereby controlling them with a single dimension value.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve Through a Point Array
Datum\Crv_Thru-Pnt-Array CRV_THRU-PNT-ARRAY.PRT
Task 1: Create a spline datum curve through an array of points.

Display types: .
menu and select Curve through
Points from the Curve
drop-down list.
3. Highlight datum point START.
4. Right-click so the entire point

array highlights, then select the
point.
6. Right-click Curve 1 in the model
tree and select Hide.
Task 2: Create a curve through an array of points with straight line

segments, with zero radius and a single radius.

menu and select Curve .
2. Highlight datum point START,
then right-click and then select it.
3. Click Use Line in the
dashboard to toggle from a
spline to straight lines.
4. Click Preview Feature .

5. Click Resume Feature .
6. Click Round Curve and edit
the radius to 10.
8. Right-click Curve 2 in the model
tree and select Hide.
Task 3: Create a multiple radius datum curve through an array of points.

menu and select Curve .
2. Select datum point START.
3. Select the next adjacent datum
point in the array.
4. Click Use Line from the
dashboard.
5. Select the next 7 points in the
array.
6. Select the Placement tab in the
dashboard.
7. Select Point 2, press CTRL and

select Point 3, and Point 4.
• Select Add fillet.
• Edit the Radius to 5.00.
8. Select Point 5.
• Disable Group with equal
radius points.
9. Select Point 6, press CTRL and
select Point 7, Point 8, and
Point 9.
• Enable Group with equal
radius points.

10. Double-click any of the 5.00
radius values on the model, and
edit it to 2.00.

12. Right-click the third Curve 3 in
the model tree and select Edit.
• Notice that even though bend
radius 2 was used in multiple
locations, it is only displayed
once.

Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section
You can create a curve at the intersection of a planar
cross-section and part outline.
• You can use solid or surface models.

• The cross-section boundary is used to create the datum curve.
Figure 1 – Planar Cross-Section Figure 2 – Creating the Curve
Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section

You can create a curve from a cross-section in one of three ways:
• You can use the Curve from Cross Section option to create a datum
curve from a planar cross-section by selecting the cross-section from the
drop-down list in the dashboard.
• You can create or select a cross-section from the Sections tab in the View
Manager, then right-click and select Curve from xsec.
• You can expand the Sections node in the model tree, right-click a section
and select Create a Curve.
The system creates a curve at the intersection of the planar cross-section and
the part outline. You can create cross-section curves from solid or surface
models. The cross-section boundary is used to create a datum curve. If a
cross-section has more than one chain, each chain has a composite curve.
In Figure 1, a cross-section was created at a datum plane intersecting the
model. The curve in Figure 2 was then created using this cross-section
boundary.
You cannot use a boundary from an offset cross-section to create
a datum curve.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section
Datum\Curve_Xsec XSEC.PRT
Task 1: Create a surface cross-section.
2. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.

• Select the Sections tab, if necessary.
• Click New > Planar and press ENTER to accept the default name
of Xsec0001.
3. Select datum plane DTM3 from the model tree.
4. Select the Options tab in the dashboard.
5. Select Include the select quilt and click anywhere on the model.
7. Double-click No Cross Section

in the View Manager.
8. Right-click Xsec0001 and select
Show Section.
9. Click Close.
10. Click in the graphics window to
deselect any geometry.
Task 2: Create the curve from the cross-section.

menu and select Curve from
Cross Section from the
Curve types drop-down menu.
2. In the dashboard, select
cross-section XSEC0001 from
the Cross-section drop-down list.
4. Notice that the curve is created.

Task 3: Create a Cross Section Curve from the View Manager.
1. Click View Manager from

the In Graphics toolbar.
• Select the Sections tab, if
necessary.
2. Right-click cross section A and
select Curve from xsec.
• Notice that the curve is
created.
3. Click Close.
Task 4: Create a cross-section using the Sections group in the model tree.
1. In the model tree, expand the

Sections node.
2. Right-click section B and select
Create a Curve.
• Notice the curve is created.

Creating a Curve From Equation
You can create a 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D datum curve defined by a
mathematical equation.
• Can create in terms of parameter T
– Varies from 0 to 1
• Can also type in explicit equations
– Automatically finds the
independent variable.
Figure 1 – Straight Line Curve
– Range specified by the user.
– You may use substitutions to
keep expressions simple.
• You must specify the following:
– Coordinate system
– Coordinate system type
♦ Cartesian
♦ Cylindrical
♦ Spherical
Figure 2 – Parabola Curve
– Equation
Figure 3 – Sine Wave Curve
Creating a Curve From Equation

You can create a 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D datum curve defined by a mathematical
equation. The equation can be defined for one, two, or three coordinate
system axes. The coordinate system type can be specified for the selected
coordinate system. The following three coordinate system types can be used:
• Cartesian – You must specify X, Y, and Z parameters in the equation.
• Cylindrical – You must specify R, Theta (θ), and Z parameters in the
equation.
• Spherical – You must specify R, Theta (θ), and Phi (Φ) parameters in the
equation.
You type the equation into a text editor, which launches once you specify the
type of coordinate system. You define the three parameters for the coordinate
system type specified, each on a separate line of the text editor.
Using the ‘T’ Parameter
One method of defining equations is to do so in terms of a parameter T,
which varies from 0 to 1. The following are examples of different Cartesian
coordinate system equations that you can create a curve from:
• Straight Line (in X direction) – x=35*t, y=0, z=0. Shown in Figure 1.

• Parabola (in XZ plane) – x=35*t, y=0, z=35*t^2. Shown in Figure 2.
• Sine wave (in XY plane) – x=t*10, y=3*sin(t*360), z=0. Shown in Figure 3.
• Circle (in XY plane) – x=4*cos(t*360), y=4*sin(t*360), z=0. Shown in Figure
4.
Figure 4 – Circular Curve
Using Explicit Equations

Another method of defining curves is to type in an explicit equation. Creo
Parametric automatically finds the independent variable and internally
parameterizes the equations to draw the curve. You type in the independent
variable’s range, with the default range being 0 to 1. You may use
substitutions to keep the expressions simple, as long as there is only a single
independent variable.
The following are examples of different explicit equations that you can create
a curve from:
• Straight Line – y=x, range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5 – Straight Line Curve

• Angled Line – y=x/2+5 range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6 – Angled Line Curve

• Full parabola – y=10*(x/10)2, range –10 to 10. Shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7 – Full Parabola Curve

• Half parabola – y=10*(x/10)2, range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 8.

Figure 8 – Half Parabola Curve
• Sine wave – y=100*sin(2*x)+10, range 0 to 360. Shown in Figure 9.
Figure 9 – Sine Wave Curve

• Helix along Z axis, cylindrical csys – r=1000, z=5*theta, range 0 to 360.
Shown in Figure 10.
Figure 10 – Helical Curve

PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve From Equation
Datum\Curves_Equation CURVES_EQUATION_1.PRT
Task 1: Create a datum curve from an equation using the T parameter.

menu and select Curve from
Equation from the curve
types drop-down list.
3. In the model tree, select
coordinate system CS0.
Cartesian, if necessary.
5. Click Equation.
6. Read the Equation information
dialog box then click Close.
7. In the Equation dialog box, type

the following equation:
• x=6*t
• y=0
• z=0
8. Click OK from the Equation

dialog box.

10. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
11. Click Equation.
12. In the Equation dialog box, edit
the equation to:
• x=6*t
• y=14*t
• z=0
13. Click OK.

16. Click Equation.
the equation to:
• x=6*t
• y=14*t^3
• z=0
18. Click OK.

Task 2: Investigate and refine a datum curve using an explicit equation.
1. Click Open , select

CURVES_EQUATION_2.PRT,
and click Open.
Display types: .
4. Click Equation from the
dashboard to review the
equation.
5. Click OK from the Equation
dialog box.
6. Edit the From range value to 0.

9. Click Equation.
the equation to:
• y=100*sin(2*x)+10
11. Click OK.
12. Edit the To range value to 360.

15. Edit the Coordinate System type
to Cylindrical.
16. Click Equation.
the equation to:
• r=1000
• z=5*theta
18. Click OK.

Creating Composite Curves
You can copy and paste selected edges or edge chains from a
solid or surface model to create a composite datum curve.
• Two types of composite curves:

– Exact
– Approximate
Figure 1 – Creating an Exact Figure 2 – Creating an Approximate

Composite Curve Composite Curve
Creating Composite Curves

You can copy and paste selected edges or edge chains from a solid or
surface model to create a composite datum curve. There are two types of
composite curves that can be created:
• Exact – Creates an exact copy of the selected edge(s).
• Approximate – Creates a datum curve that approximates a chain of
tangent (C1) curves by creating a single curvature continuous (C2) spline.
This is useful for surfacing applications, when a continuous curvature curve
is desired to create a surface, in cases where the original edges may only
be tangent. You can also use approximate curves to remove small surfaces
from the design, and create a single surface with continuous curvature,
instead of a surface with multiple patches.
Approximate curves cannot be created on joint angles greater then

5 degrees.
During curve creation, you can drag the handles at either endpoint of the
previewed curve to lengthen or shorten the resulting curve. You can also edit
the values directly. In Figure 1, you can view the drag handles. To shorten
the resulting composite curve you can type negative values. To lengthen or
extend the endpoints of the resulting composite curve you can type positive
values.

PROCEDURE - Creating Composite Curves
Datum\Curve_Composite COMPOSITE.PRT
Task 1: Create an exact copy composite curve.

2. Select the boundary blend
surface.
3. Query-select the straight, front,
surface edge until the entire
edge length is pre-highlighted.
4. Click to select the pre-highlighted
edge.
5. Click Copy and click Paste

.
6. Select Exact from the Curve type
drop-down list in the dashboard,
if necessary.
8. Notice the Copy 1 feature in the
model tree.
Task 2: Create an approximate copy composite curve.
1. Select the boundary blend

surface.
2. Query-select the rear tangent
chain of edges until the entire
edge length is pre-highlighted.
3. Click to select the pre-highlighted
edge.

4. Click Copy and click Paste
.
5. Select Approximate from the
Curve type drop-down list in the
dashboard.
7. Notice the Copy 2 feature in the
model tree.

Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections
With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the
intersection of two sketches.
• System extrudes theoretical

surfaces.
• Curve created at the intersection
of these surfaces.
Figure 1 – Viewing Theoretically Figure 2 – Creating a Curve from

Extruded Surfaces Curve Intersections
Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections

With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection
of two sketches. The system theoretically extrudes surfaces towards each
other from the selected sketches, as shown Figure 1, and then creates the
curve at the intersection of the theoretical surfaces.
The Intersect feature automatically completes without opening the Intersect
dashboard if you preselect both references. You can, however, redefine the
intersect feature to change the selected sketch references. You can also
preselect one reference and start the Intersect tool. This opens the Intersect
dashboard and prompts you to select the second sketch.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve from Curve
Intersections
Datum\Curve_Isect-Curve CURVE_INTERSECTION.PRT
Task 1: Create a new curve from the intersection of two other curves.

2. Notice that there are two 2-D
datum curves.
datum curves.
4. Click Intersect from the

Editing group in the ribbon.
5. Notice the 3-D curve that is
created. Notice that the original
two curves are hidden.
6. Edit the definition of Intersect 1.

7. Select the References tab in the
dashboard and view the selected
sketches.

Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection
The Intersect tool enables you to create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the
intersection of two surfaces.
• Curve created at the intersection

of two surfaces.
• Resulting curve can be 2-D or 3-D.
Figure 1 – Creating a Curve from

Surface Intersection
Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection

With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection
of two surface quilts. The system creates the curve at the intersection of
the surfaces, as shown in Figure 1. The Intersect feature automatically
completes without opening the Intersect dashboard if you preselect both
references, since the Intersect process is fully defined. However, you can
redefine the intersect feature to change the selected quilt references. You
can also preselect one reference and start the Intersect tool. This opens the
Intersect dashboard and prompts you to select the second sketch.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection
Datum\Curve_Isect-Surface CURVE_INTERSECT-SURF.PRT
Task 1: Create a curve at the intersection of two surfaces.

2. Notice the two surfaces.
surfaces.
4. Click Intersect from the

5. Notice the 3-D curve that is
created.
6. Edit the definition of Intersect 1.

7. Select the References tab and
view the selected quilts.

Projecting and Wrapping Curves
You can project or wrap curves onto a surface or set of surfaces.
• Projected Curves
– Projected onto a surface or set of surfaces
– Normal to reference plane
– Length can increase or decrease from original
• Wrapped Curves
– Formed over a surface
– Length does not change from original
Figure 1 – Projecting a Curve Figure 2 – Wrapping a Curve
Creating Projected Curves

You can project a selected curve onto a surface or set of surfaces, normal to
a reference plane. Depending on the shape of the surface and the angle of
the plane, the length of the projected curve can increase or decrease from
the original.
When projecting a curve, the following options are available:
• References – Enables you to select the sketch or chain of curves to be
projected and the surface or surfaces to be projected onto. If desired,
you can define an internal sketch.
• Direction – Enables you to specify both the direction reference and the
direction. There are two different directions you can select:
– Along direction – Projects the selected chains or sketch in a specified
direction.
– Normal to surface – Projects the selected chains or sketch normal to the
target surface.
• Flip – Enables you to flip the direction of the projected datum curve.
Creating Wrap Curves

You can wrap (form) a sketched curve over a surface. The length of the
wrapped curve is not changed from the original. The surface the curve

is wrapped onto must be developable, meaning that it must be some type
of ruled surface.
When wrapping a curve, the following options are available:
• Select the sketch to be wrapped. If desired, you can define an internal
sketch.
• Specify the destination surface onto which the curve is to be wrapped.
• Define the wrap origin – By default, the wrap origin is the sketch center.
You can also create a sketched coordinate system in the wrapped sketch
and define it as the wrap origin.
• Ignore intersection surface – Causes any intersecting surfaces to be
ignored when wrapping the curve.
• Trim at boundary – Trims the portion of a curve that cannot be wrapped at
the surface boundary.

PROCEDURE - Projecting and Wrapping Curves
Datum\Curve_Project-Wrap PROJECT_WRAP.PRT
Task 1: Project a datum curve onto a surface.

2. Notice the two circular datum
curves.
3. Select datum curve
PROJ_CURVE from the model
tree.
4. Click Project from the
5. Select the surface.
7. The curve is projected onto the
surface.
8. Edit the definition of Project 1.

9. In the dashboard, click in the
Direction reference collector to
activate it.
• Select datum plane DTM2
from the model tree as the
new datum reference.
Task 2: Wrap a datum curve onto a surface.
1. Select datum curve

WRAP_CURVE.
2. Select the Editing drop-down
menu and click Wrap .

4. Edit the definition of datum curve
WRAP_CURVE.

from the Sketching group.
• Place a sketched coordinate
system on the sketch.
6. Click OK .
7. Orient to the WRAP view

orientation.
8. Edit the definition of Wrap 1.
9. Edit the Wrap Origin from Center
to Sketcher CSYS.
10. Notice the difference in the
wrapped curve location.

Trimming Curves
You can trim a curve at a selected point to either break it into
segments or specify which side to keep.
• Curve trimmed at Trimming object:

– Datum Point
– Datum Plane
– Another curve
• Blue side denotes the portion to
be removed.
• You can flip which side to keep:
– Keep side 1
– Keep side 2
– Keep both sides
Figure 2 – Keeping Both Sides
Figure 1 – Selecting Trimming Object, Keeping a Side,

Viewing Completed Trim
Trimming Curves
The Trim tool adapts to the object selected. It enables you to trim a curve or a
surface, whichever is selected. You can use the Trim tool to either remove a
portion of a curve or break it into multiple segments.
To trim a curve, you must select it as the Trimmed curve. You must then
select the Trimming object such as a datum point, datum plane, or point. The
curve is split at the Trimming object location. In Figure 1, a datum plane
is selected as the Trimming object.
The blue “shading” on the curve indicates the side that will be trimmed, or
removed. The arrow points towards the side to be kept. In the middle image
of Figure 1, the right half of the curve is to be removed.
You can flip the side of the curve that is trimmed using the following order:
• Curve split at Trimming object, keep side 1.
• Curve split at Trimming object, keep side 2.

• Curve split at Trimming object, keep both sides. No geometry is trimmed.
Rather, the curve is segmented. In Figure 2, both sides of the curve are
to be kept. Thus, both sides display an arrow.
You can flip the side by clicking the arrow in the graphics window, by
right-clicking and selecting Flip, or by clicking Flip Trim Sides from the
dashboard.
You cannot access the option to keep both sides by clicking the
arrow in the graphics window.

PROCEDURE - Trimming Curves
Datum\Curve_Trim CURVE_TRIM.PRT
Task 1: Trim a datum curve.

Display types: .
2. Select Sketch 1.
3. Click Trim from the Editing
4. Select datum point PNT0.
5. In the dashboard, click Flip Trim

Sides to make the arrow
point to the left, leaving blue
geometry on the right.

7. The curve side that was blue has
been trimmed away.
8. De-select all features.

9. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
10. Enable Plane Display .
11. Select the curve on its left side
as shown. Notice it is a trim
feature in the model tree.
12. Also notice that only one piece
is available for subsequent
selection.
13. Click Trim .

14. Select datum plane DTM1 from
the model tree.

15. In the dashboard, click Flip Trim
Sides twice to keep both
sides.

18. Select the curve. Notice it is
another trim feature in the model
tree.
19. Also notice that two pieces
are available for subsequent
selection.
20. Select the lower half of the curve.

Creating Offset Curves
You can create curves that are offset either along a surface or
normal to a surface.
• Curves offset along a surface:

– Original reference can be a
curve or surface edge.
– Define offset values:
♦ Distance
♦ Distance Type
♦ Location
• Curves offset normal to a surface:
– Original reference must be a
curve.
– Specify Scale.
Figure 1 – Offsetting a Curve
– Can specify datum graph. Along a Surface
Figure 2 – Offsetting a Curve Figure 3 – Offsetting a Curve

Normal to a Surface using a Datum Graph
Creating Offset Curves Along a Surface

You can create a datum curve that is offset from a surface boundary edge,
a chain of edges, or another curve on that surface. The resulting curve lies
on the surface. By default, one offset value is provided. However, you can
create additional offset values and then locate those offset values along the
offset edge as desired. The offset value location is a ratio of the entire offset
line length. For example, if you want to locate an offset value at the midpoint
of the curve, you would specify a Location of 0.5. You can also locate the
offset values on the curve endpoints. In Figure 1, the curve has two offset
values defined, one at each endpoint.
For each offset value, you can specify the distance the curve is offset from
its original curve. In Figure 1, the curve is offset on one side by 2.00, and
on the other side by 1.00. This distance value can be measured using the
following distance types:
• Normal to Edge – Measures offset distance normal to the boundary edge.

• Along Edge – Measures offset distance along the measurement edge.
• To Vertex – Starts offset curve at the vertex and parallel to the boundary
edge.
Creating Offset Curves Normal to a Surface

You can offset a curve on a surface, normal to a reference surface. The
resulting curve is raised off the surface by a distance, as shown in the Figure
2 and Figure 3.
You can specify this offset distance using the following methods:
• Offset value – The distance the curve is offset from the surface.
• Unit Datum Graph – A datum graph with a constant X-length of 1.0 is used
to specify the curve offset. The resulting curve is offset at a constant value
as defined by the Scale value in the dashboard. In Figure 2, a unit datum
graph is used to offset the curve. As a result, the offset is the same along
the entire curve.
• Optional Datum Graph – The curve offset is determined by an optionally
specified datum graph. When an optional datum graph is defined, the
system uses the Offset value as a multiplier. In Figure 3, the optional
datum graph is specified. As a result, the offset varies along the curve
based on the datum graph.

PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Curves
Datum\Curves_Offset CURVES_OFFSET.PRT
Task 1: Create a curve offset along a surface.

2. Select the surface.
3. Select the front edge.
4. Click Offset from the Editing
5. Edit the offset distance to 2.

6. In the dashboard, select the
Measurements tab.
• Right-click in the tab and select
Add. A point is added.
• Drag the point's dot to the
rightmost end.
• Edit the Distance Type to
Along Edge.
7. Right-click in the Measurements

tab and select Add. Another
point is added.
• Edit the Location to 0.35.
• Edit the Distance to 1.
8. In the Measurements tab,

right-click the third point and
select Delete.

Task 2: Create a curve offset normal to a surface.
1. Edit the definition of GRAPH1.

• In the menu manager, click
Done.
• Press ENTER.
2. View the graph. Notice that it
slopes from 0.5 to 1.25.
3. Click OK .
4. Select curve Offset 1.

5. Click Offset .
6. The dashboard now has more
options. The first, and default,
option is Offset Along Surface
. The first curve was this
type.
7. Select Offset Normal To

Surface .
• Edit the Scale to 1.0, if
necessary.

orientation.

Options tab.
• Click in the Graph collector to
activate it.
• Select GRAPH1.
• Notice that the curve has
updated.

11. Spin the model to notice the
difference in curve creation.

Creating Cosmetic Sketches
Cosmetic sketches are used to sketch entities on the model for
purely visual purposes.
• Purely visual
• Do not add or remove material
• Fully constrained or
Under-Constrained
• Unique display on screen and in
model tree
• Can be cross-hatched Figure 1 – Before and After
Cosmetic Features
Figure 3 – Cosmetic Sketched

Figure 2 – Under-Constrained Mode Text Created
Creating Cosmetic Sketches

Cosmetic sketches are created very similar to a typical sketch feature
(sketched datum curve). Unlike sketch features, cosmetic features are not
used to add or remove material from the model, but instead are used to
sketch on the model for purely visual purposes, as shown in Figure 1.
Cosmetic sketches are created using the Cosmetic Sketch option in the
Engineering group of the ribbon, and can contain any sketched geometry.
The sketch can be fully constrained, as with standard sketched features,
or can use the special Under-Constrained Mode of sketcher. This mode
enables you to snap the sketched geometry to references if desired, but
does not require dimensions to fully constrain the sketch, as shown in Figure
2. Under-Constrained Mode enables the import of large and complex 2-D
geometry.
By default, cosmetic sketches are created in a different color (orange) from
standard sketches (blue), and also have a unique icon in the model tree,
as shown in Figure 3.
Cosmetic sketches can contain cross-hatching that can be modified on a
drawing.
Several restrictions apply to cosmetic sketches:
• They do not appear by default when rotating the model.
• They cannot be used as a sketch reference for a sketch-based feature
(such as extrude).
• They cannot be referenced by other features or sketches. For example,
you cannot select a cosmetic sketched curve for a sweep trajectory or for
a snapping reference in sketcher.

PROCEDURE - Creating Cosmetic Sketches
Cosmetic\Sketch WRENCH.ASM
Task 1: Create a constrained cosmetic sketch with text.

2. Select SIDE_PLATE_OFF.PRT
in the model tree, then right-click
and select Open.
• Notice the existing standard
sketch features (blue).
3. Click the Engineering group

drop-down menu and select
Cosmetic Sketch.
4. Select the main model surface
and click Sketch.
.
6. Click Text and sketch a
reference line.
7. In the Text dialog box:

• Type 5mm.
• Select Right for the Horizontal
Position.
• Select Middle for the Vertical
Position.
• Click OK.
dimensions as shown.
9. Click OK to complete the

sketch.
10. Click in the background of the
graphics window to de-select
any geometry.
• Notice the difference in the
cosmetic appearance.

Task 2: Create an unconstrained cosmetic sketch with hatching.
1. Press ALT and select the main

surface.
Cosmetic Sketch.
3. Select Center Rectangle
from the Rectangle drop-down
list, and create the sketch shown.
4. Click the Setup group
drop-down menu and enable
Under-Constrained Mode.
• Notice the lack of dimensions
in Under-Constrained Mode.
5. Select Center and Axis Ellipse

from the Ellipse drop-down
list and sketch two ellipses.
• Constrain the ellipse centers
coincident to the diagonal
construction line endpoints.
6. Click Delete Segment and

trim the sketch as shown.
7. Click the Setup group
drop-down menu and disable
Under-Constrained Mode.
8. Click Sketch Setup from the

Setup group.
9. Select the Properties tab in the
Cosmetic Sketch dialog box.
• Enable Add cross-hatching.
• Edit the spacing to 5.
• Click Sketch.
sketch.

Module 3
Advanced Sketching
Module Overview
Sketches can consist of simple entities, such as lines, arcs, and circles.
However, you can create more complex shapes by using advanced entities,
such as ellipses, conics, splines, and elliptical fillets. You can also create
sketched text entities by either manually typing in the text value, or by using
the value of a parameter that you have specified in the design model. You
can adjust the text as desired. You can use Sketcher diagnostic tools to aid
you while in Sketcher to be more efficient.
Objectives
• Understand sketched curves.
• Sketch ellipses, elliptical fillets, and conics.
• Sketch and modify splines, as well as import and export spline points.
• Sketch and modify text.
• Analyze Sketcher convert options including Strong, Spline, Reference,
Perimeter, and Tapered.
• Analyze Sketcher dimension options, including creating reference and
baseline dimensions as well as locking dimensions.
• Use Sketcher diagnostic tools including shading closed loops, highlighting
open ends, highlighting open geometry, and feature requirements check.

Using Sketched Curves
Sketched curves can be used in a variety of different ways.
Uses include:
• Section
• Boundary
• Trajectory
• Reference Geometry
– Other curves
– Other datum features
– Surfaces or supporting Figure 1 – Sketched Curve
geometry Used as a Section
Figure 2 – Sketched Curves Figure 3 – Sketched Curve

Used as Boundaries Used as a Trajectory
Using Sketched Curves

Sketched curves are powerful because they can be used in so many different
ways. The following are common uses of sketched curves:
• Section – In Figure 1, the sketched curve was used as one of the three
sections in a rotational blend feature.
• Boundary – In Figure 2, the two sketched curves are used as the first
direction boundaries in a boundary blend feature.
• Trajectory – In Figure 3, the two sketched curves were used as trajectories
in the variable section sweep feature.
• As a reference for other geometry – Sketched curves can be used in
general for reference geometry for other features. They can be used as a
reference for other curves, other datum features, or ultimately for surfaces
or supporting geometry.

Sketching Ellipses
You can sketch elliptical sections using two methods.
• Ellipse creation options:

– Center and Axis
– Axis Ends
• Dimension options:
– Length of Major/Minor Axes
– Radius of Major/Minor Axes
– Any custom scheme
• Either Ellipse type can be created
or rotated to any angle.
Figure 1 – Center and Axis Ellipse,

Length Dimensions
Figure 2 – Axis Ends Ellipse, Figure 3 – Center and Axis Ellipse,

Radius Dimensions Created on an Angle
Sketching Ellipses
You can create two different types of ellipses:
• Center and Axis Ellipse
– When using this type of ellipse, you select a center location for the
major axis and one endpoint of the major axis. (The major axis is
always created symmetric to the center location.) You then select a third
location that defines the length of the minor axis.
• Axis Ends Ellipse
– When using this type of ellipse, you select a location for one endpoint of
the major axis and the other endpoint of the major axis. You then select
a third location that defines the length of the minor axis.
Keep in mind the following when sketching ellipses:

• The center point can be dimensioned or snapped to Sketcher references.
In the previous figures, the center point has been located using the
horizontal and/or vertical references.
• Ellipses are created with construction lines for the major and minor axes.
These construction lines can be used to dimension or constrain the ellipse.
• You can dimension an ellipse by its major and minor axes, even if the
ellipse is created on an angle. To create these dimensions, you can select
the axes construction lines and dimension them directly.
• You can also dimension an ellipse using the major axis (Rx) and minor axis
(Ry) radius dimensions. These radius values are measured along the axes
from the ellipse to its center. The major axis is always the first axis placed,
regardless of size compared to the minor axis.
• You can create an ellipse at any angle, based on the placement points for
the major axis. You can also rotate the ellipse to any angle after creating it.
• You can use Tangent, Coincident, and Equal Radii constraints.

PROCEDURE - Sketching Ellipses
Sketcher\Ellipse ELLIPSE.PRT
Task 1: Sketch an Axis Ends Ellipse and dimension it using radius

dimensions on the major and minor axes.
2. Click Sketch from the Datum

group.
3. Select datum plane FRONT from
the model tree as the Sketch
Plane.
• Click Sketch in the Sketch
dialog box.
.
5. Click Sketch View from the

In Graphics toolbar.
6. Click Axis Ends Ellipse from

the Sketching group.
7. Click the intersection of the
references as the first endpoint
of the major axis.
• Move the cursor to the right
and click to define the second
endpoint for the major axis.
• Move the cursor up and click
to define the length of the
minor axis.

8. Middle-click to stop sketching.
• Notice the default
dimensioning scheme.
9. Click Normal .
• Select the ellipse and then
middle-click. Click Major Axis
and click Accept. Type 120 as
the value and press ENTER.
• Select the ellipse again and
then middle-click. Click Minor
Axis and click Accept. Type
75 as the value and press
ENTER.
Task 2: Sketch a Center and Axis Ellipse and dimension it using length
dimensions on the major and minor axes.
1. Select Center and Axis Ellipse

from the Ellipse types
drop-down menu.
2. Click the center of the previous
ellipse.
• Move the cursor up and to the
right, then click to define the
endpoint of the major axis.
• Without permitting the ellipse
to snap to existing geometry,
move the cursor and click to
define the length of the minor
axis.

3. Middle-click to stop sketching.
• Notice the default
4. Click Normal .
• Select the major axis and
middle-click to place the
dimension. Type 275 as the
value and press ENTER.
• Select the minor axis and
dimension. Type 85 as the
• Select the major axis from
each ellipse and then
angle. Type 75 as the value
and press ENTER.
5. Middle-click and then select the
dimensions and drag them as
shown.
6. Click OK .
7. Press CTRL+D to orient to the standard orientation.

Sketching Elliptical Fillets
You can sketch elliptical fillets between sketched entities.
• Sketching elliptical fillets:

– Select two sketched entities.
– Tangent at the endpoints.
– Dimension schemes are the
same as ellipses.
♦ Fillets can be rotated.
Figure 1 – Creating Elliptical Fillets
Sketching Elliptical Fillets

Creating an elliptical fillet is very similar to creating a circular fillet; the
size of the fillet is initially based on pick point locations. However, using
elliptical fillets enables you to create an elliptical intersection between two
entities, rather than a rounded intersection. The elliptical fillet is tangent at its
endpoints to the adjacent geometry.
Elliptical fillets are similar to sketched ellipses in the following ways:
• Elliptical fillets are created with construction lines for the major and minor
axes. These construction lines can be used to dimension or constrain
the ellipse.
• You can dimension an elliptical fillet by its major and minor axes, as shown
in the right elliptical fillet. To create these dimensions, you can select the
axes' construction lines and dimension them directly.
• You can also dimension an elliptical fillet using the major axis (Rx) and
minor axis (Ry) dimensions, as shown in the upper-left elliptical fillet. These
radius values are measured along the axes from the elliptical fillet to its
center. The major axis is always the horizontal axis when the fillet is first
sketched, regardless of size compared to the minor axis.
• You can also rotate the elliptical fillet after creating it, as shown in the right
elliptical fillet.
• You can use Tangent, Coincident, and Equal Radii constraints.
You cannot select parallel lines as the entities for creating elliptical fillets.

PROCEDURE - Sketching Elliptical Fillets
Sketcher\Fillet_Elliptical ELLIPTICAL_FILLET.PRT
Task 1: Sketch and dimension three elliptical fillets using different

dimensioning schemes.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.
.
4. Select Elliptical from the
Fillet types drop-down menu in
5. Click the vertical and horizontal
sketched entities at the locations
shown to create the elliptical
fillet.
6. Click Vertical from the

Constrain group and select the
vertical minor axis.
7. Click Normal .
• Select the fillet and then
middle-click. Select Major
0.47 as the value and press
ENTER.
• Select the fillet again and then
middle-click. Select Minor
ENTER.
8. Click Elliptical .
fillet.

10. Click Normal .
• Select the major axis and
dimension. Type 0.42 as the
• Select the minor axis and
dimension. Type 0.80 as the
11. Click Elliptical .

fillet.
13. Click Vertical and select the
vertical minor axis.
14. Click Normal .

• Select the right fillet endpoint
and left vertical line.
• Middle-click to place the
horizontal dimension and type
1 as the value.
• Select the left fillet endpoint
and bottom horizontal line.
• Middle-click to place the
vertical dimension and type
0.25 as the value.
15. Further constrain and dimension

the sketch as shown.
16. Click OK .

Sketching Splines
Splines are freeform curves that pass smoothly through two or
more points.
• Minimum two points required.
• Can have any number of
intermediate points.
• Dimensioning schemes include:
– Dimensioning and constraining
spline points
– Tangency Angle
– Radius-of-Curvature
Figure 1 – Dimensioning a Spline
Figure 2 – Dimensioning Points Figure 3 – Dimensioning Radii

Tangency Angle of Curvature
Sketching Splines
Splines are freeform curves that pass smoothly through two or more points. A
spline can also have any number of intermediate points. Each time you click
the mouse, you create an additional point through which the spline passes.
Note that a spline passing through only two points initially forms a straight line.
Dimensioning Splines
You can dimension the endpoints of a spline, and you can also dimension
any of the intermediate points if desired. You do not have to dimension any
points of a spline if both endpoints snap to Sketcher references.
There are special dimensioning schemes for splines:
• Tangency Angle Dimensions – You can create tangency angle dimensions
for endpoints and intermediate points of a spline. Changing the angle value
alters the shape of the spline. To create this dimension, select the spline,
the spline endpoint, and a reference for tangency, then middle-click to place
the dimension in the desired location. Note that the placement location
dictates the “quadrant” for angle dimension measurement. In Figure 2, the
spline endpoints are dimensioned with tangency angles.
• Radius-of-Curvature Dimensions – After a Tangency Angle dimension
is created for a spline endpoint, you can create a Radius of Curvature
dimension for that endpoint. The Radius of Curvature dimension can be

used to control the radius of curvature at the endpoint of a spline; changing
its value changes the shape of the spline near the endpoint. Controlling
the Radius of Curvature dimension is useful in cases where a spline meets
up with other geometry (an arc for example), and a curvature continuity
is desired. To create this dimension, select the spline endpoint, then
middle-click to place the dimension. The dimension appears similar to a
radius dimension. In Figure 3, the spline endpoints are dimensioned for
radius of curvature.

PROCEDURE - Sketching Splines
Sketcher\Splines SPLINE.PRT
Task 1: Sketch a spline.

Display types: .
2. Click Sketch from the Datum

group.
3. Select datum plane FRONT as
the Sketch Plane.
• Click Sketch in the Sketch
dialog box.
.
5. Click Spline from the

Sketching group.
reference intersection as the
spline starting point.
7. Click four more times to create
additional points through which
the spline must pass. The first,
third, and fifth points should all
be on the horizontal reference.
8. Middle-click to stop creating
points and complete the spline.
9. Click One-by-One and edit

the two dimensions to 5 and 12,
respectively.
10. Click OK .

Task 2: Edit the spline definition and dimension an intermediate point.

2. Click Normal and dimension
the lowest intermediate point to
the horizontal reference. Type
ENTER.
the weak, horizontal dimension
to 9.30.
4. Click OK .
Task 3: Edit the spline definition and dimension tangency angles and
radii of curvature.

2. Click Normal .
• Click the spline, the left
endpoint, and the horizontal
reference, and middle-click
to place the tangency angle
dimension.
• Type 65 and press ENTER.
• Click the spline, right endpoint,
and horizontal reference,
then middle-click to place the
dimension.
When placing a tangency
angle dimension on a
spline, you must select the
spline body, a spline control
point, and a reference entity
to create the dimension.
However, it does not matter
in which order you make
the dimension reference
selections.

3. Click the left endpoint, then
middle-click to place the radius
of curvature dimension.
• Type 7.5 and press ENTER.
• Click the right endpoint, then
dimension.
• Type 4.5 and press ENTER.
4. Click OK .

Modifying Splines — Basic Operations
There are a number of basic operations you can perform on a
spline in Sketcher.
• Moving points.
• Spline Edit mode:
– Move individual points
– Move a range of points
– Specify X-Y coordinate
location
– Add points
– Delete points
– Extend spline Figure 1 – Moving a Point
Figure 2 – Adding a Point

Figure 3 – Deleting a Point
Modifying Splines — Basic Operations

There are a number of basic operations you can perform on a spline in
Sketcher. You can select individual points that comprise the spline and drag
them to new locations to change the shape of the spline, as shown in Figure 1.
You can also perform further basic operations within Spline Edit mode. To
access Spline Edit mode, you have two options: you can either double-click
the spline in the graphics window, or you can select it, then right-click and
select Modify. Upon accessing Spline Edit mode, the dashboard appears.
You must be in Spline Edit mode to perform the following basic spline
operations:
• Moving Points – You can move points using the following methods:
– You can select individual points and drag them to new locations to
change the shape of the spline.
– You can also select multiple points to move simultaneously. To do this,
you select a range of points to move by pressing SHIFT and selecting
two points to limit the range. For example, to move points 2, 3, and 4
in a spline that has 5 points you press SHIFT, select points 1 and 5,
then drag points 2-3-4 together. Note that the range of points cannot
contain constrained points.
– You can move points to precise locations by selecting a point and then
using the Point tab in the dashboard. In the Point tab, you can specify

a reference as the sketch origin or a selected sketched coordinate
system. Once the coordinate value's reference is selected, you can
specify precise X-Y location values. If the spline is placed in an internal
sketch for a sweep feature, and the spline is dimensioned to a Local
coordinate system, then you can edit the X, Y, and Z-coordinates to
create a 3-D spline.
• Adding and Deleting Points – You can add intermediate points to a spline
by right-clicking the spline and selecting Add Point, as shown in Figure
2. You must right-click over the spline for this menu to appear. You can
delete intermediate points from a spline by right-clicking the point you wish
to delete and selecting Delete Point, as shown in Figure 3. You must
right-click the top of the point for this menu option to appear.
• Extending the spline – You can also extend a spline by pressing CTRL+ALT
and clicking beyond a spline endpoint. This can only be done on an
endpoint without tangency or constraints defined.

PROCEDURE - Modifying Splines — Basic Operations
Sketcher\Splines_Modify MOD_SPLINE_BASIC.PRT
Task 1: Move the points of a spline.

Sketcher Display types: .
4. Notice that the spline contains
five points.
5. Click the point second from the

left and drag it upward.
6. Click the point third from the left
and drag it to the left.
7. Click the point fourth from the left
and drag it downwards and to
the left.
Task 2: Access Spline Edit mode, add three points, and move points as a
range.
1. Double-click the spline to access

Edit mode.
2. Right-click the spline below the
horizontal reference and select
Add Point.
3. Add two more points to the spline
below the horizontal reference.
4. Select the point fourth from the

left.
5. Press SHIFT and select the point
seventh from the left.
6. Select the point fifth from the left
and drag it downward. Notice
that points five and six move
together as a range.

Task 3: Edit the X-Y coordinate values of a point to specific values and
delete a point.
1. In the Spline ribbon, select the

Point tab.
2. Select the point above the
horizontal reference. Notice that
the Point tab displays the X and
Y coordinate values of this point.
• Edit the X and Y coordinate
values to 4 and 3, respectively.
3. Select the point sixth from the

left, then right-click and select
Delete Point.
4. In the dashboard, click Complete

Spline .
5. Click OK .

Modifying Splines — Advanced Operations
There are a number of advanced operations you can perform
on a spline in Sketcher.
Edit Spline mode enables you to

perform advanced operations:
• Fit Type
– Sparse
– Smooth
• Spline Curvature
– Scale
– Density
• Interpolation versus Control Points
• Control Polygon mode Figure 1 – Using the Smooth
Fit Type
Figure 3 – Interpolation versus

Figure 2 – Viewing Curvature Analysis Control Points
Modifying Splines — Advanced Operations

There are a number of advanced operations you can perform on a spline
in Sketcher. These operations are performed within Spline Edit mode.
To access Spline Edit mode, you can either double-click the spline in the
graphics window, or select it, then right-click and select Modify.
Using Fit Type

Fit type enables you to remove redundant data in the spline. You can use
either of the following methods:
• Sparse – Using the Sparse option, you can evenly decrease the number of
points on a spline. To use this option, you specify a sparsity deviation value.
• Smooth – Using the Smooth option, you can alter the shape of the spline
to make it flow more smoothly. To use this option, you specify a quantity of
spline points the system can use for averaging. In Figure 1, the Smooth
option was used to smooth the spline.

Displaying Spline Curvature
You can click Curvature Analysis in the Spline ribbon to display the
spline curvature. The spline curvature is a porcupine-style spline curvature
plot. The length of the spikes are proportional to the amount of curvature at
that location along the spline. The curvature plot can be displayed while
dynamically dragging spline points, and you can adjust the scale and density
of the curvature plot as desired. Scale increases or decreases the length of
all spikes, and density increases or decreases the quantity of spikes in the
plot. The spline curvature is displayed in Figure 2.
Interpolation Points Versus Control Points

By default, the system uses interpolation points to control the shape of the
spline. If desired, however, you can switch to viewing control points instead
by clicking Control Points in the Spline ribbon, as shown in the top
image of Figure 3. When you have toggled to control points, you can then
drag the spline points by the control points, as shown in the bottom image
of Figure 3. You can add or delete control points to control the shape of the
spline. You cannot, however, dimension to the control points unless you
switch to Control Polygon mode.
Control Polygon Mode

You can switch to Control Polygon mode to dimension to the control points
instead of the interpolation points. To access Control Polygon mode,
click Control Polygon in the Spline ribbon. You can also move the
interpolation points by dragging the control points. Plus, you can add or
delete control points to control the shape of the spline.

PROCEDURE - Modifying Splines — Advanced
Operations
Sketcher\Splines_Modify-Advanced MOD_SPLINE_ADV.PRT
Task 1: Display the spline's curvature and adjust the fit type.

Edit mode.
5. Click Curvature Analysis in

the dashboard.
• Drag the Scale slider to the
right to increase the scale.
• Drag the Density slider to the
right to increase the density.
• Drag one point upward to
simulate a “non-ideal” spline.
Notice that the curvature
becomes erratic.
6. In the dashboard, select the Fit

tab.
• Select the Smooth Fit type.
• Edit the number of Odd Points
to 5.
• Edit the number of Odd Points
to 3. Click Yes, if necessary.
7. In the Fit tab, select the Sparse

Fit type.
• Edit the Deviation to 0.01.
• Close the Fit tab.
8. Click Curvature Analysis .

Task 2: Edit the spline control point locations.
1. In the dashboard, toggle the

spline modification to Control
Points .
• Drag the point second from
the right upward to the height
of the point third from the right.
2. Enable Display Dimensions

from the In Graphics toolbar.
Notice the single dimension.
3. Click Control Polygon to

access Control Polygon mode.
4. Drag the control points to
approximate a dome shape.
5. In the ribbon, select the Sketch

tab.
6. In the Sketch tab, click Normal
as if to create a dimension.
7. Notice that the polygon control
points are dimensioned rather
than the spline.
8. Click OK .

Importing and Exporting Spline Points
You can display, export, or import the coordinate values for each
point along a spline.
• Requirements:
– Sketched Coordinate System
– Specify Coordinate System
Type
♦ Cartesian
♦ Polar
• Coordinate File options:
– Open a .pts text file.
– Save current coordinate data to
a file.
– Display current coordinate data.
Figure 1 – Viewing Spline Point Figure 2 – Importing Point

Coordinates Coordinate File
Importing and Exporting Spline Points

You can display, export, or import the coordinate values for each point along
a spline. You must first select a sketched Coordinate System. You can then
specify the type of Coordinate System selected, whether Cartesian (X, Y, Z)
or Polar (R, Theta, Z).
Once the coordinate system is selected, you have three options available:
• Open a text file (with a *.pts extension) of coordinate data by selecting
Open Coordinates from the File tab.
• Save the current coordinate data to a file by selecting Save Coordinates
from the File tab.
• Display the current coordinate data by selecting Coordinate Info from
the File tab.

PROCEDURE - Importing and Exporting Spline Points
Sketcher\Spline_Points SPLINE_PTS.PRT
Task 1: Create a spline and import a file of point coordinates.

4. Click Spline and sketch a
spline with 5 points. The spline
endpoints should snap to the line
endpoints.
5. The third spline point should lie
on the horizontal line.

from the Datum group in the
Sketch ribbon.
7. Click the left line endpoint to
place the coordinate system.
8. Middle-click to stop sketching
coordinate systems.

Edit mode.
10. In the dashboard, select the File
tab.
• Select the coordinate system.
• Click Coordinate Info to
view the current spline point
locations.
• You could save this information
to a text file.
• Click Close.

11. In the File tab of the dashboard,
click Open Coordinates .
12. In the Modify Spline dialog box,
click Yes to delete the strong
dimensions.
13. In the Open dialog box, click
SPLINE_DATA.PTS and click
Open.
14. Click Yes in the Confirmation
dialog box.
15. In the dashboard, click

Coordinate Info to view
the current spline point locations.
• Click Close.
16. In the dashboard, click Complete
Spline .
17. Click OK .

Sketching Conics
You can create sketched shapes that are elliptical, parabolic, and
hyperbolic using conic arcs.
• The type of conic created depends

upon the value of RHO.
• Dimensioning Conic Sections
– Conic endpoints
– Using RHO parameter
♦ RHO = A/(A+B), where C=D
– Using three points
– Tangency angle dimensions
Figure 1 – Understanding the

RHO Parameter
Figure 2 – Creating a Conic Figure 3 – Creating a Conic

using RHO using Three Points
Sketching Conics
You can create sketched shapes that are elliptical, parabolic, and hyperbolic
using Conic arcs. To create a conic arc, select the endpoint locations and
then select an apex or shoulder location. A centerline is automatically created
connecting the endpoints of the conic.
Dimensioning Conic Endpoints

You can dimension the ends of the conic using dimensions or constraints.
You then further dimension conic sections by using the RHO parameter, by
using three points, or through tangency angle dimensions.
Using the RHO Parameter

You can specify the value for the RHO parameter of the conic, as shown in
Figure 2. This is a dimension that appears on the conic similar to a radius
dimension. As shown in Figure 1, the RHO value is the ratio of length A to
A+B (that is, A/(A+B)), where C=D. RHO can vary from 0.05 to 0.95. Higher
RHO values create a more peaked conic shape, and lower RHO values
create a more flat conic shape.
The following RHO values create specific conic section geometry:

• 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical
• 0.5 = Parabolic
• > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic
• √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse
Using Three Points

Instead of using a RHO parameter, you can locate a Sketcher point at the
apex of the conic to control the conic shape. The Sketcher point can then
be dimensioned or constrained accordingly. In Figure 3, the conic is created
using three points. Notice that a RHO parameter is not present.
Using Tangency Angle Dimensions

You can create tangency angle dimensions for endpoints of a conic. Changing
the angle value alters the shape of the conic. To create this dimension, select
the conic, the conic endpoint, a reference for tangency, and middle-click to
place the dimension in the desired location. Note that the placement location
dictates the “quadrant” for angle dimension measurement. In Figures 2 and
3, the endpoints have tangency angle dimensions defined.

PROCEDURE - Sketching Conics
Sketcher\Conic CONIC.PRT
Task 1: Sketch a conic and dimension it with a RHO parameter.
2. Click Sketch from the Datum group.

3. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch Plane.
• Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
5. Select Conic from the Arc

types drop-down menu in the
Sketching group.
• Click the origin of the vertical
and horizontal references as
the left endpoint.
• Click the horizontal reference
to the right of the vertical
reference as the right endpoint.
• Move the cursor upward and
click to complete the conic.
6. Click Normal .
• Click the conic, the left
endpoint, and the horizontal
reference, and middle-click
to place the tangency angle
dimension.
• Click the conic, right endpoint,
and horizontal reference,
then middle-click to place the
dimension.

the width dimension to 10. If the
RHO dimension is already 0.5,
select it, right-click, and select
Strong, and press ENTER.
8. Click OK from the Sketch tab.
9. In the model tree, right-click
Sketch 1 and select Hide.
Task 2: Sketch a conic and dimension it using three points.
1. Click Sketch .
• Click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box.
2. Click Conic .
• Click the origin of the vertical
and horizontal references as
the left endpoint.
• Click the horizontal reference
to the right of the vertical
reference as the right endpoint.
• Move the cursor upward and
click to complete the conic.
3. Click Point from the

Sketching group.
4. Click the conic near the apex to
create the point.
5. Click Normal and create the

two tangency angles, editing the
left and right values to 70 and
50, respectively.
6. Notice that the point is
constrained to the conic and is
linearly dimensioned.
7. Notice that there is no RHO
dimension.

remaining dimensions as shown,
starting with the width dimension.
9. Click OK .

Sketching Text
You can add text as a sketched entity.
• Creating Text
– Specify manually
– Using existing parameters
• Placing Text
– Define start and end point
• Modifying Text
– Fonts
Figure 1 – Sketching Text
– Horizontal and Vertical Position
– Aspect ratio
– Slant angle
– Place along curve
– Kerning
• Open-Type Fonts
– Multi-Language Support
– Expanded Character Set Figure 2 – Modifying Text Attributes
– Advanced Control
Figure 3 – Placing Text Along

a Curve
Creating Sketched Text

You can add text in a sketch when creating extruded protrusions and cuts,
trimming surfaces, and creating cosmetic features. The sketched text can
be used by almost any solid or surface feature, as long as the rules for open
and closed sketches are followed.
You can either manually type the value for the text, or use existing parameters
in the design model. The system displays the value of the parameters as the
text value. You can also include text symbols, such as degree (°), plus or
minus (±), and omega (Ω).
Placing Sketched Text

To add text, you must define a start point and an end point. The system
creates a construction line between the start point and end point. The
length of this line determines the height of the text, while the angle of the
line determines the text orientation.

To help you visualize the direction and the orientation of the text, a small
triangle symbol is presented at the text start position point.
You can select the start point of the construction line at the beginning of the
text flow, and drag it to increase or decrease the height of the text. You can
also select the end point of the construction line and drag it to change the
text orientation.
The construction line length is determined by a dimension, which

you can modify to change the overall text height.
Modifying Sketched Text

You can perform the following types of modifications to sketched text entities:
• Fonts – To modify the font of sketched text entities, select from a list of
standard fonts, such as cal_alf, cal_grek, filled, font, font3d, isofont, leroy,
norm_font. Creo Parametric enables you to read and place Open-Type
Font (OTF) characters into Sketcher.
• Horizontal and Vertical Position – You can modify the justification values
for the horizontal and vertical positions of the text, which updates the text
justification around the text start position point. You can constrain the
vertical position of the text to Top, Middle, or Bottom. You can constrain
the horizontal position of the text to Left, Center, or Right. The default
dimensioning scheme for the text is consistent, regardless of its orientation.
The resulting text boundary box is tight against the text, providing additional
control on its exact position in Sketcher.
• Aspect ratio – Using this option, you can modify the aspect ratio factor of
the text without changing its height or orientation.
• Slant angle – You can modify the slant angle of the text using this option.
The Slant angle option affects how the text is angled, with respect to the
sides of the rectangle in which it is contained.
• Place along curve – Using this option you can place text along a curve.
First, select the arc or circle on which you wish to place the text. Then,
select the direction in which you want the text to flow. You can always flip
the direction of the text flow. You can also control the justification of text
along a curve by using the horizontal and vertical position options. If you
change the horizontal position, the text moves along the curve, either to the
right or left side of the defined curve.
• Kerning – Enables font kerning for the text string. This controls the space
between certain pairs of characters, improving the appearance of the text
string. For example, in some font types an “i” and an “m” are allotted
the same amount of space. Kerning provides proportionate spacing for
narrow and wide letters. Kerning is a characteristic of the particular font.
Alternatively, set the sketcher_default_font_kerning configuration option to
automatically enable kerning for all the new text strings that you create.
Open-Type Fonts
OTF is becoming a global font standard, with added capabilities for advanced
typography. The font is based on Unicode, which enables the framework
for multi-language support. Open-Type Fonts offer an expanded character
set and layout features to provide better linguistic support and advanced

typographic control. This enables you to read and place these custom fonts,
including symbols and logos that have been mapped, to specific functional
keys. In addition, you can select a custom font and place it, while still
maintaining proportions and ratios.

PROCEDURE - Sketching Text
Sketcher\Text TEXT.PRT
Task 1: Sketch text on a part model.

2. Edit the definition of feature TEXT_SKETCH.
3. Click No Hidden .
5. Click Text from the Sketching

group.

In Graphics toolbar.
7. Click at the center of the model
and drag a line upwards to
approximately 75% of the total
model height. Click again to
create the overall text height.
8. Move the Text dialog box to the
right.
9. In the Text dialog box, type 123

as the text. Notice that it moves
to the right.
• Edit the Horizontal Position to
Center.
• Edit the Vertical Position to
Middle.
• Click Text Symbol and click
the ° (degree) symbol.
• Click Close in the Text Symbol
dialog box.
10. In the Text dialog box, edit the

Aspect ratio to 1.5.
• Edit the Slant angle to 15.

11. In the Text dialog box, select the
Place along curve check box.
• Select the arc.
• Edit the Vertical Position to
Bottom.
12. In the Text dialog box, select Use

parameter.
13. In the Select Parameter dialog
box, select parameter VENDOR.
• Click Insert Selected.
• Notice that the numbers are
replaced by the parameter
value text.
14. Click OK in the Text dialog box.
15. Click One-by-One .

16. Select the arc, then right-click
and select Construction.
17. Click OK .
18. Click Shading .

19. Click the Model Intent group
Parameters .
20. In the Parameters dialog box,
edit the VENDOR parameter
Value to PTC.
• Click OK.
21. Click Regenerate .

Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options
Existing geometry and/or dimensions can be converted into
different formats in Sketcher without having to be re-created.
• The following conversions

can be performed:
– Strong
– Spline
– Reference
– Perimeter
– Tapered
– Arc Length/Arc Angle
– Radius/Diameter/Linear
Figure 1 – Converting to a Reference
Dimension
Figure 2 – Converting to a Figure 3 – Converting an Offset Line

Perimeter Dimension to a Tapered Line
Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options

Existing geometry or dimensions can be converted into different formats
in Sketcher without having to be re-created. Conversions are handled by
selecting the item to be converted, then clicking the Operations group
drop-down menu and selecting Convert To, followed by the desired
conversion type. In many cases, you can also select the item, then right-click
and select the desired conversion type. The following types of conversions
can be performed:
• Strong – Enables you to convert a weak (light blue) dimension to strong.
You can also select the weak dimension, then right-click and select Strong.
• Spline – Enables you to select a chain of lines and arcs, and convert them
to a spline that closely approximates the selected chain. After conversion,
you can delete the old entities to view or manipulate the spline.
• Reference – Enables you to select an existing dimension and convert
it to a reference dimension. You can convert any dimension type
including linear, angular, and radial dimensions. You can also select the
dimension, right-click, and select Reference. Reference dimensions track
with geometry, but you cannot edit their value. Reference dimensions
do not factor into a sketch's regeneration, so they cannot cause

over-dimensioning. Also, you can display reference dimensions on a 2-D
drawing. You can always convert a reference dimension back to a strong
dimension.
• Perimeter – Enables you to convert existing dimensions into a perimeter
dimension. To create a perimeter dimension, you select all dimensions
to be converted and the geometry that is to be included in the perimeter
measurement. You must then specify the dimension to be varied. This
dimension is driven by the perimeter dimension. That is, as the perimeter
value is updated, the sketch geometry updates by varying the dimension
specified. You can also click Perimeter from the Dimension group in
the Sketch tab.
• Tapered – Enables you to select a single offset edge and taper it. The
system achieves this by creating a second dimension for the offset edge.
You can then edit either dimension to create the taper. Note that you can
only taper single offset edges and not loops.
• Arc Length/Arc Angle – Enables you to convert an arc angle dimension
to an arc length dimension, or an arc length dimension to an arc angle
dimension.
• Radius/Diameter/Linear – Enables you to convert a radius, diameter, or
linear dimension to either of the other dimension types.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options
Sketcher\Convert CONVERT.PRT
Task 1: Convert a radius to a diameter and an arc angle to an arc length.

.
4. Select the 5 radius dimension,
then right-click and select
Convert to Diameter.
5. Select the 100 dimension, then
right-click and select Convert to
Length.
6. Click OK .
Task 2: Convert a normal dimension to a reference dimension.

3. Select the 8.38 dimension, then
right-click and select Reference.
4. Notice the angle dimension is
created because the reference
dimension is no longer factored
into the sketch's regeneration.
5. Click Perpendicular from the

Constrain group and select the
two angled lines.
• Notice the angle dimension is
removed and the reference
dimension value has adjusted
to match the new geometry.
• Middle-click to stop
constraining entities.

Task 3: Convert an existing dimension to a perimeter dimension.
1. Press CTRL, select the five lines

in the sketch, and click Perimeter
from the Dimension group.
2. Read the message area prompt
and select the 6.00 dimension as
the dimension to vary.
3. Edit the perimeter value to 40.
4. Notice the variable dimension
adjusts to compensate for the
new perimeter.
Task 4: Convert a vertical line to a tapered line.
1. Click Offset .
2. Select the right, vertical edge of
the protrusion.
• Type 4 as the offset and press
ENTER.
• Click Close.
two horizontal lines.
5. Select the vertical offset line.
6. Click the Operations group
Convert To > Tapered.
7. Notice the extra dimension that
is created.

8. Edit the top 4 dimension to 2.
9. Click OK .
10. Click Shading .

Locking Sketcher Entities
You lock Sketcher dimensions and/or geometry to prevent
accidental modifications.
• Locking Geometry
– Cyan lock icon
– Geometry cannot be
dragged
– Will update to other edits
• Locking Dimensions
– Red color
– Dimension cannot be
dragged
– Value can be edited
Figure 1 – No Entities Locked
Figure 2 – Geometry
Lines Locked Figure 3 – Dimensions Locked
Locking Sketcher Entities

In a sketch, you can lock either geometry or dimensions to help preserve
your design intent. By locking an entity, you prevent accidental modifications
from dragging to an undesired value. However, you can still make changes to
locked geometry or dimensions by editing the dimension value.
Keep in mind the following when locking Sketcher entities:
• For geometry, a cyan lock symbol is shown when you highlight an entity
or Show entity locks.
• For dimensions, the whole dimension displays in red.
• The locked status of an entity is preserved when you complete and
redefine a sketch.
• The locked status of an entity is preserved when using dynamic edit to drag
a section from Part mode.
Locking Sketcher Geometry
To lock sketcher geometry, select the geometry item (for example, a line or
arc) you want to lock and then either right-click and select Lock, or select

Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon. To unlock
the selected geometry, select Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down
menu in the ribbon, or right-click and select Unlock.
You can toggle the display of the lock icons by right-clicking, with nothing
selected in the sketch, and selecting Show entity locks or Hide entity locks
from the right-click pop-up menu.
Locking Sketcher Dimensions

To lock dimensions, select the dimension or dimensions you want to lock
and then either right-click and select Lock, or select Toggle Lock from the
Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon. To unlock the selected dimension,
click Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon, or
right-click and select Unlock.
In addition, the Autolock option enables you to automatically lock
user-defined dimensions. You can specify whether you want to automatically
lock the dimension that you create or modify by setting the value of the
sketcher_dimension_autolock configuration option to yes. Alternatively, you
can click File > Options, select the Sketcher category in the Creo Parametric
Options dialog box, and select the Lock user defined dimension check box.
After you specify that the user-defined dimensions are to be locked, all
dimensions that you subsequently create or modify automatically appear
locked. The locked state of the user-defined dimension is maintained when
you quit or reenter Sketcher mode. The state of the dimensions that are
created before you specify to automatically lock the dimensions, do not
change.
The locked state of a dimension is not retained if the dimension is
referenced in a relation; the relation takes priority over the locked
status of the dimension.

Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options
In addition to normal dimensions, you can create other types
of dimensions within Sketcher and perform operations on
dimensions.
• Dimension options include:

– Creating Reference
Dimensions
♦ Driven dimension
♦ Track with geometry
♦ Not editable
♦ REF suffix
– Creating Baseline
Dimensions
♦ Creates ordinate Figure 1 – Creating a Reference
dimension scheme Dimension
Figure 2 – Creating a Baseline

Dimension and Ordinate Dimensions
Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options

In addition to normal dimensions, you can create other types of dimensions
within Sketcher. You can also perform various operations on dimensions
within Sketcher.
Creating Reference Dimensions

A Reference dimension is a driven dimension that is created within Sketcher.
Reference dimensions track with geometry, but you cannot edit their value.
Reference dimensions are denoted within Sketcher with the suffix REF.
You can create a Reference dimension for linear, angular, and radial
dimensions. Reference dimensions do not factor into a sketch's regeneration,
so they cannot cause over-dimensioning. Also, you can display Reference
dimensions on a 2-D drawing. A Reference dimension has been created in
Figure 1. You can click the Reference icon from the Dimension group.

Creating Ordinate Dimensions using a Baseline Dimension
A baseline dimension creates an ordinate dimension scheme. When you
place the baseline dimension, switch to normal dimensioning, and dimension
the baseline to a reference; the resulting dimension is ordinate. In Figure
2, the baseline dimension is the 0.00 dimension, and the 5.00 and 15.00
dimensions were dimensioned to the baseline dimension, which resulted in
an ordinate scheme. You click Baseline from the Dimension group to
create the ordinate scheme.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options
Sketcher\Dimensions_Options DIMENSIONS.PRT
Task 1: Create a reference dimension and resolve a Sketcher conflict.

.
5. Click Reference from the
Dimension group.
6. Select the upper-right angled
line and middle-click to place the
dimension.

the adjacent angled line.
8. Notice the over-dimensioned
condition.
9. In the Resolve Sketch dialog
box, click Dim > Ref to resolve
the conflict.
Task 2: Lock dimensions to restrict the sketch.
2. Click the lower-right corner of the
sketch and drag it in a circular
motion.
3. Notice that the whole sketch
moves.
4. Click Undo .
5. Press CTRL and select the 4.00
and 5.00 dimensions.
• Right-click and select Lock.
• Notice the red color.

6. Click the lower-right corner of the sketch and drag it in a circular
motion.
7. Notice the sketch motion is restricted.
8. Click Undo .
9. Select the bottom sketched

entity, then right-click and select
Lock.
10. Cursor over the entity and notice
the lock.
11. Click the lower-right corner of the
sketch and drag it.
12. Notice the sketch motion is fully
restricted.
Task 3: Create ordinate dimensions.
1. Click Baseline from the

Dimension group.
2. Select the left vertical sketch line
and middle-click above it to place
the baseline dimension.

Dimension.
• Select the 0.00 baseline
dimension.
• Select the first peak and
middle-click above it to place
the dimension.
• Select the perpendicular
(orthogonal) constraint below
the first peak.
• Click Delete in the Resolve
Sketch dialog box and press
ENTER.

4. In the graphics window, select
the 0.00 baseline dimension.
• Select the second peak and
middle-click above it to place
the dimension.
• Select the perpendicular
(orthogonal) constraint below
the second peak.
• Click Delete and press
ENTER.
5. Click OK .
6. Click Shading .

Sketcher Diagnostic Tools
Sketcher diagnostic tools enable you to analyze common
sketching problems.
Sketcher
Diagnostic
Capabilities
• Shade closed
loops.
• Highlight
overlapping
geometry. Figure 1 – Shade Closed Lopes
• Highlight open
ends.
• Feature
requirements
check.
Figure 2 – Highlight Overlapping Geometry
Figure 3 – Highlight
Open Ends Figure 4 – Feature Requirements Check
Sketcher Diagnostic Tools

Four diagnostic tools have been added to Sketcher to help find, analyze, and
solve common sketching problems. The following icon tools are available in
the Inspect group in the Sketch ribbon tab:
• Shade Closed Loops – The area inside entities that form a closed
loop is shaded. The default shading color is a pale yellow.
• Overlapping Geometry – Sketched geometry that is overlapping is

highlighted in red. This includes sketched geometry that crosses other
geometry, or lies directly on other geometry.
– The icon for this option does not remain depressed, meaning the
highlighting appears until the sketch view is changed or repainted, and
then you can click the icon again.

• Highlight Open Ends – The endpoints of entities that are not common
to more than one entity are highlighted. For example, any open ends of
the sketch are highlighted. The highlight appears as a large red square
on the open endpoints in question.
– The icon for this option stays depressed, enabling you to sketch and
manipulate the sketch to view the open ends highlighting appear and
disappear.
• Feature Requirements – Provides a report indicating whether the

sketch meets the requirements for the feature being created. This option is
available in 3-D (Part mode) Sketcher only. Although this option works for
an external or internal sketch, to get the full benefit from the tool you should
be in an internal sketch. This ensures that the tool can compare the sketch
geometry with the specific requirements for that feature. For example, the
following features each have different sketch requirements:
– Solid Extrude – Must form a closed loop by itself or against adjacent
geometry.
– Solid Revolve – Sketched geometry must be on one side of the
centerline.
– Rib – Must have an open sketch.

PROCEDURE - Sketcher Diagnostic Tools
Sketcher\Diagnostics DIAGNOSTICS.PRT
Task 1: Utilize the diagnostic tools on a sketch with issues.
2. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

• Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
• Select the front model surface.
• Click Sketch.
• Click No Hidden .
• Click Sketch View .

• Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
3. Click Palette .
• Double-click the diagnostic
sketch.
If you do not see the
diagnostic sketch,
make sure to set the
Working Directory
to Sketcher\
Diagnostics folder.
• Place the sketch anywhere on

the model.
• Click Close from the Sketcher
palette.
• Edit the Scale to 1.0 and press
ENTER.
• Drag the sketch to snap to the
centerlines.
• Click Accept Changes .

4. Click OK .
• Notice the two warnings in the
message window.
• Click No.
5. Click Feature Requirements
from the Inspect group.
• Notice the various warnings.
• Click Close.
6. By default Shade Closed Loops
is enabled in the Inspect
group so closed sections should
be shaded.
• Notice that the sketch is not
shaded, indicating that the
section is open.
7. Click Overlapping Geometry

.
• Zoom in on the red highlighted
lines.
8. Click Corner and trim the
lines.
• Click Refit .
9. Verify that Highlight Open Ends

is enabled in the Inspect
group.
• Zoom in on the two red
squares.
10. Click Corner and trim the
lines.
• Click Refit .
• Notice that the closed sketch
is now shaded.

11. Click Feature Requirements
.
• Notice that the sketch has
no warnings and the section
is now shaded, indicating a
closed section.
• Click Close.
• Click OK .
12. Orient to the 3D view orientation.

13. Click Shading .
14. Right-click and select Remove
Material.
• Right-click the depth handle
and select To Selected.
• Select the rectangular surface
of Extrude 2.

Module 4
Advanced Hole Creation
Module Overview
Holes are found in most manufactured products, and come in a variety of
shapes and sizes. Holes can be drilled, contain counterbores, contain
countersinks, contain threads, or be created from an industry standard set
of sizes.
In this module, you learn more advanced methods of hole creation, including
using standard holes, sketched holes, and on point holes.
Objectives
• Create standard holes.
• Display holes in a lightweight manner.
• Create sketched holes.
• Create on point holes.
• Create cosmetic threads.

Creating Standard Holes
Standard holes use hole and thread sizes from ISO, UNC, or UNF
engineering standards.
Standard hole options include:

• Thread series:
– ISO
– UNC
– UNF
– Represented by a surface • Drilled hole depth options:
• Tapping: – Shoulder
– Tapered hole – Depth
• No tapping: • Add countersink:
– Drilled hole – Add Exit Countersink
– Clearance hole • Add counterbore
Figure 1 – Standard Hole Options
Creating Standard Holes

Standard holes are based on industry-standard fastener tables. Creo
Parametric provides hole charts and tapped or clearance diameters for the
selected fastener from ISO, UNC, or UNF standards. Any hole can be made
into a standard hole, including linear, radial, diameter, and coaxial holes.
The following standard hole options are available:
• Tapping – You can specify thread sizes from ISO, UNC, or UNF standards.
You can also make a tapped hole tapered. In Creo Parametric, you can
specify whether threads are displayed in the interface. Threads are
represented by a surface, as shown on the left two holes in the figure.
• No Tapping – If you do not tap the hole, you must specify whether the hole
is a clearance hole or a drilled hole. If the hole is a clearance hole, specify
whether the fit is Close, Medium, or Free. If the hole is drilled, there are
two different ways to dimension the depth:
1. Hole Shoulder Depth – Enables you to specify the depth of the drilled
hole to the end of the shoulder.
2. Hole Depth – Enables you to specify the depth of the drilled hole to
the tip of the hole.
• Add countersink – Creates a countersink on the hole. You can edit the
countersink angle and diameter, although standard values are provided
based on the hole size. You can also create an exit countersink on a
through all hole.

• Add counterbore – Creates a counterbore on the hole. Again, you can
edit the counterbore diameter and depth, although standard values are
provided based on the hole size.

PROCEDURE - Creating Standard Holes
Hole\Standard_Hole HOLE_STD.PRT
Task 1: Redefine four simple holes to make them standard holes.

2. Edit the definition of HOLE_1.
3. In the dashboard, click Standard
Hole .
• Click Tap Hole , if
necessary.
• Edit the hole size to UNC
1/4-20 from the drop-down
lists.
• Edit the depth to Through All
.
• Click Countersink .
4. Select the Shape tab in the

dashboard.
• Select the Include thread
surface check box, if
necessary.
• Select Thru Thread.
• Select the Exit Countersink
check box.

Hole .
• Click Tap Hole to de-select
it.
• Click Clearance Hole .
• Edit the hole size to UNC
3/8-16 from the drop-down
lists.
• Edit the depth to Through All
.
• Click Counterbore .

dashboard.
• Select Free Fit from the
drop-down list.
• Clear the Exit Countersink
check box, if necessary.

Hole .
• Click Tap Hole to enable
it, if necessary.
• Edit the hole size to ISO M8x1.
• Click Shoulder Depth , if
necessary.
• Edit the depth value to 20.

dashboard.
• Select the Include thread
surface check box if
necessary and edit the
depth to 15.

Hole .
• Click Tap Hole to de-select
it.
• Edit the hole size to ISO
M12x1.
• Click Tip Depth , if
necessary.
• Edit the depth value to 20.

17. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume >
Resume Last Set.

Lightweight Hole Display
Only the hole outline appears with Lightweight Hole Display.
• Icon in Dashboard
– Hole outline appears
– Icon in model tree
• Mass Properties affected
– Dialog box appears upon
calculation
Figure 1 – Default and Lightweight

Holes
Figure 2 – Lightweight Hole in

Model Tree
Figure 3 – Message Window
Lightweight Hole Display

You can enable the Lightweight hole display option by clicking Lightweight
Hole in the dashboard for a straight hole. Once enabled, the hole
is represented by only its outline on the placement surface, speeding up
regeneration and simplifying the display for models with high quantities
of holes.
Keep in mind the following when using this option:
• The model tree displays the Lightweight hole icon for holes with the
Lightweight option enabled.
• Mass Properties are affected after changing a hole to Lightweight display.
– A dialog box appears to remind you if Lightweight holes are present
when calculating mass properties.
– A model with Lightweight holes enabled generally has an increased
mass over its mass with solid holes.
• The Lightweight hole option is only available for simple holes.
You can change the display of an existing solid hole by selecting it, (either on
the model or in the model tree) then right-clicking and selecting Convert to

Lightweight. Conversely, the display of a Lightweight hole can be converted
to that of a solid hole by selecting it, then right-clicking and selecting Convert
to Solid.

Creating Sketched Holes
For situations where a custom hole profile is required, you can
create a sketched hole.
• Holes can be linear, radial, or
coaxial.
• Sketch the profile or open an
existing one.
• Sketch requirements:
– The hole must be sketched
vertically.
– The first vertical datum
centerline is used to revolve the
section.
– The section must be closed.
– The uppermost horizontal
line must be aligned with the
placement surface. Figure 1 – Viewing the Sketch
Figure 2 – Horizontally Placed

Sketched Hole
Figure 3 – Placing a Sketched Hole
Creating Sketched Holes

For situations where a custom hole profile is required, you can create a
sketched hole. You can place a sketched hole using linear, radial, or coaxial
placement. You can either sketch within the context of the hole feature or
open an existing sketch file. If desired, your company can create a library of
previously saved sketches to be used in the creation of sketched holes.
When creating a sketched hole, the following are requirements for the sketch:
• The hole must be sketched vertically. However, the sketch can be placed
in any orientation in the model. For example, in Figure 2, the sketched
hole is placed horizontally.
• The first vertical datum centerline is used to revolve the section.
• The section must be closed.
• The system aligns the uppermost horizontal line in the sketch with the
placement surface on the model. In Figure 3, the top edge of the sketch is
aligned to the top surface of the model.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sketched Holes
Hole\Sketched_Holes HOLE_SKETCHED.PRT
Task 1: Create a sketched hole by sketching the hole profile.

2. In the ribbon, click Hole from
the Engineering group.
3. Click the top surface to place the
hole.

References Collector.
5. Press CTRL and select the left
and back surfaces.
• Edit the offset from the left
surface to 12.5.
• Edit the offset from the back
surface to 6.75.
6. In the dashboard, click Use

Sketch .
• Click Activate Sketcher .
• Click Centerline from the
Datum group and sketch a
vertical centerline.
• Sketch and dimension the hole
profile as shown.
• Click OK .

Task 2: Create a sketched hole by importing the hole profile.
1. Click the Hole .

2. Click the front, rounded surface
to place the hole.
planes FRONT and TOP.
• Edit the angle offset from
datum plane FRONT to 60.
• Edit the axial offset from datum
plane TOP to 4.60.

Sketch .
• Click Open .
• In the Open Section dialog box,
select HOLE_SECTION.SEC
and click Open.
7. Select the Operations group

drop-down list, and click
Resume > Resume Last Set.
8. Spin the model to view the
sketched hole cross-sections.

Creating On Point Holes
You can place a hole by selecting a datum point.
• Datum point must lie on a surface.

• The hole is created perpendicular to the surface.
• Useful for placing holes on contoured surfaces.
Figure 1 – Creating an On Point Hole
Creating On Point Holes

You can place a hole by selecting a datum point. The datum point must be
created on a surface. When you select the datum point, the system positions
the hole perpendicular to the surface referenced by the datum point, and the
hole is center aligned with the datum point. This method is useful for placing
holes on contoured surfaces, when you want the hole axis to be normal to
the surface location.

PROCEDURE - Creating On Point Holes
Hole\On_Point HOLE_ON-PNT.PRT
Task 1: Create a hole on a datum point.

Display types: .
2. Click Hole from the
Engineering group.
3. ClickDatum in the
dashboard.
group.
• Select the front, right, rounded
corner surface.

References.
planes RIGHT and FRONT from
the Model Tree.
plane RIGHT to 17.
plane FRONT to 18.
7. Click OK in the Datum Point
dialog box.
8. In the dashboard, click Resume

Feature .
9. Edit the hole diameter to 3.
10. Edit the hole depth to To Next
.

12. Expand Hole 1 in the model tree.
13. Notice the embedded datum
point.
14. Right-click Hole 1 and select
Edit.
15. Notice that you can edit the
datum point offset dimensions.

Creating Cosmetic Threads
Cosmetic threads are used to create a lightweight representation
of threads on a model, without actually modeling a helical
feature.
Lightweight representation
• No geometry created
• Surface Feature
– Associated parameters
– Properties from
standard holes
• Internal or external threads
Figure 1 – External Cosmetic Thread
Figure 2 – Internal Cosmetic

Thread Figure 3 – Cosmetic Thread Parameters
Creating Cosmetic Threads

Cosmetic threads are used to create a lightweight representation of threads
on a model, without actually modeling a helical feature, as shown in Figure
1 and Figure 2.
Cosmetic threads generate a surface feature with a set of parameters that
define the thread, as shown in Figure 3. The parameters can be imported,
exported, or used in a drawing. Cylindrical or Conical surfaces can be
selected to create internal or external threads. Cosmetic threads use known
information about standard holes to automatically assign cosmetic thread
properties, wherever possible. You can define thread pitch and major/minor
diameter if the reference surface does not belong to a standard threaded hole.
The resulting Cosmetic thread definition is not parametrically linked
to hole definition.

PROCEDURE - Creating Cosmetic Threads
Cosmetic\Thread WRENCH.ASM
Task 1: Create an external cosmetic thread.

2. Select SETSCREW.PRT in the
graphics window, then right-click
and select Open.

Cosmetic Thread.
4. Select the surface on which to
apply the cosmetic thread.
5. Select the Depth tab.

6. Select the surface from which to
start the thread.

7. Notice the thread depth defaults
to surface length.
8. Select the Properties tab and

notice the default properties.
9. Click Define Standard Thread

from the dashboard.
10. Select ISO from the standard
drop down-list, if necessary.
11. Select M2.3x.45 from the thread
size drop-down list.
12. Notice the default properties
have been updated.

• Click Close and return to the assembly.
Task 2: Create an internal cosmetic thread.
1. Select SIDE_PLATE_OFF.PRT,
right-click, and select Open.

Cosmetic Thread.
3. Select the surface on which to
apply the cosmetic thread.
• Notice the cosmetic thread
has automatically matched to
the underlying M2.3 x .45 hole.
4. Select the thread start surface.
5. Right-click the depth drag handle

and select To Selected.
6. Query select the back surface.
8. With the feature still selected,

right-click and select Pattern.
10. Click Close .

Module 5
Advanced Drafts and Ribs
Module Overview
With the draft feature, you can create tapered or angled surfaces from
existing geometry. It is common to create drafted surfaces on molded or
cast parts, however the draft feature can also be used to create this type of
geometry for everyday modeling tasks. It is also common to add ribs on
molded and cast parts for increased structural rigidity.
In this module, you learn how to utilize several advanced draft options, such
as drafting intent surfaces, drafting with multiple angles, and using different
features for splits. You also learn how to create trajectory ribs.
Objectives
• Draft intent surfaces.
• Create drafts with multiple angles.
• Create drafts using the extend intersect surfaces option.
• Create draft splits at sketch, at curve, and at surface.
• Create trajectory ribs.

Drafting Intent Surfaces
Intent surfaces work well for drafts when referencing all surfaces
from a single feature.
• Creates robust references to “concepts.”

• Use when referencing surfaces from one feature.
Figure 1 – Using Intent Surfaces to Draft a Part Model
Drafting Intent Surfaces

You can select intent references within the Draft tool. Using intent references
creates robust references to “concepts” rather than explicit surface id's such
as side surfaces or end surfaces. Intent surfaces work well for drafts when
referencing all surfaces from a single feature. For example, in Figure 1, intent
surfaces are used to draft all surfaces of the hex cut. When the sketch for the
hex cut is modified, the draft feature automatically updates. Had the surfaces
been selected individually, the draft feature would have failed.
When geometry from multiple features must be selected, you should use
methods such as Loop surfaces and Surface and Boundary.

PROCEDURE - Drafting Intent Surfaces
Draft\Intent-Surfs DRAFT_INTENT-SURFS.PRT
Task 1: Draft a part model using intent surfaces.

Display types: .
2. Click Draft from the Draft

types drop-down menu.
the intent surfaces of the inner
hex cut feature.
4. Press CTRL, right-click to query,

and select the outer cylindrical
intent surfaces.
5. Right-click and select Draft

Hinges.
• Select datum plane TOP in the
model tree.
Split tab.
• Select Split by draft hinge as
the Split option.
• Select Draft sides
dependently as the Side
option.
7. Edit the draft angle to 10.

8. In the dashboard, click Reverse
Angle .
10. Disable Plane Display .

• Enable only the following
.
• Drag a window around the hex
sketch and press DELETE.
• Click Center and Point
and sketch a circle.
• Click One-by-One and edit
the diameter to 10.
12. Click OK .
13. Notice that the draft automatically
updated without failing.

Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles
You can create draft features that contain multiple angles.
• Each angle has:
– Draft angle value
– Reference
– Location
♦ Ratio
• Draft Angle operations:
– Add/Delete angle
– Flip Angle
– Make Constant Figure 1 – Angles Tab in Dashboard
Figure 2 – Adding Multiple

Draft Angles Figure 3 – Flipping an Angle
Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles

You can create draft features that contain multiple angles. To create additional
angles in the draft feature you use the Angles tab in the dashboard, as shown
in Figure 1. In addition to its own draft angle value, you can also specify the
following two items for each draft angle:
• Reference – The selected entity on which the draft angle lies. You can
either click this collector and select a new edge reference, or you can drag
the “dot” in the graphics window onto a new reference. Any edge of the
drafted surface can be used for the Reference.
• Location – The length ratio value along the Reference edge. For example,
if you want the draft angle to reside at the midpoint of the reference you
would specify a Location value of 0.5, as shown in the figures. You can
either type a different location value in the Angles tab, or you can drag the
“dot” in the graphics window to a new location.
You can right-click an angle in the Angles tab to perform the following
operations:
• Add Angle – Enables you to add additional draft angles. You can also
right-click a draft angle “dot” to add additional angles.

• Delete Angle – Enables you to delete the draft angle you right-clicked. You
can also right-click a draft angle “dot” to delete that particular draft angle.
• Flip Angle – Flips the direction of the draft at the selected angle location.
You can also right-click the drag handle to flip the angle. In Figure 3, the 8
degree draft angle was flipped relative to the other angles.
• Make Constant – Deletes all draft angles except the first one.
The Reverse Pull Direction option in the dashboard flips the

pull direction for all draft angles. To flip the draft direction for a
specific draft angle, right-click its drag handle and select Flip Angle.
The Adjust angles to keep tangency option forces the resultant draft surfaces
to be tangent. This option is only available for a single draft angle, as drafts
with multiple angles always keep surfaces tangent.

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles
Draft\Mult-Angles DRAFT_MULTIPLE-ANGLES.PRT
Task 1: Create a draft with multiple draft angles on a part model.
2. Click Draft from the Draft

• Select the right face to draft.
Hinges.
• Select the top surface.

Angles tab.
• Right-click the existing angle
and select Add Angle twice.

angle dots and drag them to the
outside and the center of the
surface edge.

6. From the back, edit the angles
to 15, 10, and 8.

Pull Direction .
8. Notice that all three angles have
flipped.
9. In the Angles tab of the

dashboard, right-click the 8
angle and select Flip Angle.

Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option
The Extend intersect surfaces option becomes valuable when
resulting draft geometry encounters an edge of the model.
• Default behavior:
– Overhanging geometry created.
• Extend Intersect Surfaces cases:
– Draft extended to meet adjacent
model surface.
– Model surface extends into the
draft surface.
– Reverts to default behavior.
Figure 1 – Default Draft Behavior
Figure 2 – Extending Intersect

Surfaces
Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option

The Extend intersect surfaces option becomes valuable when resulting
draft geometry encounters an edge of the model. By default, the system
automatically creates the draft geometry so that it overhangs the edge of the
model, as shown in Figure 1.
You can use the Extend intersect surfaces option to create different resultant
geometry. When this option is selected, Creo Parametric tries to extend the
draft to meet the adjacent surface of the model. If the draft cannot extend to
the adjacent model surface, the model surface extends into the draft surface,
as shown in Figure 2. If neither of these cases are possible, the system
reverts to creating a draft surface that overhangs the edge of the model as if
the option were not selected.

PROCEDURE - Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces
Draft Option
Draft\Extend-Intersect EXTEND-INTERSECT.PRT
Task 1: Use the Extend intersect surfaces draft option in a part model.
2. Select Draft from the Draft

• Select the right surface of the
small rectangle.
Hinges.
• Select the top surface of the
small rectangle.
4. Drag the draft angle outward to
30 degrees.


Options tab.
• Select the Extend intersect
surfaces check box.
9. Notice that the model surface
has extended into the draft
surface.

Creating Drafts Split at Sketch
You can use a sketch to define custom split lines.
• Sketch becomes linked.

• Sketch can be unlinked.
• A new sketch can be defined.
• Sketch need not lie on draft surface.
Figure 1 – Viewing Sketch Figure 2 – Draft Split at Sketch
Creating Drafts Split at Sketch

You can specify a sketch to be used as the split object. This enables you to
create custom split lines. When you select an existing sketch as the split
object, it becomes linked. However, you can unlink the sketch if desired. You
can also define a new sketch. If the sketch does not lie on the draft surface,
Creo Parametric projects it onto the draft surface in the direction normal to
the sketching plane. The sketch in Figure 1 was used as the Split object for
the draft in Figure 2.

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Sketch
Draft\Split-Sketch DRAFT_SPLIT-SKETCH.PRT
Task 1: Create a draft split at a sketch.
1. Disable all Datum display types.

• Select the large, front surface
containing the sketch.
Hinges.
• Select the top surface of the
left rectangular “step.”
4. Drag the angle so the upper draft
portion goes into the model.

Split tab.
• Select Split by split object as
the Split option.
• Select sketch SPLIT_
SKETCH.
• Select Draft second side
only as the Side option.
6. Drag the angle so the draft goes
into the model.

Split tab.
• Select Draft first side only as
the Side option.

Split tab.
independently as the Side
option.
• Edit both draft angles to 7 so
the draft goes into the model.

Creating Drafts Split at Curve
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” curve.
• Material at the curve remains constant.
Figure 2 – Draft Split at

Figure 1 – The Datum Curve Datum Curve
Creating Drafts Split at Curve

You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” curve. This causes the
material at the curve to remain constant. The curve shown in Figure 1 was
used as the draft hinge. The draft was then split at this draft hinge to create
the resulting geometry in Figure 2.
If you specify a curve as the draft hinge, you must also specify a separate
pull direction reference.

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Curve
Draft\Split-Curve DRAFT_SPLIT-CURVE.PRT
Task 1: Create a draft split at a curve.

• Select the front surface.
Hinges.
• Select the curve.
4. Right-click and select Pull

Direction.
• Select datum plane TOP from
the model tree.

Angle .

Split tab.
• Select Split by draft hinge as
the Split option.
dependently as the Side
option.
10. Click Reverse Angle .

12. Notice that this draft has removed
material from the top and bottom
of the model.

Creating Drafts Split at Surface
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” surface, causing
material at the surface to be added.
• Additional draft hinges can be

created.
– You must first split the draft
surfaces.
– Material remains the same size
at both draft hinge locations.
Figure 1 – Draft Split at Surface
Figure 2 – Splitting the Draft Figure 3 – Selecting Multiple

at Surface Draft Hinges
Creating Drafts Split at Surface

You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” surface, causing material at
the surface to be added, as shown in Figure 1. This type of draft enables you
to select additional draft hinges. To select a second hinge, you must first split
the draft surfaces. The model remains the same size at both draft hinge
locations. In Figure 2, the selected surface is used as the split object. Once
this split object was defined, a second draft hinge was able to be added,

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Surface
Draft\Split-Surface DRAFT_SPLIT-SURFACE.PRT
Task 1: Create a draft split at a surface.

• Select the front surface.

Hinges.
• Select an edge on the front of
the top surface.
• Press SHIFT, cursor over an
adjacent edge, right-click to
query, and select the upper
Tangent chain.
4. Right-click and select Pull

Direction.
• Select datum plane TOP from
the model tree.

Split tab.
• Select Split by split object as
the Split option.
• Select the surface quilt.
7. Edit the lower draft angle to 10.
8. Click Reverse Angle for the
lower draft angle.

References tab.
Hinges.
• Press CTRL and select an
edge on the front of the bottom
surface.
• Press SHIFT, cursor over an
adjacent edge, right-click to
query, and select the bottom
Tangent Chain.
• The Draft hinges collector
should contain two Tangent
Chains.

QUILT and select Hide.
13. Note that this draft has added
material to the center of the
model.

Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction
The Variable Pull Direction Draft tool sweeps a ruled surface
normal to a specified draft hinge.
• Differences from the

conventional Draft tool:
– Create draft sets.
– Specify a draft angle
greater than 30°.
– The Pull Direction
Reference Surface does
not have to be planar.
• You can specify a splitting
surface.
Figure 1 – Creating Draft Sets
Figure 2 – Defining a Splitting Surface
Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction

You can create draft on models that contains variable pull directions. The
Variable Pull Direction Draft tool is located in the Draft drop-down menu in
the Engineering group of the ribbon. It sweeps a ruled surface normal to
a specified draft hinge. You do not specify surfaces to be drafted with the
Variable Pull Direction Draft tool.
The Variable Pull Direction Draft tool also differs from the conventional Draft
tool in the following ways:
• You can create draft sets within the Variable Pull Direction Draft tool, similar
to the Round and Chamfer tools. In Figure 1, the left and right surfaces are
drafted in one set, and the rear surface is drafted in a second set.
• You can specify a draft angle greater than 30 degrees.
• The Pull Direction Reference Surface specified does not have to be planar.
You can specify a splitting surface with the Variable Pull Direction Draft tool.
The splitting surface causes the draft to split at the selected surface reference.
This enables you to specify a different draft angle on each side of the splitting
surface reference. In Figure 2, the draft angle above the splitting surface is
30 degrees, and the draft angle below the splitting surface is 10 degrees.

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts with Variable Pull
Direction
Draft\Var-Pull DRAFT_VAR-PULL.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable pull direction draft feature with two sets.

2. Orient to the SETS view
orientation.
3. Select Variable Pull Direction
Draft from the Draft
drop-down menu.
4. Select the top U-shaped surface
as the Pull Direction Reference
Surface.
5. Select the References tab from

the dashboard.
• Click in the Draft Hinges
collector.
• Press CTRL and select the
two upper side edges.
• Edit the draft angle to 14.
6. In the References tab, click *New

set.
7. Select the upper rear edge.
right-click and select Make
variable.
9. Edit the left draft angle to 20, and
the right draft angle to 30.

Task 2: Create a variable pull direction draft feature with a splitting surface.
1. Orient to the SPLIT view

orientation.
SPLIT and select Unhide.
3. De-select the feature.
4. Select Variable Pull Direction
Draft from the Draft
drop-down menu.
5. Select the top U-shaped surface
as the Pull Direction Reference
Surface.
Hinges.
7. Select the front, upper edge.

References tab.
• Select the Splitting Surfaces
check box.
9. Select surface SPLIT.
10. Notice the draft splits at the
surface location.
11. Edit the upper draft angle to 21.

12. Edit the lower draft angle to 10.

SPLIT and select Hide.

Creating Trajectory Ribs
Quickly create a network of ribs with draft and rounds.
• Trajectory Rib Sketch:
– Self-extends to the model.
– Can self-intersect.
– Can pass through features.
– Can have multiple open loops.
• Trajectory Rib Feature:
– Can add draft.
– Can add rounds. Figure 1 – Original Model
Figure 2 – Trajectory Rib Sketch Figure 3 – Trajectory Rib Created
Creating Trajectory Ribs

Like the traditional Profile Rib, Trajectory Ribs are typically used to strengthen
parts; however, with a Trajectory Rib, you sketch the rib centerline from a top
view, instead of sketching the rib from a side view. You can select an existing
sketch or sketch internal to the Trajectory Rib.
The system can add material above or below the sketch, but with a Trajectory
Rib the thickness is always applied symmetrically about the sketch. You can
also add draft or rounds as part of the Trajectory Rib feature.
The sketch used for a Trajectory Rib has special abilities:
• The rib self-extends to find solid material. Therefore, you do not have to
extend the sketch and align it to the part. If sketched beyond the model,
the rib automatically trims itself to the model boundaries.
– In the case of a model with complex wall geometry, it is best to permit
the system to self-extend the rib to the model.
• The rib sketch can intersect itself. This enables quick and easy sketching
to achieve the desired rib.
• The rib sketch can pass through existing features, such as screw boss
geometry. The system simply ignores the existing solid geometry, and
continues the rib in the next free space.
• The rib sketch can have multiple open loops, unlike sketches for most
other solid features. This enables you to sketch multiple unconnected ribs
in the same feature.
The Trajectory Rib has several options:

• You can add Draft. Draft is added such that the exposed end of the rib
maintains its width, and you can specify the angle that tapers outward
and towards the base of the model.
• You can add rounds on the exposed edges of the rib. With this option you
can round the top of the rib using a two-tangent round. The size of the
two-tangent round is controlled by the width of the rib, similar to creating
a full round. You can also create the rounds by specifying radius values
manually.
• You can add rounds on the internal edges of the rib. With this option you
can round the bottom of the rib using a radius value that is equal to the top
(exposed edges), or by specifying radius values manually.
Once a Trajectory Rib is created, there are some additional options:
• You can right-click the rib and select Externalize Rounds. This separates
the rounds from the rib feature, and creates a round feature in the model
tree. The rounds can then be further customized.
• If you did not add rounds within the rib feature, the internal and exposed
edges of the rib are made available for quick selection by querying to an
intent edge set.

PROCEDURE - Creating Trajectory Ribs
Rib\Trajectory_Rib TRAJECTORY_RIB.PRT
Task 1: Create rib features on a part model.
2. Select Trajectory Rib from

the Rib types drop-down list.
3. Right-click and select Define
Internal Sketch.
4. Select datum plane RIB from the
model tree.
5. Click Sketch.


Setup group in the ribbon.
8. In the In Graphics toolbar, click
No Hidden from the Display
Style type drop-down menu.
References.
10. Select the outer circular edge on
the boss feature on the right and
click Close.
11. Right-click and select Line
Chain, and sketch two lines.
12. Click OK .
13. Drag the width handle to 3.
15. Click Shading .
16. Press CTRL+D.

17. With the rib still selected,
right-click and select Edit
Definition.
18. Click Add Draft from the
dashboard.
19. Select the Shape tab and edit
the angle to 2.
20. Click Add Exposed Rounds .

21. In the Shape tab, click Specified
Value.
22. Type 1 for the radius.
23. Select the Placement tab and

click Edit.

26. Right-click and select Line
Chain, and then sketch an
additional line.
27. Click OK .
28. Click Shading .

29. Press CTRL+D.
30. Click Add Internal Rounds .

31. Select the Shape tab, and click
Same as top.

33. Notice that a single rib feature is
created in the model tree.

34. With the rib still selected,
right-click and select Externalize
Rounds, then click OK.
35. Notice that a separate round
feature is created in the model
tree.

Module 6
Advanced Shells
Module Overview
With the shell feature, you can hollow out the inside of a solid, leaving a shell
of a specified wall thickness. You can also select surfaces to be assigned a
different thickness as well as specify surfaces to be removed. You can even
create partial shells to exclude surfaces from being shelled.
In this module, you learn how to create the shell feature and utilize several
shell options, such as excluding surfaces, removing surfaces, and creating
shells of multiple thicknesses.
Objectives
• Analyze shell references and thickness options.
• Exclude surfaces from Shell features.
• Extend shell surfaces.
• Understand shell corner options.

Analyzing Shell References and Thickness
Options
You can manipulate a Shell feature by specifying surfaces to
remove, specifying surfaces of non-default thickness, and flip
which side of the model adds the shell thickness.
• Removed surfaces
• Non-default thickness
• Change thickness direction
Figure 1 – Shell Feature, No

Surfaces Removed
Figure 2 – Shell Feature with Figure 3 – Shell Feature Containing

One Thickness Non-Default Thicknesses
Analyzing Shell References and Thickness Options

You can manipulate a Shell feature by specifying surfaces to remove,
specifying surfaces of non-default thickness, and flip which side of the model
adds the shell thickness.
Removing Surfaces
The References tab in the dashboard contains the Removed surfaces
collector. If you do not select any surfaces for removal, a “closed” shell is
created, with the whole inside of the part hollowed out, as shown in Figure
1. You can select surfaces to be removed as part of the shell operation. In
Figure 2, the top surface has been removed from the Shell feature. You can
view the shell by creating a cut or cross-section.
Specifying Non-Default Thickness Surfaces

The References tab in the dashboard also contains the Non-default thickness
collector. You can select surfaces to which a different thickness dimension is
applied than the rest of the Shell feature. For each surface included in this
collector, you can specify a different individual thickness value. In Figure 3,
two surfaces have been assigned different non-default thicknesses of 20mm
and 30mm, while the remainder of the model is shelled at a thickness of
10 mm.

Inverting Shell Thickness
In the dashboard, you can flip the shell thickness by clicking Change
Thickness Direction . This causes the shell thickness to be added to the
outside of the original model, creating a void in the shape of the original
model.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Shell References and
Thickness Options
Shell\References_Thickness REF_THICK.PRT
Task 1: Specify surfaces to remove and surfaces to make non-default

thickness.

3. Notice that the model is shelled,
but that surface references have
not been removed.
4. Right-click CUT and select
Suppress.
• Click OK.
5. Edit the definition of Shell 1.

6. Select the top surface to remove
it.
7. Right-click and select Non

Default Thickness.
8. Select the right, flat surface.
9. Drag the non-default thickness
to 20.

References tab.
11. Notice that there is one reference
specified to be removed, and
one reference specified as
non-default thickness.

12. Press CTRL and select the left,
flat surface to also be non-default
thickness.
• In the dashboard, edit the
thickness to 30.
13. In the dashboard, click Change

Thickness Direction .

16. Click Change Thickness
Direction .
18. Right-click Shell 1 and select

Edit.
19. Spin the model and notice the
dimensions.

Excluding Surfaces from Shells
You can specify surfaces to be excluded so that only certain
parts of a model are shelled.
• Select one or more surfaces.

• Surface Sets dialog box enables
further selection and exclusion.
Figure 1 – No Surfaces Excluded
Figure 2 – Selecting Surfaces Figure 3 – Surfaces Excluded

to Be Excluded from Shell
Excluding Surfaces from Shells

Sometimes, you do not want all surfaces of a part model to be shelled. For
example, you may not want the grips in Figure 1 to be shelled. You can
exclude surfaces from the Shell feature. Excluding surfaces enables you to
select one or more surfaces and exclude them from the Shell feature. In
Figure 2, surfaces are selected to be excluded from the shell. In Figure 3, the
shell has been completed, and the grips are not shelled.
When specifying surfaces for exclusion, you can open the Surface Sets
dialog box. The Surface Sets dialog box enables you to further add Individual
Surfaces, Seed and Boundary Surfaces, and Excluded Surfaces.

PROCEDURE - Excluding Surfaces from Shells
Shell\Excluding_Surfs EXCLUDE_SURFS.PRT
Task 1: Excluding Surfaces from Shells

2. In the model tree, select Shell 1.
3. Notice that the grips on the cap
are shelled.

5. Orient to the standard orientation.
6. Right-click and select Exclude
Surfaces.
7. Press CTRL and select all five
surfaces from the patterned grip
near the shell dimension.

9. Click Named Views and
select 3D.
10. Notice that the grip is no longer
shelled, as it has been excluded.
11. Click Resume Feature and

orient to the standard orientation.
Options tab.
• Right-click Individual
Surfaces and select Remove.
13. Select a surface on the grip
again.

surface of the upper main round
on the cap.
15. Notice that you have initiated a
Seed and Boundary Surfaces
set.
16. In the Options tab, click Details.

17. In the Surface Sets dialog box,
select Seed and Boundary
Surfaces.
other half of the round.
• Press CTRL and query-select
the bottom, flat surface of the
model.
18. In the Surface Sets dialog box,

select Excluded Surfaces.
two outer halves of the cap.
• Click OK.

select 3D.
21. Notice that all grips are now
excluded from the Shell feature.

Extending Shell Surfaces
In many cases, there are two possible geometry results when
partially shelling a feature.
Surface extension options include:

• Extend inner surfaces
– Default option
• Extend excluded surfaces
Figure 1 – Shell Feature Result
Figure 3 – Excluded Surfaces

Figure 2 – Inner Surfaces Extended Extended
Extending Shell Surfaces

In many cases, there are two possible geometry results when partially
shelling a feature. The result depends on the surfaces that will be used to
close the solid. In Figure 1, the model has been shelled. In Figure 2 and
Figure 3, the cylinder feature surfaces have been excluded from the Shell
feature. The two results are:
• Extend inner surfaces – Forms a cover over the inner surfaces of the
shell feature. This is the default option, and is shown in Figure 2. The
inner surfaces of the shell were extended in front of the excluded cylinder
surfaces.
• Extend excluded surfaces – Forms a cover over the excluded surfaces
of the shell feature. In Figure 3, the excluded cylinder surfaces were
extended into the shell.

PROCEDURE - Extending Shell Surfaces
Shell\Extend_Options EXTEND_SURFACES.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with the options available for extending surfaces of a

Shell feature.

3. Notice that the Shell feature
hollows out the cylinder portion
of the model.

Surfaces.
5. Press CTRL and select the front,
back, and cylindrical surfaces of
the cylinder.

7. Notice that the cylinder is
excluded from the Shell feature.

Options tab.
• Select the Extend excluded
surfaces option.
11. Notice that the cylinder extends
into the Shell feature.

Analyzing Shell Corner Options
There are two options to control situations when a Shell feature
with an excluded surface breaks through the solid.
• Prevent shell from penetrating
solid at:
– Concave corners.
– Convex corners.
Figure 1 – Basic Shell Feature
Figure 2 – Shell Prevented from

Penetrating Solid at Concave Figure 3 – Shell Prevented from
Corners Penetrating Solid at Convex Corners
Analyzing Shell Corner Options

There are two options to control situations when a Shell feature with an
excluded surface breaks through the solid.
• Concave corners – Prevents the shell from cutting through the solid at
concave corners.
• Convex corners – Prevents the shell from cutting through the solid at
convex corners.
Figure 1 depicts a shelled block that contains a convex chamfer (at the
top) and a concave chamfer (at the bottom). In Figure 2 and Figure 3, the
chamfer surfaces have been excluded from the shell. In Figure 2, the shell is
prevented from penetrating the solid at concave corners. Consequently, the
concave chamfer no longer penetrates the solid, while the convex chamfer
still does penetrate the solid.
Conversely, in Figure 3, the shell is prevented from penetrating the solid at
convex corners. Consequently, the convex chamfer no longer penetrates the
solid, while the concave chamfer still does penetrate the solid.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Shell Corner Options
Shell\Corner_Options CONCAVE_CONVEX.PRT
Task 1: Analyze the shell corner options of a part model.
1. Disable all Datum display types.

Surfaces.
4. Select the surface of the convex
chamfer.
5. Select the Options tab.

6. Verify that the Concave corners
option is selected.
8. Notice that the Shell feature is
cutting through.

Options tab.
• Select the Convex corners
option.

12. Press CTRL and select Chamfer
1 and Shell 1.
13. Right-click and select Suppress.
• Click OK.
15. In the model tree, click Settings
> Tree Filters.
16. Enable Suppressed Objects in
the Model Tree Items dialog box,
and click OK.
17. Press CTRL and select Chamfer
2 and Shell 2.
18. Right-click and select Resume.

Surfaces.
21. Select the surface of the concave
chamfer.

23. Verify that the Convex corners
option is selected.
25. Notice that the Shell feature is
cutting through.

Options tab.
• Select the Concave corners
option.

Module 7
Advanced Rounds and Chamfers
Module Overview
Creo Parametric enables you to create finishing features, such as rounds
and chamfers. These features can be placed directly on design models by
selecting suitable references. You can create complex geometry by defining
transitions between various round and chamfer sets. You can use advanced
options to address placement ambiguity in rounds and chamfers, as well as
trim round and chamfer geometry.
Objectives
• Create rounds through curve.
• Create rounds and chamfers by reference.
• Create variable radius rounds and analyze round profiles.
• Analyze round and chamfer creation methods.
• Analyze round and chamfer references and pieces.
• Create rounds and chamfers using intent edges.
• Use round and chamfer transitions.
• Create autorounds.
• Create corner chamfers and other chamfer types.
• Analyze advanced chamfer dimensioning schemes.
• Create curvature continuous rounds.

Analyzing Round Profile
You can create rounds that have profiles other than that of a
circular arc.
• Additional profiles:
– Conic
– D1 x D2 Conic
– C2 Continuous
– D1 x D2 C2
• RHO parameter
– 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical
– 0.5 = Parabolic
– > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic
– √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse Figure 1 – Circular Rounds
Figure 3 – Curvature Continuous

Figure 2 – Conic Rounds Rounds
Creating Conic Rounds

You can create rounds that have profiles other than that of a circular arc, an
example of which is shown in Figure 1. You can define a round that uses a
conic round profile. There are two options available for conic rounds:
• Conic – Defines a round profile to be conic using a single distance value. A
conic shape factor (RHO value) can also be controlled.
• D1 x D2 Conic – Defines a round profile to be conic using two distance
values. A conic shape factor (RHO value) can also be controlled.
Both conic round profiles maintain tangency like that of the circular arc round,
but can be used to create sharper or shallower rounds using the RHO
parameter. In Figure 2, the rounds are conic rounds.
Creating Curvature Continuous Rounds
You can also define a round that uses a curvature continuous spline as a
round profile. This option is particularly useful on models where maintaining
a curvature continuity is important across rounded surfaces. The system
calculates the round, then applies the spline profile. You use the curvature
continuous round profile with single or variable radius rounds.
There are two options for curvature continuous rounds:

• C2 Continuous – Defines the round profile to be curvature continuous (C2)
using a single distance (radius) value. A conic shape factor (RHO value)
can also be controlled.
• D1 x D2 C2 – Defines the round profile to be curvature continuous (C2)
using two distance (radius) values. A conic shape factor (RHO value) can
also be controlled.
In Figure 3, the rounds are curvature continuous rounds.
Using the RHO Parameter

You can specify the value for the RHO parameter of the conic or curvature
continuous round to create elliptical, parabolic, or hyperbolic rounds. Higher
RHO values create a more peaked conic shape, and lower RHO values
create a more flat conic shape.
The following RHO values create specific conic section geometry:
• 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical
• 0.5 = Parabolic
• > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic
• √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Round Profile
Round\Profile ROUND_PROFILE.PRT
Task 1: Create a Conic round.

2. Press CTRL and select Round
1 and Round 2.
3. Orient to the FRONT view to
observe their profiles.
4. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
5. Click Previous from the
Orientation group.
6. Edit the definition of Round 1.

7. In the dashboard, select the Sets
tab.
• Edit the drop-down list from
Circular to Conic.
8. Drag the square conic parameter
handle left and right and observe
the round shape changing.
9. Edit the Conic parameter value
to 0.70 in the dashboard.

Task 2: Create a D1 x D2 Conic round.

tab.
Circular to D1 x D2 Conic.
• Edit the D1 and D2 values to 5
and 10, respectively.
• Edit the Conic parameter value
to 0.35.

4. Press CTRL and select Round
1 and Round 2.
5. Orient to the FRONT view to
observe their profiles.
Task 3: Create a C2 Continuous and D1 x D2 C2 round.
1. Click Previous .
tab.
Circular to C2 Continuous.
4. Edit the Conic parameter value
to 0.70 in the dashboard.

tab.
Circular to D1 x D2 C2.
• Edit the D1 and D2 values to 7
and 5, respectively.
• Edit the Conic parameter value
to 0.35.

Analyzing Round Creation Methods
You can create a round using either the rolling ball method or
normal to spine method.
• Rolling ball
– Standard round algorithm.
– Path left from “rolling” a ball
forms the round.
• Normal to spine
– Arc cross-section swept normal
to a spine curve.
– Good for quick round direction
changes.
Figure 1 – Completed Normal

to Spine Round
Figure 2 – Converting Failing Round from Rolling Ball to Normal to Spine
Analyzing Round Creation Methods

You can create a round using either the Rolling ball method or Normal to
spine method. A round created using Normal to spine is shown in Figure 1.
Rolling ball is the default round creation method used by Creo Parametric. It
uses a standard round algorithm, where the system creates round set pieces
by “rolling” a theoretical spherical ball along the geometry, following any
tangencies. The path left by the ball forms the round.
If the Rolling ball method is not successful, like in the left image of Figure 2,
then you can try the Normal to spine method. The Normal to spine method
works well for situations where the round changes direction quickly. For a
Normal to spine round, the system sweeps an arc cross-section normal to
a spine curve, where the spine curve is the edge you select to be rounded.
You can also use the Conic and D1 x D2 Conic profiles with the Normal to
spine method.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Round Creation Methods
Round\Method ROUND_METHOD.PRT
Task 1: Analyze the round creation methods in a part model.
2. Select Round from the

Round types drop-down list.
3. Select the edge between
cylinders.
4. Edit the radius to 4.

9. Notice that the round fails.
10. Click Cancel in the
Troubleshooter dialog box.
• Click Yes.

tab.
Rolling ball to Normal to
spine.

15. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select FRONT from the Named
Views list.
tab.
Circular to Conic.
• Accept the default Rho value.

Creating Rounds Through Curve
You can control the radius of a round by using edges or curves.
• Select a curve or edge.

• The round radius follows the
selected reference.
Figure 1 – Rounds Created using

Edges as Curves
Figure 2 – Rounds Created using Curves
Creating Rounds Through Curve

You can control the radius of a round by using edges or curves. The round
radius follows the selected reference, with respect to the edges being
rounded. The rounds can also add or remove material. In Figure 1, two
different rounds were created, one on each peg. The round on the left peg
adds material, while the round on the right removes material. In Figure 2,
the edge is selected for rounding in the left image. In the middle image,
the curve is specified for the round to be created through. The right image
displays the final round.

PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds Through Curve
Round\Thru_Curve THRU_CURVE.PRT
Task 1: Create rounds through curve.

2. From the Engineering group,
select Round from the
3. Select the edge of the larger
cylinder on the right.
tab.
• Click Through curve and
select the bottom edge of the
smaller cylinder.

6. Notice the round is removing
material.
7. Click Round .
8. Select the bottom edge of the
small cylinder on the left.
tab.
• Click Through curve and
select the top edge of the
larger cylinder.
• Press SHIFT and select the
other larger cylinder edge.

11. Notice that the round is adding
material.
12. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.
13. Click Round .
14. Select the top, right edge.
15. Right-click and select Through
curve.
• Select the spline.
17. Click Round .

18. Select the concave edge.
curve.

20. Right-click and select Add set.
21. Select the top, right edge.
curve.

Creating Variable Radius Rounds
You can create a round with multiple radius values.
• Each radius has:

– Location
♦ Ratio
♦ Reference
– Radius
♦ Value
♦ Reference
• Radius operations
– Add/Delete radius
– Make constant/variable Figure 1 – Variable Radius Round
Figure 2 – Location
Differences Figure 3 – Radius Value Differences
Creating Variable Radius Rounds

By default, when you create a round, Creo Parametric creates a constant
round, where a single radius is applied. However, you can also create a
variable round. A variable round is one that has multiple radius values as
shown in Figure 1.
You can convert a constant radius to a variable radius and vice versa. To
convert a constant radius to a variable radius, you right-click in the graphics
window or Radius table in the Sets tab and select Make variable. Conversely,
you convert a variable radius to a constant radius by right-clicking in the
graphics window or Radius table in the Sets tab and selecting Make constant.
Each variable round must have the following two items defined:
• Location – Defines where the variable round occurs in the part model. You
can define each variable round location in either of the following ways:
– Ratio – The length ratio value along the Reference edge. For example,
if you want the variable round to reside at the midpoint of the Reference
edge, specify a Ratio value of 0.5. You can either type a Ratio value in
the Sets tab, or you can drag the location handle in the graphics window
to a new location. In Figure 2, the left radius has a ratio of 0.85 defined.
That is, it is 0.85, or 85% of the way along the highlighted reference.

– Reference – Enables you to select a specific reference location for the
variable round to occur. In Figure 2, the right radius location is defined
at a datum point.
• Radius – Defines the round radius value at the defined location. You can
define each round radius value in either of the following ways:
– Value – Enables you to type the desired round value as a numerical
value. The round radius value displays in the Radius table. In Figure 3,
the upper radius has a value of 18, while the lower radius value is 8.
– Reference – Enables you to specify the radius by using a reference.
You can right-click a radius in the Radius table of the Sets tab to perform the
following operations:
• Add radius – Enables you to add additional radii. You can also right-click a
radius handle to add additional radii.
• Delete – Enables you to delete the radius you right-clicked. You can also
right-click a radius handle in the graphics window to delete that particular
radius.
• Make constant – Deletes all radii except the first one.

PROCEDURE - Creating Variable Radius Rounds
Round\Variable VARIABLE_RAD.PRT
Task 1: Edit an existing round to make it variable.

Display types: .
3. Right-click and select Make
variable.

tab.
• Notice that there are two radii.
5. In the graphics window, drag the
round location handles to the far
left and right of the highlighted
edge.
6. In the Sets tab, notice that
the Location values for the left
and right radii are 1 and 0,
respectively.
7. In the Sets tab, edit the Radius at

the 1 Location (radius #2) to 18.
• Edit the Location Ratio Value
from 1 to 0.9.
• Edit the distance Value from
Ratio to Reference.
• Select the left vertex of the
highlighted reference.
8. Edit the radius at the 0 location

from 10 to 8.
9. Edit the Location Ratio Value
from 0 to 0.20.

10. In the Sets tab, right-click in the
table and select Add radius.
• Edit the distance Value from
Ratio to Reference.
• Select datum point on the right
side of the model.
• Edit the radius value to 12.

right-click the last radius'
handle and select Add radius.
• Drag the new point around to
the back of the large edge.
12. In the Sets tab, edit the Location

Ratio Value to 0.5.
• Edit the Radius value from 12
to 8.

Auto Round
The Auto Round tool enables you to create a complex series
of rounds quickly and easily.
Auto Round Tool

• Create complex rounds quickly
and easily.
• Created as a series of rounds in
an auto round feature.
• Can convert to a group of standard
round features.
Robust Rounding
• Intelligent order of round creation.
• Updates to features previously Figure 1 – Model With Rounds
inserted. Applied
Figure 2 – An Auto Round Feature Figure 3 – Auto Round Player
Auto Round
The Auto Round tool enables you to create a complex series of rounds
quickly and easily. Rounds that would take an experienced modeler 30
minutes or more (due to experimenting with round order and transitions) can
be created in seconds with the Auto Round tool as shown in Figure 1.
To create an Auto Round, select Auto Round from the Round types
drop-down list in the ribbon. Several individual rounds are created as round
sub-features within an auto round feature, as shown in Figure 2.
The following describes the technical aspects of the Auto Round tool, which
lead to robust rounding of a model:
• The Auto Round tool creates rounds in an intelligent order as necessary to
set up tangency for subsequent rounds.
– The tool does not simply select edges and then round the selected
edges.
• Round transitions are created as necessary by the Auto Round tool.

• The Auto Round Player dialog box, shown in Figure 3, appears during
round calculation. You can stop regeneration and rewind or play back the
different round features being created by the Auto Round tool, if desired.
• You can insert features before the auto round in the model tree, and the
auto round will then round those features.
• The Auto Round tool is designed to avoid feature failures. Sometimes
model geometry changes, and some of the rounds cannot be created. In
this case, the rounds are excluded and the Round tool only rounds what
is possible.
The following are options within the Auto Round tool:
• You can round concave edges, convex edges, or both.
– You can assign different round radii to concave and convex edges.
• You can round all solid edges, or select a series of edges to exclude from
rounding. You can also round only a selection of edges.
• Instead of an auto round feature with round sub-features, you can create a
group of standard round features.
– You can also right-click an existing auto round feature and convert it
to a group.
– A group of round features can be ungrouped, resulting in a series of
standard round features that can be edited or deleted individually.

PROCEDURE - Auto Round
Round\Auto_round AUTO_ROUND.PRT
Task 1: Utilize an auto round to create rounds on a complex model.

click Auto Round from the
Round types drop-down menu.
• Edit the convex radius value to
1.0, if necessary.
• Select Same for the Concave
radius value, if necessary.
• Select the Scope tab and
observe the options.
• Click Complete Feature .
• The auto round will take a few
moments to generate.
3. Select the auto round from the

model tree, right-click, and select
Edit Definition.
• Select the Exclude tab.
• Press CTRL and select four
edges to exclude.

• The auto round will take a few
moments to generate.

5. Drag the Insert Indicator
directly before the auto round
feature.
• Select Sketch 1 from the
model tree then click Extrude
from the Shapes group.
• Edit the depth to 15.
6. Right-click the Insert Indicator

and click Cancel.
• Click Yes.
• Notice that the auto round has
encompassed the inserted
feature.
7. Select Auto Round 1 from the

model tree.
• Right-click and select Convert
to Group.
• Click OK.
• Expand the local group (Group
LOCAL_GROUP).
• Right-click the local group and
select Ungroup.
• Notice that the auto round has
been converted to a series of
standard Round features.

Creating Rounds by Reference
You can use a reference to define a round's size.
– Point
– Vertex
– Edge
• Geometry updates for changes
made to reference location.
Figure 1 – Selecting References
Figure 2 – Completed Geometry Figure 3 – Updated Geometry
Creating Rounds by Reference

By default, when you create a round you must specify its radius. However,
you can use a reference that defines the radius instead, as shown in Figure
1. You can specify a point, vertex, or edge as the reference. The system
updates the geometry automatically for any changes made to the reference
location. Figure 2 displays the resulting round geometry for the selected
references. In Figure 3, the height of the protrusion was decreased, and the
datum point position used by the upper round has been moved. Notice that
the resulting round geometry updated accordingly.

PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Reference
Round\By_Ref RAD_BY_REF.PRT
Task 1: Redefine round radii from a value to a reference.

Display types: .
tab.
• Notice that the Radius is 5.
• Edit the distance drop-down
list from Value to Reference.
• Select the bottom-right, front
vertex.

tab.
• Notice that the Radius is 4.
list from Value to Reference.
• Select datum point on the top
front edge of the model.

Extrude 1 and select Edit.
• Edit the height from 12 to 8.
9. In the model tree, select datum
point PNT0.
• Edit the point value from 0.7
to 0.4.
11. Notice that the feature geometry
updates.

Analyzing Round References and Pieces
You can manipulate round geometry based on how references
are selected and the pieces that are excluded.
• References
– Manipulate which edges are
rounded.
♦ Surface loop from to
♦ One-by-one
• Pieces
– Select a piece to remove it. Figure 1 – Creating a Round with
– Trim or extend geometry. Surface Loop From To
Figure 2 – Removing Round Piece and Trimming the Round
Analyzing Round References Selection

By default, if you select an edge to be rounded, and that selected edge has
adjacent tangent edges, then the resulting round automatically propagates
around those tangent edges. However, you can manipulate which edges
are ultimately rounded by pressing SHIFT and using the Surface loop from
to option or using the One-by-one selection option. These options enable
you prevent the round from covering the whole tangent chain, enabling you
to select only the edges you want to receive the round. In Figure 1, the
edges were selected using a Surface loop from to. The resulting geometry
does not round the top three edges, even though they are tangent. When
Surface loop from to selection is used with the tool started, you can even
select edges that are not tangent.
Analyzing Round Pieces
The Pieces tab in the dashboard enables you to further manipulate the round.
Using the Pieces tab you can perform the following functions:
• Select a piece of the round from the model to remove it.
• Trim the round by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece inward
so that less geometry is covered.
• Extend the round by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece outward
so that more geometry is covered.
If you want to trim or extend a closed-loop round, simply remove a round
piece from the round first. This causes the handles to appear for trimming
or extending. In Figure 2, the bottom arc piece is excluded, which causes
the handles to display. The handles were used to trim the small corners so
that they were not rounded, either.

To access the functionality that enables you to select pieces to be removed,
you must select the piece in the Pieces tab. Once you have excluded or
removed a piece of the round, the Pieces tab displays the piece as Edited.
If you want to include all pieces again, you can edit the selected Piece
drop-down list back to Included.
If you need to terminate a round at a location other than at a round
piece, you can use the Stop at Reference transition type.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Round References and Pieces
Round\Ref_Pieces REFS_PIECES.PRT
Task 1: Create rounds using different references and pieces.

• Select the front, left arc edge.
• Press SHIFT, and query-select
the bottom Surface loop from
to.

4. Edit the radius to 1 and click
Complete Feature .
5. Notice that the round did not
follow the tangent chain at the
top.
6. Click Round .
7. Select an inner concave edge.
8. Notice that the entire tangent
chain will be rounded.

Pieces tab.
• Select Piece 1.
• Select the bottom rounded arc
to exclude it.
• Drag both handles up to
exclude the small rounded
corners.
11. Press CTRL+D to orient to the

Standard Orientation.
12. Click Round .
13. Select the right front large arc.
Notice the tangent chain.
14. Press SHIFT and select the left
front large arc One-by-one.
16. Click Round .

17. Select the rear-right concave
edge of the rectangular feature.
18. Press SHIFT, and query-select
the bottom Surface loop from to.
19. Right-click and select Clear.

20. Select the rear-top concave edge
of the rectangular feature.
Pieces tab.
• Select Piece 1.
• Drag both handles down
across the non-tangent
corners.


Using Intent Edges for Rounds
You can place a round by selecting intent edges or intent
surfaces.
• Reference selection is quicker.

• Resulting rounds are more robust.
• References are tied to features,
not edge references.
Figure 1 – Selecting Intent Edges
Figure 2 – Moving the Post Feature
Using Intent Edges for Rounds

You can place a round by selecting intent edges or intent surfaces. Using
intent edges or surfaces makes selecting references quicker. They are also
more robust, preventing rounds from failing when model changes are made,
since the references for the rounds are tied to the features in the design
model, not the individual edge references. In Figure 1, the round is being
created by specifying the intent edges.
In Figure 2, the post feature is moved to the right, over a bump and into a gap.
Though the resulting round geometry differs, the round is still successful.
Even when the post is updated from five sides to four, the round is still
successful.
The following are examples of intent edges for a rectangular extrude coming
from a block:
• The parallel outside edges of the extrude.
• The end edges of the extrude.
• The edges where the extrude meets the block.

For these examples, the shape of the rectangle is not important – only that an
extruded feature is present.

PROCEDURE - Using Intent Edges for Rounds
Round\Intent_Edges INTENT.PRT
Task 1: Use intent edges when creating rounds.

Round types drop-down menu.
side edges and right-click to
query-select the vertical side
intent edges.

• Cursor over one of the top
edges and right-click to
query-select the top intent
edges.
6. Click Round .
side edges of the post and
right-click to query-select the
vertical side intent edges.
9. Click Round .
the intent intersection edges of
the post.

12. Right-click POST and select
Edit.
13. Edit the 50 dimension to
100, then click twice in the
background of the graphics
window to regenerate.
14. The intent edges are between
the post and base, so the round
feature ignores the bump but
does not fail.
15. Right-click POST and select

Edit.
16. Edit the 100 dimension you just
changed to 150, then click twice
in the background of the graphics
17. The round feature is still
successful, even with only half
the post intersecting.
18. Right-click Extrude 3 and select

Edit.
19. Edit the offset from 150 to 141
and the width from 38 to 18.
20. Click twice in the background
of the graphics window to
regenerate.
21. Edit the definition of POST.

22. Right-click and select Edit
Internal Sketch.
.
24. Zoom in on the sketch and
delete the five lines, keeping the
construction circle.
25. Sketch a rectangle with a width
of 40, ensuring that the corners
snap to the construction circle.
26. Click OK .

Orientation.
29. The rounds are still successful.

Using Round Transitions
Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles
overlapping or discontinuous round pieces.
• Transition mode:
– Displays available transitions.
– Enables you to change
transition type for each round.
• Numerous transition types
available.
Figure 1 – Viewing Round

Transitions
Figure 2 – Intersect Transition Type
Figure 3 – Corner Sphere Transition Figure 4 – Round Only 1

Type Transition Type
Using Round Transitions

Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles overlapping or
discontinuous round pieces. Creo Parametric uses default transitions that are
selected according to the particular geometrical context. For many cases,
you can use the default transitions. However, sometimes you need to modify
the existing transitions to achieve the preferred round geometry.
To access Transition mode, you can either click Transition Mode from
the dashboard or right-click and select Show transitions while using the
Round tool. To exit Transition mode, you can either click Set Mode in the
dashboard, or right-click and select Back to sets.
Round Transition Types

When you access Transition mode, the system displays all of the available
round transitions, as shown Figure 1. When you select an available

transition, the dashboard displays the currently set type for that transition in
the Transition Type drop-down list. The drop-down list contains a list of valid
transition types available for the currently selected transition, based on the
geometrical context. You can change the transition type for the currently
selected transition. The following is a list of round transition types (note that
not all transition types listed are available for a given context):
• Default – Creo Parametric determines the transition type that is the best
fit for the geometrical context. The transition type used for the default
appears in parentheses.
• Intersect – Extends two or more overlapping round pieces toward each
other until they merge, forming a sharp boundary. Intersect transitions only
apply to two or more overlapping round pieces.
• Corner Sphere – Rounds the corner transition formed by three overlapping
round pieces with a spherical corner. By default, the sphere has the same
radius as the largest overlapping round piece. However, you can modify
the radius of the sphere as well as the transition distance along each
edge, enabling you to blend it into the smaller existing radii using fillet
surfaces. Corner Sphere transitions apply only to geometry where three
round pieces overlap at a corner.
• Corner Sweep – Rounds the corner transition formed by three overlapping
round pieces. Round geometry is created as a sweep that wraps around
the round piece with the largest radius. The resulting geometry looks as if
the round piece with the largest radius was created first, and the remaining
two pieces were created subsequently. Corner Sweep transitions only
apply to three round pieces that overlap each other at a corner.
• Patch – Creates a patched surface at the location where three or four
round pieces overlap. You can add an additional side to a three-sided
Patch transition by selecting an optional surface on which to create a fillet
that contains a radius. This fillet becomes the fourth side of the resulting
patch and is tangent. Patch transitions apply only to geometry where three
or four round pieces overlap at a corner.
• Round Only – Creates a transition using compounded round geometry.
Each round piece has a different radius value.
• Blend – Creates a fillet surface between the round pieces using an edge
reference. All tangent round geometry stops at sharp edges.
• Continue – Extends the round geometry into two round pieces. All tangent
round geometry does not stop at sharp edges, unlike the Blend transition.
The resulting geometry looks as if the round was placed first, and then
geometry was cut away. Neighboring surfaces are extended to meet round
geometry where applicable.
• Stop – Terminates the round using one of three different stop cases. Creo
Parametric configures the geometry for each of the stop cases based on
the geometrical context.
• Stop at Reference – Terminates round geometry at the datum point or
datum plane that you specify.
• Intersect at Surface – Helps to maintain a linear parting line. This option is
particularly useful on models that have a split draft that forms a parting line.
You can define the “driving” side for the round by selecting Side 1 or Side
2 for the transition. You can define the transition length for the round by
dragging the handle or specifying a value.

PROCEDURE - Using Round Transitions
Round\Transitions ROUND_TRANSITIONS.PRT
Task 1: Specify different round transitions in a part model.

3. Cursor over the top-right edge
and right-click to query-select
the end Intent edges.
4. Press CTRL, cursor over the
top-left edge, and right-click to
query-select the other end Intent
edges.
5. Edit the radius value to 1.

7. Cursor over one of the horizontal
side edges and right-click to
query-select the side intent
edges.
8. Edit the radius value to 3.

Transition Mode .
12. Select the top, front-right corner
transition.

13. In the dashboard, edit the
transition type to Intersect.

transition type to Corner
Sphere.
• Edit L2 and L3 to 3.

transition type to Patch.
• Click in the Optional surface
collector and select the right
side surface.

transition type to Round Only 1.

25. Select the upper, front-middle
transition.
26. In the dashboard, notice
the transition type Default
(Continue).

transition type to Blend.

Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types
You can also create chamfers by selecting two surfaces or a
surface and an edge.
• Selecting a surface and

edge:
– You must select the
surface first.
• Selecting two surfaces:
– Chamfers can engulf
geometry.
– Chamfers can span
gaps. Figure 1 – Chamfer Created by Selecting
Two Surfaces
Figure 2 – Chamfer Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge
Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types

You can create chamfers by selecting two surfaces. The system creates the
chamfer between the two surfaces, and therefore has the ability to span gaps
or engulf existing geometry. In addition, chamfers created by selecting two
surfaces can also provide more robust chamfer geometry in cases where
chamfers created by selecting edges may fail or create undesired geometry.
You can also create chamfers by first selecting a surface and then selecting
an edge. The chamfer must pass through the selected edge unless the
distance between the selected surface and edge becomes too large or too
small. At that point the chamfer breaks away from the edge, but still passes
through the selected surface.
In the figures, the geometry selected is highlighted on the left, and the
resulting chamfers are shown on the right.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types
Chamfer\Chamfer_Types CHAMFER_TYPES.PRT
Task 1: Create chamfers by selecting two surfaces.

select Edge Chamfer from
the Chamfer types drop-down
list.
surfaces.
4. Edit the D value to 10.
6. Click Edge Chamfer .

surfaces.

Task 2: Create chamfers by selecting a surface and edge.

2. Press CTRL and select the top
surface and the edge.
3. Edit the O value to 12.

6. Press CTRL and select the main
surface and the edge.


Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning
Schemes
There are several different ways to dimension a chamfer to
capture desired design intent.
• Basic dimensioning schemes
include:
– DxD
– D1 x D2
– Angle x D
– 45 x D
• More advanced dimensioning
schemes include:
– OxO Figure 1 – O x O and D x D
– O1 x O2 Chamfer for 90 Degree Corner
Figure 2 – D x D Chamfer on Figure 3 – O x O Chamfer on

Drafted Corner Drafted Corner
Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

There are several ways to dimension a chamfer to capture desired design
intent. The following are the more basic dimensioning schemes:
• D x D – Creates a chamfer that is at a distance (D) from the edge along
each surface. Creo Parametric selects this by default.
• D1 x D2 – Creates a chamfer at a distance (D1) from the selected edge
along one surface and a distance (D2) from the selected edge along the
other surface.
• Angle x D – Creates a chamfer at a distance (D) from the selected edge
along one adjacent surface at a specified angle (Angle) to that surface.
• 45 x D – Creates a chamfer that is at an angle of 45 degrees to both
surfaces and a distance (D) from the edge along each surface.
These schemes are available using the Offset Surface creation method only
if the following conditions are met: for Edge chamfers, all members of the
edge chain must be formed by exactly two 90-degree planes (for example,
the ends of a cylinder).

The following dimensioning scheme options are more advanced:
• O x O – Creates a chamfer that is at an offset distance (O) from the edge
along each surface. Creo Parametric selects this by default only when D
x D is not available.
• O1 x O2 – Creates a chamfer at an offset distance (O1) from the selected
edge along one surface and an offset distance (O2) from the selected
edge along the other surface.
Initially, it appears that the resulting geometry for a D x D and O x O chamfer
is the same, assuming D = O. For chamfers where the geometry adjacent to
the chamfered edge is at 90 degrees, the geometry is the same, as shown in
Figure 1. However, when the geometry adjacent to the chamfered edge is not
90 degrees, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3, the difference in geometry
between an O x O and a D x D chamfer is readily seen. The difference is in
how the two chamfers are defined. Both D x D and O x O chamfers are
similar in that the two adjacent surfaces are offset, and there is a resulting
intersection. However, for an O x O chamfer, two perpendicular lines are
drawn from the intersection to the adjacent surfaces.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Advanced Chamfer
Dimensioning Schemes
Chamfer\Adv_Chamfer_Schemes OXO.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with the different schemes of a chamfer.

2. Edit the definition of Chamfer 1.
3. In the dashboard, notice that the
chamfer scheme is D x D, and
the D value is 20.
• Select the Sets tab.
• Notice that the chamfer
creation type is specified
as Offset Surfaces in the
drop-down list.
5. Orient to the FRONT view.

6. Notice that the chamfer lines up
with the dashed sketch lines.
7. Right-click Sketch 1 and select

Edit.
8. Notice that the offsets for both
DxD and OxO are 20. This is
because of the 90-degree draft
corner.

9. Click in the graphics window
to de-select the sketch, then
right-click Draft 2 and select
Edit.
10. Edit the draft from 0 to 10, then
click twice in the background
regenerate.
11. Notice that the chamfer follows
the DxD sketch. The white lines
are offset parallel to the top and
right surfaces by 20, creating the
intersection.

chamfer type from D x D to O X
O.
• Edit the O value to 20.
15. Notice that the chamfer now
follows the construction lines for
OxO, and that the construction
lines are perpendicular to the top
and right model surfaces.

Edit.
17. Notice that the top and right
surfaces are still offset by 20
to create the intersection of the
white lines. However, the OxO
lines are projected normal to the
surfaces from that intersection.

chamfer type from O x O to O1
x O2.
• Edit the O1 value to 15 and
the O2 value to 25.

Edit.
22. Edit the top and right sketch
dimensions to 15 and 25,
respectively.
regenerate.
24. Notice the construction lines for
the O1xO2 sketch (OxO in the
figure).

Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods
You can define the chamfer distance either with offset surfaces
or with tangent distances.
• Offset Surfaces
– Default method
– Adjacent surfaces are offset
– Perpendiculars dropped from
offset surfaces intersection to
adjacent surfaces
– Connect the intersections of
the neighboring surfaces and
perpendiculars
• Tangent Distance
– Tangent lines extended from
adjacent surfaces
– Connect the points of tangency Figure 1 – Part Model, No Chamfer
Figure 3 – Tangent Distance

Figure 2 – Offset Surfaces Chamfer Chamfer
Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods

Creo Parametric uses creation methods to create the chamfer geometry.
Different creation methods result in different chamfer geometry. You can
use the following creation methods:
• Offset Surfaces – Determines the chamfer distance by offsetting the
neighboring surfaces of the reference edge. Creo Parametric selects this
method by default. In Figure 1, the two surfaces were offset by 30. At the
intersection, two lines were extended perpendicular to each surface. When
the chamfer of distance value 30 is created in Figure 2, it connects the two
intersections of the surfaces and perpendicular lines.
• Tangent Distance – Determines the chamfer distance with vectors that
are tangent to the neighboring surfaces of the reference edge. In Figure
1, two lines were extended tangent from the two surfaces. Each line is of
length 30 from the point of tangency to the other line intersection. When

the chamfer of distance value 30 is created in Figure 3, it connects the
two points of tangency.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods
Chamfer\Chamfer_Method CHAMFER_METHOD.PRT
Task 1: Analyze the chamfer creation methods in a part model.

orientation.
Edit.
4. Notice that the surface offset
distance and tangent line lengths
are both 30.

Orientation.
list.
7. Select the upper-right edge.
tab.
10. Notice that the chamfer distance
is set at Offset Surfaces.

orientation.
13. Notice that the chamfer is at the
Offset construction lines' points
of intersection with the surfaces.

tab.
list from Offset Surfaces to
Tangent Distance.
• Edit the D value to 30.

17. Notice the chamfer is at the
Tangent construction lines'
points of tangency.

Creating Corner Chamfers
A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a part,
creating a beveled surface between the three original surfaces
common to the corner.
• Requirements:
– Corner must be convex.
– Edges leading to the corner
must be linear.
• Specify the offset values for each
edge:
– Drag handles.
– Type values on the model.
– Type values in the dashboard.
Figure 1 – Original Model
Figure 2 – Chamfer on 90 Figure 3 – Chamfer on Non

Degree Corner 90 Degree Corner
Creating Corner Chamfers

A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a part, creating a
beveled surface between the three original surfaces common to the corner.
You can create corner chamfers using Corner Chamfer , which is a
different tool than Edge Chamfer . The following two requirements apply
when creating a corner chamfer:
• The corner, and each edge leading to corner, must be convex.
• The edges leading to the corner must be linear.
Once you select a corner to be chamfered, you must then specify the offset
values on each edge from the corner. You can specify values either by
dragging the individual handles on the model or by typing values on the
model or in the dashboard.

PROCEDURE - Creating Corner Chamfers
Chamfer\Corner CORNER_CHAMFER.PRT
Task 1: Create a corner chamfer on a 90 degree corner.

select Corner Chamfer from
menu.
3. Select the vertex.
4. Drag the handles and type the

values as necessary.
Task 2: Create a corner chamfer on a non 90 degree corner.
1. Select Corner Chamfer from

menu.
2. Select the vertex.
3. Drag the handles and type the

values as necessary.

Creating Chamfers by Reference
You can use a reference to define a chamfer's size.
– Point
– Vertex
– Edge
• Geometry updates for changes
made to reference location.
Figure 2 – Completed Geometry Figure 3 – Updated Geometry
Creating Chamfers by Reference

By default, when you create a chamfer, you must specify its distance value.
However, you can use a reference that defines the chamfer size instead. You
can specify a point, vertex, or edge as the reference. The system updates
the geometry automatically for any changes made to the reference location.
Figure 1 displays two chamfers. One was created through a vertex, the other
through a datum point.
Figure 2 displays the resulting chamfer geometry for the selected references.
In Figure 3, the height of the protrusion has been decreased, and the datum
point position used by the upper chamfer has been moved. Notice that the
resulting chamfer geometry updated accordingly.

Analyzing Chamfer References and Pieces
You can manipulate chamfer geometry based on how references
are selected and the pieces that are excluded.
• References
– Manipulate which edges are
chamfered.
♦ Surface loop from to
♦ One-by-one
• Pieces
– Select a piece to remove it.
Figure 1 – Creating a Chamfer
– Trim or extend geometry. with Surface Loop From To
Figure 2 – Removing Chamfer Piece and Trimming the Chamfer
Analyzing Chamfer References Selection

By default, if you select an edge to be chamfered, and that selected edge has
adjacent tangent edges, then the resulting chamfer automatically propagates
around those tangent edges. However, you can manipulate which edges are
ultimately chamfered by pressing SHIFT and using the Surface loop from
to or One-by-one selection options. These options enable you prevent the
chamfer from covering the whole tangent chain, enabling you to select only
the edges you want to receive the chamfer.
In Figure 1, the edges were selected using a Surface loop from to. The
resulting geometry does not chamfer the top three edges, even though they
are tangent. When Surface loop from to selection is used with the tool started,
you can even select edges that are not tangent.
Analyzing Chamfer Pieces
The Pieces tab in the dashboard enables you to further manipulate the
chamfer. Using the Pieces tab you can perform the following functions:
• Select a piece of the chamfer from the model to remove it.
• Trim the chamfer by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece inward
so that less geometry is covered.
• Extend the chamfer by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece
outward so that more geometry is covered.
If you want to trim or extend a closed-loop chamfer, simply remove a chamfer
piece from the chamfer first. This causes the handles to appear for trimming
or extending. In Figure 2, the bottom arc piece is excluded, which causes

the handles to display. The handles were used to trim the small corners so
that they were not chamfered, either.
To specify the functionality that enables you to select pieces to be removed,
you must select the piece in the Pieces tab. Once you have excluded or
removed a piece of the chamfer, the Pieces tab displays the piece as Edited.
If you want to include all pieces again, you can edit the selected Piece
drop-down list back to Included.
If you need to terminate a chamfer at a location other than at a
chamfer piece, you can use the Stop at Reference transition type.

Using Intent Edges for Chamfers
You can place a chamfer by selecting intent edges or intent
surfaces.
• Reference selection is quicker.

• Resulting chamfers are more
robust.
• References are tied to features,
not edge references.
Figure 1 – Selecting Intent Edges
Figure 2 – Moving the Post Feature
Using Intent Edges for Chamfers

You can place a chamfer by selecting intent edges or intent surfaces. Using
intent edges or surfaces makes selecting references quicker. They are also
more robust, preventing chamfers from failing when model changes are
made, since the references for the chamfers are tied to the features in the
design model, not the individual edge references. In Figure 1, the chamfer is
being created by specifying the intent edges. In Figure 2, the post feature
is moved to the right, over a bump and into a gap. Though the resulting
chamfer geometry differs, the chamfer is still successful. Even when the post
is updated from five sides to four, the chamfer is still successful.
The following are examples of intent edges for a rectangular extrude coming
from a block:
• The parallel outside edges of the extrude.

• The end edges of the extrude.
• The edges where the extrude meets the block.
For these examples, the shape of the rectangle is not important – only that an
extruded feature is present.

Using Chamfer Transitions
Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles
overlapping or discontinuous chamfer pieces.
• Transition mode:
– Displays available transitions.
– Enables you to change transition
type for each chamfer.
• Numerous transition types available.
Figure 1 – Viewing Chamfer

Transitions
Figure 2 – Intersect Chamfer Figure 3 – Corner Plane Chamfer

Transition Type Transition Type
Using Chamfer Transitions

Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles overlapping or
discontinuous chamfer pieces. Creo Parametric uses default transitions that
are selected according to the particular geometrical context. For many cases,
you can use the default transitions. Sometimes, however, you need to modify
the existing transitions to achieve the preferred chamfer geometry.
To access Transition mode, you can either click Transition Mode in the
dashboard or right-click and select Show transitions while using the Chamfer
tool. To exit Transition mode, you can either click Set Mode in the
dashboard, or right-click and select Back to sets.
Chamfer Transition Types
When you access Transition mode, the system displays all of the available
chamfer transitions, as shown in Figure 1. When you select an available
transition, the dashboard displays the currently set type for that transition
in the Transition Type drop-down list. The drop-down list contains valid

transition types available for the currently selected transition, based on the
geometrical context. You can change the transition type for the currently
selected transition. The following is a list of chamfer transition types (note
that not all transition types listed are available for a given context):
• Default – Creo Parametric determines the transition type that is the best
fit for the geometrical context. The transition type used for the default
appears in parenthesis.
• Intersect – Extends two or more overlapping chamfer pieces toward each
other until they merge, forming a sharp boundary.
• Patch – Creates a patched surface at the location where three or four
chamfer pieces overlap. Optionally, you can specify a surface on which to
place a fillet, and specify the fillet radius to be used.
• Corner Plane – Chamfers the corner transition formed by overlapping three
chamfer pieces with a plane.
• Stop at Reference – Terminates chamfer geometry at the selected datum
point or datum plane. You must specify the reference to be used.
• Blend – Creates a fillet surface between the chamfer pieces using an
edge reference.
• Continue – Extends chamfer geometry into two chamfer pieces.
• Stop Case 1 – Terminates the chamfer using geometry configured by Creo
Parametric.

PROCEDURE - Using Chamfer Transitions
Chamfer\Chamfer_Transitions CHAMFER_TRANS.PRT
Task 1: Specify different chamfer transitions in a part model.

list.
3. Press CTRL and select the front
three edges.

parallel edges.
7. Edit the D value to 2, if
necessary.

Transition Mode .
9. Select the upper, three-way
corner transition.
10. In the dashboard, notice that
the default transition type is
Intersect.
11. Select the lower, three-way

corner transition.
12. In the dashboard, notice that
the default transition type is
Corner Plane. This corner has a
different geometry case than the
previously selected corner.

15. Select the upper three-way
transition and edit its type to
Corner Plane.

18. Select the upper-right edge.
19. Edit the D value to 2, if
necessary.
20. Right-click and select Show

transitions.
21. Notice that there are no corner
transitions.
22. Right-click and select Back to
sets.
23. Drag the D value to 4.

Transition Mode .
25. Select the corner transition and
edit its type to Patch in the
dashboard.

28. Click in the Optional surface
collector and select the top
surface.
29. Edit the Radius to 2 in the
dashboard.

Module 8
Relations and Parameters
Module Overview
You can incorporate your design intent into models by using mathematical
relations, which enable you to incorporate additional design intent. You can
also add additional data to your models using model parameters.
In this module, you learn how to create relations and parameters in design
models.
Objectives
• Understand the theory behind relations.
• Understand the various relation types.
• Understand basic and advanced relation operators and functions.
• Understand exact relations.
• Create parameters and relations.
• Create relations for patterns.
• Create section relations.
• Use the EvalGraph function.
• Create simultaneous equations.

Understanding Relation Theory
Relations are user-defined equations written between
dimensions and/or parameters.
• Uses:
– Control effects of
modifications
– Define dimension values
based on other dimensions
– Set min./max. constraints
– Conditional relationships
between dimensions
• Relation syntax:
– Symbolic dimension name Figure 1 – Viewing Dimension
– Parameter name Symbolic Names
• Naming dimensions:
– d1 versus HEIGHT
• Equation types:
– Equality
– Comparison
• Modifying relation-driven
dimensions.
• Order of operations. Figure 2 – Section of Relations
Dialog Box
Understanding Relation Theory

Relations are user-defined equations written between dimensions and/or
parameters. Relations let you capture design intent by defining relationships
within sketches, features, parts, or assembly components. Relations can
be simple assignments, equations, or complex, conditional, branching
statements. The relation equations themselves are simply stored in the
model.
Relation Uses
You can use relations in the following ways:
• To control the effects of modifications on models.
• To define values for dimensions based on other dimensions.
• To set minimum or maximum constraints for dimension values.
• To describe conditional relationships between dimensions.
Relation Syntax
You compose a relation using the symbolic dimension name, as shown in
Figure 1, or parameter name. An example of a relation is, d1=d2+d3. The
dimension values switch to their symbolic names when using the Relations
dialog box, a portion of which is shown in Figure 2.

You can also click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Switch
Symbols or view a dimension's properties and view the contents of the
Name field.
Naming Dimensions
You can edit the properties for a dimension, and give it a meaningful name.
For example, instead of d1 and d2, you could edit the dimension names
to WIDTH and HEIGHT. These names can then be used in the relation. If
a dimension name is modified, the change is automatically reflected in the
relation.
Equation Types
The following two types of equations are:
• Equality – Equates a parameter on the left side of the equation with an
expression on the right side. This type of relation is used for assigning
values to dimensions and parameters. For example:
– Simple assignments: d3=25, d3=HOLE_DIA, or d5=d2/3
– More complex assignment: d5=LENGTH * (SQRT (d7 / 3 + d4) )
• Comparison – Compares an expression on the left side of the equation with
an expression on the right side. This type of relation is commonly used as
a constraint or in conditional statements for logical branching. For example:
– Simple constraint: d6>30
– More complex constraint: (d1+d2)>(d3+2.5)
– Conditional statement: IF(d0+3)>=10, d3=30
Modifying Dimensions Driven by Relations

If a dimension is driven by a relation, the dimension cannot be modified
directly. You can edit the relation that is driving it, or remove that dimension
from the relation. For example, if you type the relation d0=d1+d2, you cannot
modify d0 directly. You must modify d1 or d2, or edit the relation to change
the value of d0. If a dimension name is modified, the change is automatically
reflected in the relation.
Order of Operations
Relations are not evaluated until the model is regenerated. During a
regeneration, relations are evaluated in the following order:
1. At the beginning of a regeneration, the system solves model relations in
the order in which they were typed in.
2. In an assembly, the assembly relations are calculated first. Then the
system calculates all sub-assembly relations in order of component
placement. This means that all sub-assembly relations are calculated
before any features or components begin regeneration.
3. The system starts regenerating features in the order of creation. If a
feature is attached to feature relations, these relations are solved before
regenerating that feature.
4. If you specified any relations as Post Regeneration, the system solves
these relations after the regeneration is complete.

Understanding Relation Types
There are numerous types of relations that can be created within
a Creo Parametric model.
• Types include:
– Section
– Feature
– Part
– Assembly
– Inherited
– Pattern
– Skeleton
Figure 1 – Sketcher Dimensions
– Component
• Specify a feature and model
in a relation
• Rules
Figure 2 – Feature Dimensions
Understanding Relation Types

There are numerous types of relations that can be created within a Creo
Parametric model. The types of relations that can be created include:
• Section relations – Relations created in Sketcher to control geometry of
complex sections. The relation is calculated with the sketch. In Figure
1, the Sketcher dimensions displayed can be used in the creation of a
Section relation.
• Feature relations – Relations added to a selected feature. During a part
regeneration, these relations are resolved after part relations, but before
the regeneration of the feature to which they apply. You can use feature
relations to change feature geometry after part relations are applied and
some features have been regenerated. In Figure 2, the feature dimensions
displayed can be used in the creation of a Feature relation.
• Part relations – Relations added on a part level. During a part regeneration,
these relations can be calculated before or after the part features are
regenerated. Part relations are typically the most common type of relation
created between model features. The feature dimensions displayed in
Figure 2 can be used in the creation of a Part relation.
• Assembly relations – You can write relations to control geometry between
components, either by using session ID or component ID.

– Using session ID – If you refer to a parameter that belongs to another
model, the parameter must include the Session ID of the referenced
model. The format for assembly relations is as follows:
♦ parameter_in_driven_model:session_id = parameter_in_driving_
model:session_id
You can determine the session ID from the Relations dialog box by
clicking Show > Session ID or by selecting the desired object type,
whether Assembly, Part, or Skeleton, and then selecting a component.
The name and session ID display in the message window.
– Using component ID – When creating a relation in Assembly mode,
you may need to use a component's internal ID. Every component in
an assembly has a unique component ID, even if two components have
the same component name and the same session ID. Use the following
syntax when referencing a component ID:
♦ d#:cid_(component ID #), or d2:CID(2), for example.
You can determine the component internal ID by clicking Component
from the Investigate group in the Tools tab of the ribbon and then
selecting a component and clicking Apply. The name and component ID
display in the message window.
• Inherited relations – Access relations from an inheritance feature from
Part and Assembly modes.
• Pattern relations – Access relations specific to a pattern in the Part or
Assembly mode.
• Skeleton relations – Access relations for a skeleton model in Assembly
mode.
• Component relations – Access relations for an assembly component.
Specifying a Feature and Model in a Relation

You can write relations that use the parameters of a feature. Within a feature
relation, you can identify a feature parameter attached to that feature by the
parameter name. For example: d2 = parameter_name.
However, if you write a relation in the feature’s parent model (part or
assembly) or in another feature, you must use one of the following formats to
reference that feature:
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_#, where # is the feature ID (obtained by clicking
Feature from the Investigate group in the Tools tab of the ribbon)
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_N, where N is the feature Name
In Assembly mode, you can access a user parameter in a feature of another
model by adding the session ID:
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_#:session_id
• d2 = parameter_name:fid_N:session_id
Rules for Creating Relations in Parts

The following rules apply to creating or modifying relations in parts:
• Driven variables can be as follows:
– Dimensions in the part, for example, d#.

– User parameters in the part, for example, parameter_name.
– User parameters in features, for example, parameter_name:fid_N or
parameter_name:fid_feature_name.
• Driving variables can be the same as the driven variables. For example,
d2 = d2 +d3.
• In addition, you can use Reference dimensions from the part (rd#), or
Analysis feature measurements in the following format:
– measurement_name:fid_N
– measurement_name:fid_feature_name
Rules for Creating Relations in Features

The rules for creating relations in features are as follows:
• Feature relations are saved with the feature, and stay with it regardless of
the model in which the feature is used.
• Feature relations are evaluated after part relations and they are solved
when the feature to which they belong is regenerated. Therefore, if a
relation performs geometry evaluation (such as the distance between two
points), it can provide different results depending on whether it is used as
a feature relation or as a part relation. Note that you can modify existing
model parameters by name from the feature level.

Understanding Basic Relation Operators and
Functions
You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and
operators when writing a relation.
• Commenting
– Use /*
• Symbols
– d#, for example
• Predefined variables
– PI, for example
• Arithmetic
– +, –, /, *, ^, ( )
• Assignment
– Equal sign “=”
• Mathematical functions
– sin (), cos (), tan (), for example
• Mass properties Figure 1 – Relations Dialog Box
Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions

You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and operators
when writing a relation.
Commenting
It is a best practice to use comments in your relations. Comments can help
you remember why you added the relation. They also benefit others who use
your models. Every comment line must begin with a forward slash and an
asterisk, and then the relation follows on the next line. For example:
/* Width is equal to 2*height
d1=2*d2
The comment should precede the relation to which it applies. This way,
when relations are sorted, the comment moves with the relation and remains
above it.
Symbols
The various dimension types use a symbolic code followed by an index
number:
• Dimensions – The following are the different dimension syntaxes:
– d# – Dimensions in Part or Assembly mode.
– d#:# – Dimensions in a component in Assembly mode. The session ID
of the assembly or component is added as a suffix.
– rd# – Reference dimensions in a part or top-level assembly.

– rd#:# – Reference dimensions in Assembly mode. The session ID of
assembly or component is added as a suffix.
– ad# – Associative (Driven) dimensions in Part, Assembly, or Drawing
mode.
• Sketcher – These dimension symbols are used in Sketcher relations:
– sd# – Dimensions in Sketcher mode.
– rsd# – Reference dimensions in Sketcher.
– kd# – Known dimensions in Sketcher. A dimension created between
existing geometry (not between section entities) is given this symbol.
• Patterns – Displayed as p#, where # is the number of instances in the
pattern. Direction patterns in two directions have two p#'s. Note that if you
edit the instance number to a non-integer value, the system truncates it.
For example, 2.90 becomes 2 pattern instances.
• Tolerances – Parameters associated with tolerance formats. You must
enable tolerances to view these symbols:
– tpm# – Tolerance in plus/minus symmetrical format; # is the dimension
number.
– tp# – Positive tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension number.
– tm# – Negative tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension
number.
Predefined Variables
The following predefined variables are available:
PI = 3.141592654 G = 9.8 m/sec2 C1 = 1
C2 = 2 C3 = 3 C4 = 4
Arithmetic Symbols
The following arithmetic symbols are available:
+ = Addition – = Subtraction / = Division
* = Multiplication ^ = Exponentiation ( ) = Parenthesis for

grouping, d0 = (d1–d2)*d3
If you are using negative dimensions, and you want to capture the true
signed value in your relation, precede the symbol with a dollar sign (for
example, $d20 or $depth). You must do this regardless of the setting for the
show_dim_sign configuration option.
Assignment
The assignment symbol “=” sets one item equal to another item.
Mathematical Functions
The following mathematical functions are available:

cos () = Cosine tan () = Tangent sin () = Sine
sqrt () = Square root asin () = Arc sine acos () = Arc cosine
atan () = Arc tangent sinh () = Hyperbolic cosh () = Hyperbolic

sine cosine
tanh () = Hyperbolic log () = Base 10 ln () = Natural logarithm

tangent logarithm
exp () = e to an abs () = Absolute

expoential degree value
ceil () = Smallest integer not less than the real value
floor () = Largest integer not greater than the real value
Mass Properties
You can calculate mass properties for a given model in a relation. You must
set a density value and calculate the mass properties before using these
functions. Functions include:
mp_mass (path) mp_volume (path)
mp_surf_area (path) mp_cg_x (path1, coord_sys, path2)
mp_cg_y (path1, coord_sys, path2) mp_cg_z (path1, coord_sys, path2)
Where:
• path = the path to the desired component if in an assembly. If the path
is the current model, type (" "). The format is either assy_name.asm :
part_name.prt or assy_id : part_id : session_id.
• path1 = the path format to the component for which the value is to be
calculated.
• coord_sys = the reference coordinate system name.
• path2 = the path format to the component that contains the coord_sys.

Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and
Functions
You can also utilize comparison operators and conditional
statements when writing a relation.
• Comparison operators:
– ==, <, &, !
• Conditional statements:
– IF, ENDIF, ELSE
• String functions:
– <>, itos(int), for example
• Specify the number of decimal
places to ceil and floor.
Figure 1 – Viewing Symbolic

Dimensions
Figure 2 – Different Result of ENDIF Figure 3 – Different Result

Statement ENDIF Statement
Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and Functions

You can utilize more advanced mathematical functions and operators when
writing a relation, including comparison operators, conditional statements,
and string functions.
Using Comparison Operators

Comparison operators are used when a TRUE/FALSE value can be returned.
For example, the following relation returns TRUE whenever d1 is greater than
or equal to 3.5, and FALSE whenever d1 is less than 3.5: d1 >= 3.5
The following comparison operators are available:

== – Equal to > – Greater than >= – Greater than or
equal to
!=, <>, ~= – Not equal < – Less than <= – Less than or equal
to to
| – Or & – And ! – Not
Using Conditional Statements

You can add IF statements to relations to create conditional statements.
For example:
IF d1 > d2
dia = 25
ENDIF
IF d1 <= d2
dia = 60
ENDIF
In Figure 2 and Figure 3, this IF statement was used to determine the
diameter value. In Figure 2, because d1 is greater than d2, the resulting
diameter is 25. In Figure 3, d1 is less than d2, so the resulting diameter is 60.
By adding the ELSE statements in the branches, you can create more
complex conditional constructions. With these statements, the previous
relation may be modified as follows:
IF d1 > d2
dia = 25
ELSE
dia = 60
ENDIF
There can be several features listed between the IF, ELSE, and the ENDIF
statements. In addition, the IF/ELSE/ENDIF constructions can also be nested
within feature sequences.
Consider the following rules:
• ENDIF is spelled as one word.
• ELSE is added on a separate line.
• Equal to in conditional statements is entered as two equal signs (==).
Assignment is entered as a single equal sign (=).
Using String Functions

The following operators and functions are supported for strings:
• == – Compares strings as equal.
• !=, <>, ~= – Compares strings as unequal.
• + – Concatenates strings.

• itos(int) – Converts integers to strings. Here, int can be a number or an
expression. Nonintegers are rounded off.
• search(string, substring) – Searches for substrings. The resulting value is
the position of the substring in the string (0 if not found).
• extract(string, position, length) – Extracts pieces of strings.
The following functions enable you to pass strings as arguments:
• string_length() – Returns the number of characters in a parameter.
• rel_model_name() – Returns the current model name.
• rel_model_type() – Returns the current model type.
• exists() – Evaluates whether an item, such as a parameter or dimension,
exists.
Specifying the Number of Decimal Places

You can add an optional argument to both the ceil and the floor functions that
enables you to specify the number of decimal places for rounding. The syntax
for functions with the rounding parameter is as follows:
• ceil (parameter_name or a value, number_of_dec_places)
• floor (parameter_name or a value, number_of_dec_places)
• where number_of_dec_places is an optional value.
Examples include the following:
• ceil (10.2) evaluates to 11
• floor (–10.2) evaluates to –11
• ceil (10.255, 2) evaluates to 10.26
• floor (10.255, 1) evaluates to 10.2

Exact Relation
Exact relations prevent rounding errors.
• Uses exact value for repeating decimals.

• No rounding/truncation.
• Uses parenthesis.
• Example: OFFSET = (1/7) * LENGTH.
Figure 1 – Exact Relation Result Figure 2 – Relations Dialog Box
Exact Relation
In earlier versions of the software, the system would round, or truncate,
repeating decimals, making exact modeling difficult. Now, you can use exact
values in relations; the repeating decimal is not rounded or truncated, and
is carried out to a maximum of 14 decimal places. This is particularly useful
when you pattern or space features using a fraction that results in a repeating
decimal, such as 1/3, 1/6, and 1/7.
• The syntax notation to use this option is = (x/y).
In the example in Figure 1 and Figure 2, the hole offset from the left edge
of the model is desired to be exactly 1/7 of the total length. In this case,
the syntax would be:
• OFFSET = (1/7) * LENGTH

Creating Parameters
Parameters enable you to add additional text or numeric
information to a model.
• Parameter types:
– Integer
– Real Number
– String
– Yes/No
• Parameter categories:
– Local
– External
– User-defined
– System
• Display parameters in the
model tree.
• Create parameter rules. Figure 1 – Parameters Dialog Box
Creating Parameters
Parameters enable you to add additional text or numeric information to a
model. Example uses for parameters include: capturing non-geometry types
of information such as COST or VENDOR, using a numeric parameter to
drive dimension values through relations, and defining a parameter value
based on other dimension or parameter values. Parameters can also be
used with family tables to define different information for each instance,
drawings to report information in tables or formats, and data management
tools, such as Windchill.
Parameter Types
You can create the following types of parameters:
• Integer – A whole number numerical value, for example, 1, 3, 100, and 267.
• Real Number – Any numerical value, for example, 1.25, 25, 75, and PI.
• String – A series of alphanumeric values (numbers or letters), for example,
STEEL, JOHN SMITH, and PTC.
• Yes/No – A parameter whose value is either YES or NO.
You can create parameters associated with the following object types:
• Assembly • Skeleton • Component
• Part • Feature • Inherited
• Quilt • Surface • Edge
• Curve • Composite Curve • Annotation Element
• Material

Parameter Categories
The following categories of parameters are available:
• Local parameters – Parameters that are created in the current model. You
can edit local parameters in the model.
• External parameters – Parameters created outside the current model and
used to control some aspects of the model. External parameters cannot
be modified in the model. For example, you can add parameters in Layout
mode to define certain part dimensions. When you open that part, these
part dimensions are controlled from Layout mode and are read-only in the
part. Similarly, you can create parameters in the PDM system and apply
them to the part.
• User-defined parameters – Additional information that you can attach to
geometry. You can add user-defined parameters to an assembly, part,
feature, or entity. For example, you can create a COST parameter for each
part in the assembly. Then, you can include the COST parameter in your
Bill of Materials to calculate the total cost of the assembly.
• System parameters – Parameters defined by the system, for example, the
Mass Properties parameter. These parameters are generally read-only.
You can use them in relations, but you cannot control their value.
Creating Multiple Parameters

You can create several parameters at once for multiple objects. To do this,
press CTRL and select multiple features or components from the model tree.
Then, right-click and select Edit Parameters and use the Parameters dialog
box to create or edit parameters for all of the selected objects.
Displaying and Creating Parameter Values in the Model Tree

You can display parameter values in the model tree as a column by using the
Model Tree Columns dialog box to add the columns. This enables you to add
columns for Feature parameters in a part model and Component parameters
in an assembly model. Once the column is added, you can click an empty
cell in the column to add the parameter to that feature or component.
Parameter Naming Rules

Consider the following rules for naming user parameters:
• User parameter names must begin with a letter if they are to be used in
relations.
• You cannot use d#, kd#, rd#, tm#, tp#, or tpm# as user parameter names
because they are reserved for use with dimensions.
• User parameter names cannot contain non-alphanumeric characters such
as !, @, #, and $.
• You cannot change the name of a user parameter once it has been created.

PROCEDURE - Creating Parameters
Feature_Tools\Parameters PARAMETERS.PRT
Task 1: Create parameters in a part model.

Parameters .
notice the default parameters
created by the model template.
4. Drag the column widths as
necessary to resize them
and notice that the existing
parameters are of String Type.
5. Select the Value field for the

DESCRIPTION parameter.
• Type Hex Socket Screw.
6. Select the Value field for the
MODELED_BY parameter.
• Type your first initial and last
name.

click New Parameter .
• Edit the Name to COST.
• Edit the Type to Real Number
and type 0.075 as the Value.
8. Click New Parameter and
edit the Name to LOT_QTY.
• Edit the Type to Integer.
• Type 100 as the Value.

edit the Name to VENDOR.
• Edit the Type to String and
type FASTENERS_123 as the
Value.
edit the Name to PURCHASED.
• Edit the Type to Yes No.
• Edit the Value to YES and click
OK.

Parameters .
edit the Look In from Part to
Feature.
• Select feature HEX.
13. Click New Parameter
and edit the Name to
TOOL_CLEARANCE.
• Edit the Type to String and
type .002 – .005 as the Value.
• Click OK.

Parameters .
edit the Look In from Part to
Surface.
• Select the large cylindrical
surface of the bolt head.

edit the Name to KNURLING.
• Edit the Type to Yes No and
type YES as the Value.
• Click OK.

and select Tree Columns.
18. In the Model Tree Columns
dialog box, edit the Type to Feat
Params.
• Type TOOL_CLEARANCE as
the Name and press ENTER.
• Click OK.

Understanding Advanced Parameter Options
The Parameters dialog box enables you to perform additional,
more advanced, operations to parameters.
• Operations include:
– Set units
– Designate
– Set access
♦ Full
♦ Limited
♦ Locked
– Source
– Description
– Restricted
– Reordering parameters Figure 1 – Parameters Dialog Box
Understanding Advanced Parameter Options

The following advanced parameter options are available within the
Parameters dialog box:
• Units – The Unit column defines the units for a parameter from the available
list of units. You can only define units for parameters of Real Number type
and only while creating a parameter.
• Designate – You can designate selected system and user parameters for
use as attributes in Pro/INTRALINK or another PDM system.
• Access – Defines access to the parameter as follows:
– Full – Parameters with full access are user-defined parameters. You can
modify these parameters from any application.
– Limited – You can set full access parameters to limited access. You
cannot modify parameters with Limited access by a relation. Limited
access parameters are modified only through Family Tables and
Program.
– Locked – Parameters with locked access are parameters that can be
locked either by a user, or by an external application such as a Data
Management System, Analysis features, Relations, or Program. You
can modify parameters locked by an external application only from
within an external application. You cannot modify user-defined locked
parameters from within any external application.
• Source – Indicates where the parameter was created or from where it is
driven.
• Description – Provides a description for the parameter.
• Restricted – Indicates a restricted value parameter whose properties are
defined by an external file.
• Reordering parameters – You can reorder parameters within the
Parameters dialog box using the up and down arrows on the right side of

the dialog box. The order is preserved when exiting the Parameters dialog
box and when saving the model.

Creating Relations
You use the Relations dialog box to view dimension symbols
and write relations. It also contains various relation tools.
• View dimension symbols:

– Switch Dimensions
• Write relation using relation
tools.
• Examples:
– Equality
– Constraint
– Logical
• Specify regeneration position.
• Use parameters/create
parameters in relations.
Figure 1 – Relations Dialog Box
Creating Relations
You use the Relations dialog box to view dimension symbols and write
relations. It also contains various relation tools.
Viewing Dimension Symbols

You can view dimension symbols from the Relations dialog box. The
dimension symbols display by default as you select features while in the
Relations dialog box. You can also click Switch Dimensions to switch
between dimension symbols and values.
From the part model, you can view dimension symbols by editing a feature,
which displays its dimensions. You can then click the Model Intent group
drop-down menu and select Switch Symbols . You can select a
dimension, right-click and select Properties, and then view the symbol in the
Name field of the Dimension Text tab.
Writing Relations
You should begin every relation with a comment line (a line starting with
/*). You can type the complete relation, or select dimension symbols in
the graphics window to insert them into the relation. You can type in math
operators and parenthesis directly, or use the icons. The following are
examples of relations:

Equality d3 = 2.5*d2 d1 = DEPTH d3 = sin(d1+1) +
d2
Constraints d3 >= 10 d2 != 100 d1 < (d2*d3) -1
Logical IF d1 == 6 d1 = d1 + 10 IF MATL ==
"STEEL"
d2 = 15 IF d1 > 350
d2 = 10
ENDIF d1 = 5
ENDIF
ENDIF
Editing dimensions such that a constraint is violated, simply creates

a warning message, which you can override.
Relation Tools
The following tools are available within the Relations dialog box:
• Provide Value – Enables you to type a dimension symbol, parameter,

or a portion of a relation to compute the result.
• Display Dimension – Type a dimension symbol or name to highlight
it on the model.
• Select Units – Enables you to select a unit to insert. You can also set
relations to take units into consideration when computing.
• Insert Function – Display a complete list of functions for relations.
• Insert Parameter – Select a parameter to insert into the relation.
• Sort Relations – The sort function sorts relations in order of

precedence, based on how they are evaluated by the system. If one relation
depends on the value of another relation, it is reordered accordingly.
Sorting relations helps you detect undesired circular relations. Relations
with comment lines can also be sorted. The comment line is attached to the
relation below it, and moves with that relation during a sorting. If multiple
comment lines precede a relation, they are all attached to that relation.
For example, if you type the relations d0=d1+3*d2 and d2=d3+d4, then
when you sort them, the system reorders them based on the order in which
they are evaluated. Since the first relation needs the value from the second
relation, the order is reversed when sorted.
• Verify Relations – Computes the relations and verifies they are valid.
Regeneration Position
You can specify the regeneration position as either Initial, where relations are
calculated before the first feature, or Post Regeneration, where relations are
calculated after the last feature. Initial is the default option.

Using Parameters in Relations
You can access a parameter from a relation, or create a parameter as the
result of a relation. For example, you can create a real number parameter
named LENGTH, equal to 15. You can then add a relation of d5=LENGTH.
When you regenerate the model, the d5 dimension updates to new values as
the LENGTH parameter is updated. Note that you can type string values for
parameters by enclosing them within quotation marks in relations.
You can expand the Relations dialog box to display the Parameters dialog
box.
Creating Parameters in Relations

You can create or edit a parameter directly from a relation. For example,
you can type LENGTH = d5. If the parameter LENGTH did exist previously,
the system would modify its value. If the parameter LENGTH did not exist
previously, the system would create it as a Real Number parameter.
Best Practices
Sort relations and verify them often to avoid errors, especially when writing
multi-line relations. Test the relation by modifying dimensions and parameters
on the model to ensure it works as expected.

PROCEDURE - Creating Relations
Feature_Tools\Relations RELATIONS.PRT
Task 1: Create relations in a part model.

2. In the model tree, right-click HEX
and select Edit.
Switch Symbols .
4. Notice the dimension symbols
are generic in name.
5. Select d1, then right-click and

select Properties.
6. In the Dimension Properties
dialog box, edit the Name from
d1 to HEX_SIZE.
• Click OK.
7. Repeat the procedure to edit
the name of dimension d2 to
HEX_DEPTH.

Relations .
9. Select BOLT_HEAD and
BOLT_SHAFT.
10. In the Relations dialog box, type
the following comment and press
ENTER:
• /* Adjust HEAD size based
on BOLT diameter
11. Type the following logical
relations, pressing ENTER after
each line:
• IF BOLT_DIA == 8
• HEAD_DIA = 14
• HEAD_THK = 7
• ENDIF

12. Type the comment:
• /* Adjust HEX size relative to
HEAD size
13. Type the relations, pressing
ENTER after each line:
• HEX_SIZE = HEAD_DIA / 2
• HEX_DEPTH = HEAD_THK /
1.5

• /* Create a parameter value
15. Type the relation:
• OVERALL_LENGTH
= HEAD_THK +
BOLT_LENGTH
• /* Constrain the overall
model length
• OVERALL_LENGTH <= 40
18. Click Verify Relations and click OK.
19. Expand the Local Parameters

pane and notice the
OVERALL_LENGTH parameter
and its value of 21. Click OK.
20. Right-click BOLT_SHAFT and select Edit.

21. Edit the BOLT_DIA to 8.
22. Edit the bolt length from 15 to 25 and click twice in the background of
the graphics window to regenerate.

23. Edit the bolt length from 25 to 35
and click twice in the background
regenerate.
24. Notice the warning message.
25. Click No in the Confirmation
dialog box to stop regeneration.
26. Click Close in the Information
Window.
27. Select the BOLT_LENGTH check
box from the menu manager and
click Done Sel > Done/Return.

Creating Relations for Patterns
You can use relations to control pattern increments and
quantities.
• Pattern increments: d#
• Pattern quantities: p#
• Relations with linear patterns
– Control linear pattern
spacing:
♦ d1 = 100 / p1
– Control the quantity:
♦ p1 = 100 / d1
• Relations with angular
patterns
– Control angular pattern
spacing:
Figure 1 – Controlling Linear Spacing
♦ d1 = 360 / p1
– Control the quantity:
♦ p1 = 360 / d1
Figure 2 – Controlling Angular Spacing
Creating Relations for Patterns

You can use relations to control pattern increments and quantities. Pattern
increments display like a standard dimension with symbol d#. Pattern
quantities display with symbol p#.
If you have a pattern in two directions, you will see p# displayed
twice.
Using Relations with Linear Patterns

You can use relations with various linear patterns, including Direction and
Dimension patterns. For example, given spacing dimension d1 and pattern
quantity p1, you could:
• Control the linear pattern spacing based on a given quantity, for example
d1 = 100 / p1.
• Control the quantity based on a given linear pattern spacing, for example
p1 = 100 / d1.

In Figure 1, a relation has been created that controls the linear spacing based
on the pattern quantity. When the number of pattern members is decreased,
they remain equally spaced due to the relation.
Using Relations with Rotational Patterns

You can also use relations with rotational patterns, including Axis and
Dimension patterns. For example, given angle d1 and pattern quantity p1,
you could:
• Control the angular pattern spacing based on a given quantity, for example
d1 = 360 / p1.
• Control the quantity based on a given angular pattern spacing, for example
p1 = 360 / d1.
In Figure 2, a relation has been created that controls the quantity of pattern
members based on the angular spacing value. In the left image of Figure 2,
the relation has not yet been created. In the middle image, the relation has
been applied and the quantity has increased based on the spacing value to
maintain equal spacing about 360 degrees. In the right image, the spacing
value has been increased. To maintain equal spacing about 360 degrees, the
quantity has been automatically reduced.
When using a Dimension pattern, it is necessary to use these types
of relations to maintain equal pattern spacing around a given angle.
However with the Axis pattern, you can use the Set Angular Extent
option to achieve the same result without a relation.

PROCEDURE - Creating Relations for Patterns
Feature_Tools\Relation_Patterns RELATION_PATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Create relations to control the spacing of features in a part model.

2. Right-click DIR_PATTERN and
select Edit.
• Select the 5 EXTRUDES
dimension, then right-click and
select Properties.
• Edit the Name to VERT_QTY
and click OK.
• Repeat the process to edit the
10 spacing dimension name to
SPACING.

drop-down list and select
Relations .
5. Type the comment and press
ENTER:
• /* Adjust spacing and offset
based on vertical pattern
quantity and length
6. Select the front-left, oval extrude,
and select the base protrusion.
7. Notice that the other dimensions
have already been renamed.

8. Type the following relations,
pressing ENTER after each line:
• OFFSET = LENGTH /
(VERT_QTY+1)
• SPACING = OFFSET
9. Click OK.
10. Click Regenerate and notice
that the pattern spacing is equal
to the spacing from both ends.
11. Right-click DIR_PATTERN and

select Edit.
• Edit the quantity from 5
EXTRUDES to 4 and click
Regenerate .

Creating Section Relations
Section Relations are relations typically created in Sketcher
mode involving dimensions of the current section.
• Symbolic section dimension
symbols:
– sd# – Sketcher dimension
– rsd# – Reference Sketcher
dimension
– kd# – Known Sketcher
dimension
• Advantages of Section relations:
– Real time dimension updates.
– Relation is regenerated with the
feature in which it resides.
Figure 1 – Showing Symbolic
Sketcher Dimensions
Figure 2 – Showing Numeric Figure 3 – Showing Updated

Sketcher Dimensions Sketcher Dimensions
Creating Section Relations

Section Relations (also referred to as Sketcher relations) are relations
typically created in Sketcher mode and involve dimensions of the current
section. However, you can also create a section relation from the part level
by selecting the Section option in the Relations dialog box, and then selecting
a feature.
When writing relations between section dimensions, you must use the
symbolic section dimension symbols:
• sd# – Dimensions in Sketcher mode.
• rsd# – Reference dimensions in Sketcher.
• kd# – Known dimensions in Sketcher. This symbol is given to a dimension
created between existing geometry (not between section entities). The top
and right dimensions in Figure 1 are known dimensions in the Sketch.

Advantages of Writing Section Relations
The advantages of writing a section relation as opposed to a part relation are:
• The relation is active in Sketcher mode, so you can change Sketcher
dimensions and view the relations take effect. In Figure 2 and Figure 3,
a relation was written that centered the cut feature in the middle of the
main base protrusion. When the relation was applied, the driven rectangle
dimensions automatically updated in real time.
• The relation is regenerated along with the feature in which it resides.
Tips for Writing Section Relations

Keep the following in mind when writing relations within Sketched sections:
• Relations that define dimensions other than section dimensions are best
defined at the feature or part level.
• You cannot reference a parameter in another feature as a driving variable.
For example, if dia is a dimension in another feature with fid_20, the system
does not accept the following section relationship: sd3 = dia:fid_20
• However, you can establish the same relationship at the feature level
or model level by using the model-level equivalent (d#) of the section
dimension (sd#). Alternatively, you can create an intermediate user
parameter in the parent model, and then reference it from the section.
• If you try to assign a relation outside of the section to a parameter that is
already driven by another relation in the section, the system issues an error
message upon regeneration. The same applies if you try to assign relations
to a parameter in a section that is already being driven by a relation outside
the section. Remove one of the relations and regenerate again.

PROCEDURE - Creating Section Relations
Feature_Tools\Section_Relations SECTION_REL.PRT
Task 1: Create section relations in a part model.

2. Orient to the FRONT view.
Edit.
• Notice the dimensions, and
notice that there are no overall
width or height dimensions to
use in a relation.
4. Edit the definition of Extrude 2.

Internal Sketch.
7. Review the dimension scheme.
8. In the ribbon, select the Model

tab, then click the Model Intent
group drop-down menu and
select Relations .
the comment:
• /* Change width based on
height
• sd1 = 2.25 * sd7
11. Click OK to update the
dimensions.

12. Edit the height from 0.5 to 1.
13. Notice that the dimensions
update in Sketcher because of
the relation.
If this relation was written
as a part relation, you
would not be able to view
the dimension update in
Sketcher.

tab, then click Normal and
dimension the overall height and
width of the model.
Dimensioning existing
geometry to existing
geometry creates a known
dimension (kd#).
15. In the ribbon, select the Model

tab, then click the Model Intent
select Relations .
the comment:
• /* Center sketch on model
17. Type the relations:
• sd12 = kd13 / 2
• sd10 = kd14 / 2
18. Click OK to update the

dimensions.
tab, then click OK .

Using the Evalgraph Function
The Datum Graph evaluation function enables you to use graph
features to drive dimensions through relations.
• Relation syntax:
– y = evalgraph(“graph_name”, x)
♦ graph_name = name of
graph feature.
♦ x = value along X-axis of
graph for which the y value
is returned.
• x can be the value specified by a
dimension.
Figure 1 – Graph Feature
Controlling Feature Height
Figure 3 – Feature with Width

Figure 2 – Feature with Width of 8 of 12.5
Using the Evalgraph Function

The Datum Graph evaluation function enables you to use graph features to
drive dimensions through relations. The dimensions can be section, part, or
assembly dimensions. The syntax for using Evalgraph in a relation is:
• evalgraph("graph_name", x)
where:
• graph_name – The name of a graph feature.
• x – The value along the X-axis of the graph for which the y value is returned.
A relation was written that uses the graph feature shown in Figure 1. The
relation controls the feature height using feature width based on the graph.
In Figure 2, the feature width is 8; using the graph in Figure 1, you can
determine that the associated height is 4.
In Figure 3, the feature width is 12.5; using the graph in Figure 1, you can
determine that the associated height is slightly more than 2 (it is 2.33).

For variable section sweep features, you can also specify the trajectory
parameter “trajpar” in the function.
The following is an example of using Evalgraph in a relation:
• d1 = EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1" , d2)
In this case, you control dimension d1 throughout the relation. When d2 is
modified on the model, the system evaluates this value as the x-value using
the specified graph, and returns with the corresponding y-value for d1.
You can also involve Evalgraph in more complex relations, for example:
• d1 = 1.5* EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1", d2+d3*sin(d4) )
A graph feature is usually evaluated for its defined X-axis values.
When it is evaluated beyond the defined range, the Y-axis values
are extrapolated. The system calculates the extrapolated y value for
values of x that are less than the initial value by extending a tangent
line back from the initial point. Similarly, the system calculates the
extrapolated y value for values of x that are greater than the final
value, by extending a tangent line out from the final point.
When you create a section relation of a graph feature, for example,

sd1=evalgraph("CONIC", trajapar*5), this relation becomes
a feature relation. Feature relations are evaluated after part
relations and are solved when the feature to which they belong is
regenerated. Therefore, if a relation performs geometry evaluation
(for example, the distance between two points), it can provide
different results if used as a section relation as opposed to being
used as a part relation.

PROCEDURE - Using the Evalgraph Function
Feature_Tools\Evalgraph EVALGRAPH.PRT
Task 1: Use the Evalgraph function in a relation to control a feature’s

height.

Edit.
• Edit the 2 dimension name to
WIDTH.
• Edit the 10 dimension name to
HEIGHT.
3. Edit the definition of GRAPH1,

click Done from the menu
manager, and press ENTER to
accept the default name.
.
5. Notice that the graph is an x-y
function.
6. Click OK .

Relations .
8. Type the comment /* Control
HEIGHT by changing WIDTH,
based on GRAPH1 and press
ENTER.
9. Select the feature and select
dimension HEIGHT.
=EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1" ,
WIDTH) and click OK.

Edit.
13. Notice that the height dimension
updated for the current width.
14. Double-click the 6.67 height
dimension to edit it.
15. Notice the message in the
message window.
16. Edit the 2 width dimension to 8
and click twice in the background
regenerate.
17. Edit the definition of GRAPH1,

click Done from the menu
manager, and press ENTER to
accept the default name.
a new diagonal line on the end.
19. Click Normal and create the
horizontal and vertical endpoint
dimensions, editing as shown.
20. Click OK .

Edit.
22. Edit the 8 width dimension
to 12.5 and click twice in the
23. Notice that the height has
updated for the new width based
on the graph.

Using Simultaneous Equations
Simultaneous equations are relations in which several variables
or dimensions must be solved simultaneously.
• Procedure:
– Define known values.
– Place SOLVE on a line.
– Type simultaneous
equations.
– Type FOR and variables to
be computed.
• Rules:
– Must declare variables used
in beginning of equation.
– System returns only one
result, even if more than one Figure 1 – Relation and Variable
is possible. Definition
– You can intermix
simultaneous equations with
single variable relations.
Figure 2 – Solution with

Depth of 16 Figure 3 – Solution with Depth of 10
Using Simultaneous Equations

In some cases, it may not be possible or convenient to arrange the desired
relation so that only the driven dimension is on the left side of the equation.
In such cases, the relation can be set up so that the system can solve a
set of simultaneous equations for the desired variables. Simultaneous
equations are relations in which several variables or dimensions must be
solved simultaneously.
Setting Up Simultaneous Equations
To set up a set of equations to be solved, use the following procedure:
• Define the known values.
• Place SOLVE on a line of the relation.
• Type the equations to be solved simultaneously.

• Type FOR and then indicate the variables to be computed, separated with
commas.
Rules for Creating Simultaneous Equations

Consider these rules for creating simultaneous equations:
• You must declare variables used in simultaneous equations in the
beginning of the equations.
• When solving the simultaneous equation, the system returns only one
set of results, even if more than one solution for the system of equations
is possible.
• You can intermix simultaneous equations with single variable relations.
Simultaneous Equation Examples

For example, you have a box with dimension defined by the parameters
WIDTH, HEIGHT, and DEPTH, and you want to specify the following
conditions:
• The volume remains constant at 320.
• The width is twice the height.
• The length is variable.
You can type the following simultaneous equations:
SOLVE
LENGTH*WIDTH*HEIGHT = 320
WIDTH=2*HEIGHT
FOR HEIGHT WIDTH ...or... FOR HEIGHT,WIDTH
All lines between the SOLVE and FOR statements become part of the
simultaneous equations. The FOR line lists the variables to be solved (note
that there are two possible variations). Any variables that appear in the
simultaneous equations, but do not appear in the FOR list, are interpreted
as constants.
Alternatively, you can set the same conditions by typing the following
simultaneous equations:
VOLUME = 320
SOLVE
VOLUME=LENGTH*WIDTH*HEIGHT
WIDTH=2*HEIGHT
FOR HEIGHT WIDTH
Figure 2 and Figure 3 display variations of the model where the DEPTH
was edited to different values.

PROCEDURE - Using Simultaneous Equations
Feature_Tools\Simultaneous_Eq SIMULTANEOUS.PRT
Task 1: Use simultaneous equations in a relation.
In this example, the volume of a rectangular solid is to remain

constant. The width is to be twice the height. The depth value
must be variable. The system should solve the necessary
equations and return the dimensions for height and width.

Edit.
3. Notice the 16 depth dimension,
20 height dimension, and 40
width dimension.
4. Edit the 16 dimension name to

DEPTH.
HEIGHT.
WIDTH.
7. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Relations
.
8. In the Relations dialog box, type the comment /* solve simultaneous
equations for height and width and press ENTER.
• Select the feature to display the dimensions, if necessary.
• Type volume = 320 and press ENTER.
• Type SOLVE and press ENTER.
• Type volume =, select dimension HEIGHT, and click x.
• Select dimension WIDTH and click x.
• Select dimension DEPTH and press ENTER.
• Type width = 2*height and press ENTER.
• Type FOR height, width.

9. Click OK.

the geometry update.

Edit.
12. Notice that the 16 depth
dimension stayed the same.
13. Notice the new 3.16 height
dimension.
14. Notice the new 6.32 width
dimension, which is twice the
height.
15. Double-click the 3.16 height
dimension and try to edit it.
16. Notice the message in the
message window.

17. Edit the depth from 16 to 10 and
click Regenerate .
Edit.
19. Notice the 10 depth dimension,
the 4 height dimension, and the
8 width dimension.
20. Notice that the width is still twice
the height.

Module 9
Advanced Blends
Module Overview
Beyond creating Parallel Blends, you can create Rotational Blends to create
advanced geometry efficiently. This blend type enables you to create more
advanced geometry, and have additional control over the blend sections
and resulting blend shape.
In this module, you learn how to create Rotational Blends and change their
attributes.
Objectives
• Create blends by selecting non-parallel sections.
• Analyze blend section tools.
• Analyze blend tangency.
• Create rotational blends by selecting and sketching sections.
• Define rotational blend tangency.
• Define rotational blend options.

Creating Blends by Selecting Non-Parallel
Sections
You can create a blend feature by selecting existing sketches or
sections, or chains or loops of a model’s existing feature edges.
• A blend feature must contain two

or more sections.
• Selected sections can be
non-parallel.
• Selected sections are connected
using a smooth curve.
• Sections are blended based on
selection order.
• You can reorder or remove
sections.
Figure 1 – Viewing Existing

Geometry
Figure 2 – Blending Between Two Figure 3 – Blending Between Three

Non-Parallel Sections Non-Parallel Sections
Creating Blends by Selecting Non-Parallel Sections

You create blend features when you need to create models that contain
different transitional cross-sections. For example, a blend feature enables
you to create geometry that starts as a circular cross-section, but then
changes to a square cross-section as you transition along the length of the
feature. Blend features can add or remove material.
Selecting the Sections

A blend feature must contain two or more sections. You can select existing
sketches or sections, or chains or loops of a model’s existing feature edges.
You can use any of the following chain selection techniques:
• One-by-one – Enables you to select adjacent edges one at a time along a
continuous path.

• Tangent chain – Enables you to select all the edges that are tangent to
an anchor edge.
• Surface loop – Enables you to select a loop of edges on a surface.
• Surface loop from to – Enables you to select a range of edges from the
surface loop.
• Boundary – Enables you to select the outermost boundaries of a quilt.
• From-to Boundary loop – Enables you to select a range of edges from
the boundary.
The sections you select can be parallel or non-parallel. By default, the system
connects the selected sections together using a smooth curve. The geometry
updates as you change the angles between the sections.
Each section must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). There
are two exceptions to this rule:
• The blend can start or end as a single point.
• You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as an
entity. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables
the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects the
points of each section to create the blend feature.
Section Start Points

Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond
between sections to avoid a twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. You
can individually drag the start point for each section to a different vertex in
that section.
The start point arrow direction can be flipped, but this does not
affect blending.
Manipulating Selected Sections

Consider the following regarding manipulating selected blend sections:
• By default, sections are blended together in the order of selection.
However, you can always move sections up or down in the blend order.
• You can remove sections.
• The offset, or depth, between sections is based on the selected section’s
depth with respect to the other selected sections. You cannot specify a
different depth.
• When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the active
section at any time. To make a given section the active section, you can
either select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can select
the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section
then changes color, and all right-mouse click options pertain to this active
section. In Figure 3, Section 3 is the active section.

PROCEDURE - Creating Blends by Selecting
Non-Parallel Sections
Blend\Select-Sections_Non-Parallel_Solid
BLEND_SELECT_2.PRT
Task 1: Create a blend between existing model edges.

2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes
select Blend .
Sections tab.
• Select Selected sections.
4. Select the left, vertical edge.
5. Press SHIFT and query-select

the surface loop from to over the
upper, short edge.
6. On the Sections tab, click Insert.

7. Select the left, vertical edge.
8. Press SHIFT and query-select

the loop over the upper, short
edge.

9. Notice the blending between the
model edges.
10. Notice that the sections are
non-parallel.

the dashboard.
Task 2: Add a section and edit its angle.

Sketch 1 and select Unhide.
2. Edit the definition of Blend 1.

Sections tab to view the
progress.
right-click and select Insert.
5. Select the middle section.
6. Notice this section is #3 in the
blending sequence.

7. Right-click over the #3 Section 3
leader note and select Reorder
Up.
8. Notice that Section 3 is now #2
in the blending sequence.
9. Drag the start point to the

upper-left.

11. Orient to view orientation RIGHT.
12. In the model tree, expand
Sketch 1.
13. Right-click datum plane
ANGLE2, and select Edit.
14. Drag the handle to the left
approximately 15 degrees, as
shown.
15. Click twice in the background of
the graphics window to de-select
all geometry.

Analyzing Blend Section Tools
Blend section tools enable you to achieve the desired blend
result.
• Tools include:
– Blend vertex
– Blending to a point
Figure 1 – Sections Have Different

Number of Entities
Figure 2 – Added Blend Vertices

Create Equal Entities Figure 3 – Blending to a Point
Analyzing Blend Section Tools

The blend feature includes two helpful tools to achieve the desired blend
result: blend vertices and blending to a point.
Blend Vertices
Each section of a blend must always contain an equal number of entities.
For sections that do not have enough geometric entities, you can add blend
vertices. Blend vertices enable a section’s vertices to converge or diverge.
In Figure 1, the first blend section has six vertices, while the second blend
section has only four vertices. Consequently, two blend vertices have been
added to the section with only four vertices, as shown in Figure 2.
When creating blends by sketching sections, you add the blend vertices
within the section you are sketching. Select the desired vertex, right-click,
and select Blend Vertex.
When creating blends by selecting sections, you add blend vertices by
clicking Add Blend Vertex from within the Sections tab in the blend tool’s

dashboard. By default, the blend vertex is created at the next vertex from the
start point direction. You can then drag it to the desired location.
The Blend tool keeps track of the number of entities per section. Each added
blend vertex counts as an entity.
• Figure 4 displays the number

of entities per section for
the feature in Figure 1. The
number of entities between
sections is not equal, therefore
the feature cannot be created.
Figure 4 – Different Numbers of
Entities
• Figure 5 displays the number

of entities per section for the
feature in Figure 2. There
is now an equal number of
entities between sections
because blend vertices have
been added at the two upper Figure 5 – Equal Numbers of Entities
corners. The feature can now
be created.
Blending to a Point
A blend can start or end as a single point, as shown in Figure 3. This is the
one exception to the rule that blend sections must contain the same number
of entities.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Blend Section Tools
Blend\Section-Tools_Solid BLEND_SECTION-TOOLS.PRT
Task 1: Create a blend vertex on a selected section.

2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select
Blend .
3. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab.
4. In the graphics window, right-click and select Selected sections.
5. Select a front edge of the model.

6. Press SHIFT and select the front
surface loop.
lower-left vertex.
8. Right-click in the graphics

window and select Insert.
9. Select the rectangle sketch as
the section.
10. Notice that the blend preview
does not display. This is because
the entity count per section does
not match.
11. On the Sections tab, click Add

Blend Vertex.
12. The blend vertex appears at the
lower-right.
13. Drag the blend vertex to the
upper-left.

14. Click Add Blend Vertex again.
15. The blend vertex appears at the
lower-right.
16. Drag the blend vertex to the
upper-right.
17. Notice that the blend preview
now displays successfully. This
is because the entity count per
section now matches.
the dashboard.
19. In the model, right-click Sketch
2 and select Hide.
Task 2: Create a blend vertex on a sketched section.
Blend .
2. Right-click and select Sketched sections.
3. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
4. Select the front surface and click Sketch.

Sketching group.
7. Select Loop as the Type and
select the front model surface.
• Click Close.
8. Select the lower-left vertex,
right-click, and select Start
Point.
9. Right-click and select OK.

10. Edit the offset value to 150.
11. Right-click and select Sketch.
12. Select Corner Rectangle
from the Rectangle types
drop-down menu in the Sketching
group.
13. Sketch and dimension a
rectangle symmetric about the
vertical reference, with the
bottom edge on the horizontal
reference.
14. If necessary, set the start point to
the lower-left vertex.
15. Select the upper-left vertex,
right-click, and select Blend
Vertex.
16. Select the upper-right vertex,
Vertex.

Task 3: Create a blend feature that blends to a point.
Blend .

4. Click Project , select Loop
as the Type, and select the front
model surface.
• Click Close.
5. Select the lower-left vertex,
right-click, and select Start
Point, if necessary.
7. Edit the offset value to 75.


Sketching group.
10. Place a point at the intersection
of the vertical and horizontal
references.

Analyzing Blend Tangency
The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the
surfaces of the blend feature and the surfaces of adjacent
feature geometry.
• For Smooth blend option only.

• Specify tangency for Start and
End sections independently.
• You must select a tangent
surface for each blend section
segment.
• Blend to a point cap type:
– Sharp
– Smooth
Figure 1 – Blend Feature, No

Tangency Applied
Figure 2 – Blend Feature,

Tangency Applied at Start and Figure 3 – Sharp Versus Smooth
End Sections Tangency for Blend to Point
Analyzing Blend Tangency

The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the surfaces of the
blend feature and the surfaces of adjacent feature geometry. You can define
tangency only for blends created using the Smooth blend option, and you can
define it at both the Start Section and End Section independently.
The following types of tangency options are available:
• Free – No tangency is applied. The system blends as if there are no
adjacent surfaces.
• Normal – Enables you to blend the feature’s surfaces normal to the blend
section plane. Whether sketching or selecting sections, the Blend tool
computes a planar section, and the blend is normal to that blend section
plane.

• Tangent – Enables you to blend the feature’s surfaces tangent to the
adjacent feature’s surfaces. You must select the corresponding adjacent
surface of each blend segment.
For cases where you blend to a point, there are two different cap types
available:
• Sharp – No tangency is applied at the point. This results in the blend
ending at a sharp point, as shown in the left image of Figure 3.
• Smooth – Blends to the point with lines tangent at the point, as shown in
the right image of Figure 3.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Blend Tangency
Blend\Tangency_Solid BLEND_TANGENT_1.PRT
Task 1: Define tangency for a blend with selected sections.


Tangency tab.
• For the Start Section boundary,
select Normal from the
Condition drop-down list.
• For the End Section boundary,
The system is setting blend surfaces normal to the section plane.

Because the adjacent purple geometry is an extrude feature, its
surfaces are also normal to the section plane. Thus, the surfaces
are 180 degrees from each other, and therefore essentially tangent.

the dashboard.
5. In the model tree, expand
Extrude 2.
6. Right-click datum plane
ANGLE3, and select Edit.
7. Edit the angle to 30 degrees.
8. Notice that the blend tangency
updates.
9. Click twice in the background of
the graphics window to de-select
all geometry.

Task 2: Experiment with tangency for a blend with sketched sections.
1. Click Open from the Quick

Access toolbar.
2. Select BLEND_TANGENT_2.
PRT and click Open.
4. Orient to the TOP view
orientation.

Tangency tab.
• For the End Section boundary,

Draft 1 and select Edit.
8. Edit the angle to 20 and click
twice in the background.
9. Edit the definition of Blend 2
again.
10. Notice that the feature surfaces
are normal to the blend section
plane but not tangent to the
purple surfaces.
11. Press CTRL+D.

12. Select the Tangency tab.
select Tangent from the
• Select the corresponding
surface adjacent to the
highlighted edge.
13. Select the corresponding
adjacent surface for the next five
highlighted edges.

orientation.
15. Notice that the feature surfaces
are now tangent to the purple
surfaces.
Task 3: Define tangency for a blend with an endpoint.

• Notice that the Start Section
boundary is currently set at
Free.
3. For the Start Section boundary,

select Normal from the Condition
drop-down list.
4. Notice that the End Section

boundary is currently set at
Sharp.
5. Press CTRL+D.
6. For the End Section boundary,

select Smooth from the

Creating Rotational Blends by Selecting Sections
You can create a rotational blend feature by selecting existing
sections that are organized radially about a common axis.
• Sections organized radially about
a common axis.
• Sections must be less than 180
degrees apart.
Figure 1 – Completed Blend
Figure 2 – Radial Section Locations Figure 3 – Selected Sections
Creating Rotational Blends by Selecting Sections

The rotational blend feature enables the blending of non-planar sections,
In addition to sketching sections, you can also select geometry for the
sections of rotational blend features. The sections must be organized around
a common axis of rotation.
Selecting geometry for blend sections is similar to using the Project
functionality because it enables you to pick geometry from existing curves
or edges.
Selecting the Sections
You can select existing model geometry or sketched curves for use as the
sections of a rotational blend. The sections must be organized radially

around a common axis as shown in Figure 2, and must be less than 180
degrees apart.
The selection options for the sections are:
• One-by-One Chain – Enables you to select geometry edges one at a time.
• Surface Chain – Enables you to select a loop of edges or entities. You can
select an edge, press SHIFT, and select a surface or face, then the edges
or entities that form the loop are selected. If more than one loop exists,
you must select the desired one.
Additional options available when selecting geometry for blend sections
include:
• Add Blend Vertex – Enables you to specify a blend vertex to add blend
vertices where needed.
• Move Up/Move Down – Enables you to change the order in which the
system attempts to connect the sections.
• Details – Enables you to get information for selected entities.
• Remove – Enables you to delete selected entities from the section.
• Insert – Enables you to add an additional section. The section is added
after the currently selected section.
Figure 3 shows the preview of a rotational blend, after the sections have
been selected.

PROCEDURE - Creating Rotational Blends by Selecting
Sections
Blend_Rotational\Select-Sections_Solid
ROT-BLEND_SELECT_SOLID.PRT
Task 1: Create a Rotational Blend by selecting multiple sections.

Display types:
• Notice that all sections are
created radially about the
same axis.

3. Click the Shapes group
Rotational Blend .
4. Click the Sections tab in the
dashboard and select Selected
sections.
5. Select the lower edge, as shown.
6. Press SHIFT and select the flat

right surface to select the loop.

7. Click Insert on the Sections tab.
8. Select Sketch 3 as the second
section.
• Notice the twisting effect.
9. Select the Section 1 note on the

screen.
position shown to remove the
twist.
11. Click Insert on the Sections tab.

12. Select Sketch 2 as the third
section.
• Notice that the blend is
following the order of selection,
and so the system is unable to
connect the sections.

13. With Section 3 still highlighted,
click Move Up.
• Notice that Section 3 is now
ordered as the second section
in the list.

click Remove on the Sections
tab.
right-click over the Section 2 note
and select Remove Section.
16. Right-click, select Insert, and
select Sketch 2 as the second
section.
select Sketch 3 as the third
section.
select Sketch 4 as the fourth
section.
Notice the # column on the Sections tab. Each section has two
entities.

20. Select Sketch 2 in the model
tree, then press CTRL and select
Sketch 3 and Sketch 4.
21. Right-click and select Hide.

Creating Rotational Blends by Sketching
Sections
You can create a rotational blend feature by sketching sections
which are sketched radially about a common axis.
• A blend feature must contain two

or more sections.
• Sketched sections are connected
using a smooth curve.
• Section sketches require:
– Offset angle
– Axis of Revolution
• Maximum offset angle of 120
degrees.
Figure 1 – Rotational Blend with

Sketched Sections
Figure 2 – Sketching a Section Figure 3 – Connecting the Sections
Creating Rotational Blends by Sketching Sections

You can create a rotational blend feature by sketching sections that are
oriented around a common axis of revolution. The axis is defined in the
sketch, as shown in Figure 2, or selected using the reference collector in the
dashboard.
Sketching the Sections

A rotational blend feature must contain two or more sections. Each section
must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). There are two
exceptions to this rule:
• The blend can start or end as a single point.

• You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as an
entity. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables
the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects the
points of each section to create the blend feature.
Specifying the Angle of Sketched Sections

By default, the system connects the sketched sections together using a
smooth curve. After Section 1, a rotation angle is required. The rotation
angle, shown in Figure 3, must not exceed 120 degrees.
The angle can be defined in one of two ways.
• Offset dimension – Enables you to specify the sketch plane offset angle.
By default, the section is offset this specified angle from the previously
created section. However, you can select any other section in the blend
feature from which to offset a new section.
• Reference – Enables you to define the section’s sketch plane location by
selecting a reference. For example, you can select a datum plane.
Section Start Points

Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond
between sections to avoid a twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. You
can manage start points within each sketched section.
Manipulating Sketched Sections

Consider the following regarding manipulating sketched rotational blend
sections:
• By default, sections are blended together in the order they are inserted.
You can switch the blending order using the Move Up or Move Down
options on the Sections tab of the dashboard.
• You can remove sections.
• When defining a rotational blend feature, only one section is considered
the active section at any time. To make a given section the active section,
you can either select it on the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can
select the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section
then changes color, and all right-mouse click options pertain to this active
section.

PROCEDURE - Creating Rotational Blends by Sketching
Sections
Blend_Rotational\Sketch-Sections_Solid
ROT-BLEND_SKETCH_SOLID.PRT
Task 1: Sketch sections for a Rotational Blend around an internal axis.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Rotational
Blend .
3. Select the Sections tab and verify that Sketched sections is
selected.
4. Click Define.
5. Select FRONT from the model tree and select Sketch.
7. Click Corner Rectangle from

8. Sketch and dimension the
rectangle shown.
• Select the lower-left corner first
to set the start point location.
• Right-click and select
Construction Centerline,
then sketch the centerline on
the vertical axis.
• Select the centerline,
right-click, and select
Designate Axis of
Revolution.
• Click OK to complete the
section.
9. Select the Sections tab and notice that you are now defining Section
2 and that the default offset dimension is from Section 1.
10. Edit the Offset from angle to –80.

11. Click Sketch.
12. Click Corner Rectangle and
sketch the rectangle shown.
• Select the lower-left corner
first.
13. Click OK .
14. Select the Sections tab and click

Insert.
• Notice that you are creating
Section 3 and that the default
offset is from Section 2.
15. Edit the Offset from angle to
–80.
16. Click Sketch.
17. Click Corner Rectangle
and sketch the rectangle shown,
selecting the lower left corner
first.

18. Click OK .
• Notice the twisting between
Section 2 and Section 3.
19. Select the Section 2 leader note

to activate the section.
20. Drag the section to 90 degrees.
21. Select the Section 3 leader
note and drag the section to 80
degrees.
22. With Section 3 still selected,

right-click and select Sketch.
23. Select the lower-right vertex,
right-click and select Start Point.
24. Click OK .

Task 2: Insert another rotational blend section, which blends to a point.

Definition.
2. Select the Sections tab, click
Insert.
3. Edit the default offset from
Section 3 to Section 2.
4. Edit the Offset angle to –130.
5. Read the note and click OK.
6. Edit the Offset angle to –120.
7. Click Sketch and sketch point as
shown.
8. Click OK .
Task 3: Sketch a section for a Rotational Blend around a selected axis

and utilize a blend vertex.
1. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Rotational

Blend .
2. Right-click and select Sketched sections.

Sketching group.
6. Click Loop.
7. Select the surface shown and
click Close.
section.
9. Select the Sections tab and

notice that the Axis collector is
active.
10. Enable Axis Display .

11. Select axis A_1.
12. Right-click and select Insert.
14. Sketch the triangle as shown,
constraining it to the construction
geometry.
15. Select the upper vertex,
Vertex.
16. Click OK .

Analyzing Rotational Blend Options
You can use multiple options for a solid rotational blend to
achieve different geometry results.
Options Tab
• Smooth
• Straight
• Connect end and start sections
Figure 1 – Original Blend
Figure 2 – Smooth Blend with Figure 3 – Straight Blend with

Unconnected and Connected Unconnected and Connected
Start and End Sections Start and End Sections
Analyzing Rotational Blend Options

When the sections of a solid rotational blend are rotated about the axis of
revolution, you can edit the following options to achieve different geometry
results.
• Smooth – The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as
shown in Figure 2. This is the default option.
• Straight – The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown
in Figure 3.
• Connect end and start sections – The start section and end section of the
blend are joined together, as shown in the right image of Figure 2 and
Figure 3.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Rotational Blend Options
Blend_Rotational\Options_Solid
ROT-BLEND_OPTIONS_SOLID.PRT
Task 1: Edit the shape of a rotational blend.

2. Select the rotational blend
feature, right-click, and select
Edit Definition.
• Notice that the model has a
smooth transition between the
sections.

4. Enable Connect end and start
sections.
5. In the Options tab, select

Straight.

6. In the options tab, disable
Connect end and start
sections.
7. Select the Section 2 note.

9. Select the Section 3 note.
11. In the Options tab, select

Smooth.

Analyzing Rotational Blend Tangency
The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the
surfaces of the blend feature and the surfaces of adjacent
feature geometry.
• For Smooth blend option only.

• Specify tangency for Start and
End sections independently.
• You must select a tangent
surface for each blend section
segment.
• Blend to a point cap type:
– Smooth
– Sharp
Figure 2 – Blend Feature with Smooth

and Sharp End Conditions
Figure 1 – Blend Feature with Free, Normal, and Tangent

Conditions at Start Section
Analyzing Rotational Blend Tangency

The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the surfaces of the
blend feature and the surfaces of adjacent feature geometry. You can define
tangency only for blends created using the Smooth blend option, and you can
define it at both the Start Section and End Section independently.
The following types of tangency options are available:
• Free – No tangency is applied. The system blends as if there are no
adjacent surfaces, as shown in the left image of Figure 1.
• Normal – Enables you to blend the feature’s surfaces normal to the blend
section plane. Whether you sketch or select sections, the Blend tool
computes a planar section, and the blend is normal to that blend section
plane, as shown in the middle image of Figure 1.

• Tangent – Enables you to blend the feature’s surfaces tangent to the
adjacent feature’s surfaces. You must select the corresponding adjacent
surface of each blend segment, as shown in the right image of Figure 1.
For cases where you blend to a point, there are two different cap types
available:
• Smooth – Blends to the point with lines tangent at the point, as shown in
the top image of Figure 2.
• Sharp – No tangency is applied at the point. This results in the blend
ending at a sharp point, as shown in the bottom image of Figure 2.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Rotational Blend Tangency
Blend_Rotational\Tangency_Solid
ROT-BLEND_TANGENT_SOLID.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with tangency for a Rotational Blend.

2. Right-click Rotational Blend 2
in the model tree and select Edit
Definition.
click Named Views and
select TOP.
5. Edit the Start Section boundary

condition from Free to Normal.
• Notice that the blend surfaces
are normal to the section
plane.
6. Press CTRL+D to return to

standard orientation.
7. On the Tangency tab, edit the
Start Section boundary condition
from Normal to Tangent.
8. Select the surface corresponding
to the highlighted edge.
9. Continue selecting surfaces for
the next three edges.

click Named Views and
select TOP.
• Notice that the surface is
now tangent to the adjacent
surfaces.
12. With Rotational Blend 2 still
selected, right-click and select
Suppress and OK in the
Suppress dialog box.
Task 2: Define tangency for a blend with an endpoint.
1. Right-click Rotational Blend 1

in the model tree and select Edit
Definition.
• Notice that the End Section
boundary condition is set to
Sharp.
• Click Preview Feature .

5. Edit the End Section boundary
condition from Sharp to Smooth.

Module 10
Sweeps with Variable Sections
Module Overview
A sweep with a variable section is one of the most powerful features in Creo
Parametric, considering the variety and complexity of geometry it can be
used to create. A sweep utilizes a single section, which can be constant
or variable, and that is swept along one or more trajectories. The section
can vary its shape and orientation as it is pulled in different directions along
different trajectories. In addition, section dimensions can be varied along the
length of the sweep by using relations and a datum graph if desired.
In this module, you learn how to use sweeps with variable sections to create
solid geometry, as well as how to use the many options that control the
section orientation and tangency.
Objectives
• Understand the theory behind sweeps with variable sections.
• Create sweeps using a constant section.
• Create sweeps with variable sections using normal to trajectory section
plane control.
• Create sweeps with variable sections using constant normal direction
section plane control.
• Create sweeps with variable sections using normal to projection section
plane control.
• Analyze horizontal and vertical control in a sweep with a variable section.
• Create sweeps with variable sections using multiple trajectories.
• Create sweeps with variable sections using tangent trajectories.
• Analyze the different options and rules for a sweep with a variable section.
• Use trajpar and evalgraph in the creation of sweeps with variable sections.

Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections
Theory
A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that
can change shape and orientation along the feature.
• Create a solid or a surface feature.

• Add or remove material.
• Main components:
– Section
♦ Constant or variable.
♦ Sits on an x-y-z frame.
– Trajectories
♦ Use one or more.
♦ Section attached to Origin Figure 1 – Creating a Sweep
trajectory. with a Variable Section
♦ Section sweeps along Origin
trajectory length.
Figure 2 – Completed Feature
Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory

A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that can change
shape and orientation along the feature. With the Variable Section Sweep
feature, you can create a solid or surface feature. You add or remove
material while sweeping a section along one or more selected trajectories, by
controlling the section’s orientation, rotation, and geometry. You can create a
sweep using a constant section or a variable section.
The main components of the sweep tool are the section and trajectories. The
sketched section sits on an x-y-z frame that is attached to the Origin trajectory
and moves along its length to create geometry. The Origin trajectory is the
first selected trajectory. The Origin trajectory, along with the other trajectories
and other references such as the planes, axes, edges, or an axis of the
coordinate system, define the orientation of the section along the sweep. In

Figure 1 and Figure 2, the curved datum curve is the Origin trajectory that the
rectangular section sweeps along.
The frame is essentially a coordinate system that slides along the origin
trajectory and carries with itself the section to be swept. Axes of the
coordinate system are defined by auxiliary trajectories and other references.
The frame is important because it determines the orientation of the sketch as it
is being moved along the origin trajectory. The frame is oriented by additional
constraints and references. The system places the sketched section in a
specified orientation with respect to these references and attaches it to a
frame that moves along the origin trajectory and sweeps the section.
Best Practices
A good way to understand sweeps with variable sections is to think of yourself
on a roller coaster holding a picture frame. The Origin trajectory is the track
of the roller coaster. The frame you are holding is the frame referred to in this
topic. While you ride the roller coaster, you are moving along on the track, but
you can point and reorient the frame to a different direction while doing so.

Creating Sweeps using a Constant Section
A sweep with a constant section does not change its shape as it
is swept along the trajectories.
• The orientation of the frame can
change.
• Merge ends:
– Constant sections only.
– Must be a solid surface at the
ends.
• Sketch placement point:
– Specify a different point on
Origin trajectory.
– Does not affect the start point
of sweep.
Figure 1 – Constant Section Sketch
Figure 2 – Constant Section Figure 3 – Constant Section

without Ends Merged with Ends Merged
Creating Sweeps using a Constant Section

When a sketched section sweeps along the Origin trajectory, the section
geometry can vary and change shape based on how the sketch is
constrained, dimensioned, and so on. The references to which the sketch is
constrained can even change the shape of the section. The section shape
can be variable because the sketch regenerates at points along the trajectory
and updates its shape accordingly.
You can, however, create a sweep that uses a constant section. A sweep
with a constant section does not change its shape as it is being swept along
the trajectories. Only the orientation of the frame on which the section lies
changes. If the Origin trajectory contains entities that are non-tangent, you
must use a constant section. Figure 1 displays a sweep with a constant
section along an origin trajectory with non-tangent entities.
When creating a sweep protrusion or cut, you can decide whether to merge
the ends of the sweep using the Merge ends option. The Merge ends option

merges the ends of the sweep. There must be a solid surface at the ends
of the sweep to perform a merge. Figure 2 displays the sweep without the
merged ends option selected. Notice how the sweep feature does not fully
join to the surfaces of the solid walls. Figure 3 displays the sweep with the
merged ends option selected. Notice that the sweep feature extends to fully
intersect the inside surfaces of the solid walls.
You can also specify a different Sketch placement point. The Sketch
placement point option enables you to specify the point on the Origin
trajectory at which you want to sketch the section. The start point of the
sweep is not affected. The start point of the sweep is used as the default
location where you sketch the section if the Sketch placement point is empty.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Using a Constant
Section
Sweep\Constant-Section_Solid CONSTANT_SECTION.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion using a constant

section.

2. Start the Sweep from the
Shapes group.
3. Select the curve.
4. Click Create Section then

click Sketch View .
.
6. Click Center and Point and

sketch a circle at the references
intersection.
circle diameter to 2.
8. Click OK .
orientation.
11. Notice that the ends are not
merged with the existing
geometry.

14. Select the Merge ends check
box.

Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory
The moving frame of a sweep is always normal to a specified
trajectory when the Normal To Trajectory option is specified.
• Normal To Trajectory:
– Frame is normal to the Origin
trajectory by default.
– Frame can be normal to any
additional trajectory.
♦ Select N check box for that
trajectory.
• X direction reference at start:
– Sets initial X-orientation of
frame.
Figure 1 – Section Normal to
Origin Trajectory
Figure 2 – Section Normal to Figure 3 – Section Normal to Origin

Chain 1 Trajectory Trajectory, Different X Direction
Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory

When the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, the moving
frame is always normal to the specified trajectory. By default, the frame is
created normal to the Origin trajectory, but it can be normal to any additional
trajectory. To switch the trajectory the frame is normal to, simply select the
N check box in the dashboard for that trajectory. In Figure 1, the frame is
normal to the Origin trajectory. In the Figure 2, the frame is normal to the
Chain 1 trajectory, and the geometry changes as a result.
Specifying the X Direction Reference at Start

Specifying the X direction reference at start sets the initial X-orientation of the
frame on which the sketch is created. The reference specifies the positive X

for the sketch view. Specifying the X direction reference at start is similar to
specifying the Sketch Orientation Reference for a Sketch Orientation direction
that is always set to Right. In Figure 1, the X direction reference is the right
model surface. In Figure 3, the X direction reference has been changed to the
right chamfer surface. As a result, the frame has rotated slightly to face the
new reference and the sketched geometry has as well. Note that if you do not
assign an X direction reference at start, the system assigns a default direction.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory
Sweep\Normal-Trajectory_Solid NORM_TRAJ.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion normal to trajectory.

2. Start the Sweep from the
Shapes group.
3. Select the left curve as the origin
trajectory.
4. Notice that the highlighted
trajectory with an arrow indicates
the start.

click Sketch View .
6. Notice the default sketch
orientation.
7. Click Cancel and click Yes
to quit Sketcher.

the Sweep tab in the ribbon.
• Click in the X direction
reference at start collector
and select the right side of the
model.
click Sketch View .
11. Notice both the orientation and
the crosshairs at the sweep
origin.

.
sketch the rectangle so that it is
symmetrical about the horizontal
reference and offset more to
the right side of the vertical
reference.
overall width to 40, the height to
25, and the offset 15 to the left
side.
15. Click OK and orient to the

16. Notice the sweep shape.
17. Select the References tab, press
CTRL, and select the curve on
the right as a second trajectory.
• Select the N check box to set
Chain 1 to normal.
18. Click Create Section , then

click Sketch View and
notice that the Sketch is the
same except that the Sketch
plane is reoriented.
19. Click Cancel , click Yes,
and orient to the Standard
Orientation.

select the N check box to set
Origin back to normal.
• Click in the X direction
reference at start collector
and select the right side
chamfer surface.
21. Notice the sweep shape and
click Complete Feature .

Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal
Direction
When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is
used, the Z-axis of the moving frame is parallel to a specified
direction.
• The section becomes

parallel to the specified
reference.
• Geometry updates if the
reference is modified.
Figure 1 – Section Normal to Origin

Trajectory
Figure 2 – Constant
Normal Direction Set to Figure 3 – Constant Normal Direction
Datum Plane Reference Modified
Creating Sweeps using Constant Normal Direction

When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is used, the
Z-axis, or section normal, of the moving frame is parallel to a specified
direction. This means the section becomes parallel to the specified reference.
The direction reference collector enables you to add or delete references.
In Figure 1, the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, so the

geometry and sketch plane are normal to the Origin trajectory. In Figure 2,
the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control has been specified, and
the datum plane has been specified as the reference. Consequently, the
Z-axis of the frame has become normal to the datum plane, and the geometry
has updated. In Figure 3, the datum plane angle has been flipped, and the
variable section sweep geometry has updated as well.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal
Direction
Sweep\Contant-Normal-Direction_Solid
CONSTANT_NORMAL.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion using constant normal
direction section plane control.

Display types: .
orientation.
3. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

notice the sketch orientation.
5. Click Refit from the In
Graphics Toolbar.

the Sweep tab of the ribbon.
• Edit the Section plane control
to Constant Normal Direction
and select datum plane
NORM.
orientation.
9. Notice that the geometry has
updated.

click Sketch View and notice
the new sketch orientation.
Graphics Toolbar.
12. Click OK .
13. Click Complete Feature
and orient to the Standard
Orientation.
14. Select datum plane NORM, then

right-click and select Edit.
• Edit the angle value to -35 and
regenerate.
orientation.
updated.

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal
to Projection
When the Normal to Projection Section plane control is used,
there are two levels of control provided for the moving frame.
• The Y-axis of the moving frame is

parallel to a specified direction.
• The Z-axis is tangent to the
projection of the origin trajectory
along the specified direction.
• You must specify the direction.
Figure 1 – Normal to Projection

Diagram
Figure 2 – Y-Axis of Moving Frame

Figure 3 – Z-Axis Tangent to
Parallel to Direction Reference
Projection of Origin Trajectory
Creating Sweeps Normal to Projection

As illustrated in Figure 1, when the Normal to Projection Section plane control
is used, the Y-axis of the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction,
and the Z-axis is tangent to the projection of the Origin trajectory along the
specified direction. The direction reference collector enables you to add
or delete references.
In Figure 2, the Direction reference specified is datum plane DTM1. The

Y-axis of the frame is parallel to the datum plane normal. If the datum plane
were rotated, the Y-axis of the frame would also rotate to remain parallel to
the datum plane normal. The resulting geometry would rotate as well.

In Figure 3, the Direction reference is still datum plane DTM1. In this
particular view, the projection of the Origin trajectory onto this datum plane
is directly on top of the Origin trajectory. Notice that the Z-axis of the frame
remains tangent to this projection along the entire sweep length.

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections
Normal to Projection
Sweep\Normal-Projection_Solid NORM_PROJ.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion normal to projection.

Display types: .
ORIGIN_TRAJ to view it.
3. Right-click PROJECT_SAMPLE
and select Unhide.
Curve PROJECT_SAMPLE
is shown in the plane for
visual reference only.

the Sweep tab in the ribbon.
• Notice the available options.
drop-down list to Normal To
Projection and select datum
plane DTM1.
orientation.
7. Notice the sweep curves in this
view.
8. Orient to the RIGHT view

orientation.
9. Notice that the sweep's Z-axis is
tangent to the projection of the
origin trajectory in this view.


click Flip to flip the direction.



Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in
Sweeps
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame rotation
around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the sweep.
• Automatic:
– Section plane automatically
oriented in XY direction.
• Normal To Surface:
– Y-axis of section plane normal to
surface on which Origin trajectory
lies.
• X-Trajectory:
– X-axis of section plane “points” to
specified X-Trajectory
Figure 1 – Automatic Control
Figure 2 – Normal to Surface Control Figure 3 – X-Trajectory Control
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame rotation around the
sketch plane's normal is controlled along the sweep. There are three types of
Horizontal and Vertical control:
• Automatic – The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction.

Creo Parametric calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the
swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic is the default for an
Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference
collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation
at the start of the sweep. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the X-axis
direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or trajectories that have
a straight segment at the start. In Figure 1, the X direction referenced at
start is the right surface of the base feature. Consequently, the X-axis of
the frame faces this X direction reference at start along the entire sweep.

• Normal To Surface – The Y-axis of the section plane is normal to the
surface on which the Origin trajectory lies. This is the default option when
the Origin trajectory reference is a curve on a surface, one-sided edge
of a surface, two-sided edge of a surface or solid edge, a curve created
though an intersection of surfaces, or two projection curves. The Next
option enables you to move to the next normal surface. In Figure 2, the
Next option is toggled to display the different possible solutions. In the
upper-left image of Figure 2, the normal surface is the back surface, while
in the upper-right image the right surface is the normal surface.
• X-Trajectory – The X-axis of the section plane passes through the
intersection point of the specified X-trajectory and the section plane along
the sweep. In Figure 3, the Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as
X-Trajectory. The X-axis of the section plane passes through the specified
X-Trajectory, where the Chain 1 trajectory is the X-Trajectory, along the
entire sweep. Notice that the geometry twists according to the Chain
1 trajectory.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control
in Sweeps
Sweep\Horizontal-Vertical-Control_Solid HORIZ_VERT.PRT
Task 1: Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a variable section

sweep protrusion.

view the current settings.
4. Notice the two trajectories
selected.

orientation.

orientation.
Orientation.

8. In the References tab, right-click
the X direction reference at start
and select Remove.
9. Edit the Horizontal/Vertical

control to Normal To Surface.
10. Click Next four times to view the
possibilities.
11. In the References tab, select the

X check box for Chain 1.
13. Select START from the model

tree, press CTRL, and select
END.
14. Notice that the X-direction of the
Sketch follows the X-trajectory to
reorient the sketch.

Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing
Multiple Trajectories
You can create sweeps with variable sections using multiple
trajectories.
• Each additional trajectory creates

a reference point in Sketcher.
• Reference points move along the
trajectories.
• Different geometry effects
are possible depending on
Figure 1 – Section Dimensioned

to One Trajectory
Figure 2 – Section Dimensioned to Figure 3 – Section Dimensioned

Two Trajectories and Constrained Differently
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple

Trajectories
You can create sweeps using multiple trajectories. Each additional trajectory
defined creates a reference point in Sketcher for the section. The reference
points move along each of the trajectories as the sweep is created. If the
sketch is constrained or dimensioned to these trajectory reference points,
the section gets stretched or pulled by these trajectories to change its
shape. Depending on exactly how the section is constrained or dimensioned
to the reference points, different geometry effects are possible from the
same section and trajectory. In Figure 1, the section is constrained and
dimensioned only to one of the two trajectories and results in the geometry
shown. In Figure 2, the section is constrained and dimensioned to both

trajectories. The right line of the rectangle is dimensioned along the X-axis to
the additional trajectory reference. The resulting geometry is pulled only in
the X-axis by the additional trajectory. In Figure 3, the midpoint of the right
rectangle line is constrained to the additional trajectory reference. Hence the
resulting geometry is pulled in both the X and Y axes.

Utilizing Multiple Trajectories
Sweep\Multiple_Traj MULT_TRAJ.PRT
Task 1: Create variable section sweeps using multiple trajectories.

3. Notice that there are two trajectories selected.
4. Click Create Section then click Sketch View .

.
the right line to the additional
trajectory point. Type 5 as the

RIGHT view. Notice that the
additional trajectory does not pull
the Sketch to the right.
orientation and notice that the
additional trajectory does pull the
Sketch.

click Sketch View .
Graphics toolbar.
11. Press CTRL, select the right
side midpoint and the additional
trajectory point, then right-click
and select Coincident.
12. Click Delete in the Resolve
Sketch dialog box to delete the
5.00 dimension.

RIGHT view. Notice that the
additional trajectory pulls the
Sketch to the right.
orientation and notice that the
additional trajectory also pulls
the Sketch.

click Sketch View .
16. Click Refit Refit from the In
Graphics toolbar.
17. Select the top line's Horizontal
constraint and delete it.
18. Select the new weak dimension,
right-click and select Strong,
then press ENTER.

20. Notice that only the right side
is affected by the additional
trajectory.
22. Right-click Sweep 1 and select
Suppress.
• Click OK.

23. Right-click TRAJ_1 and select
Hide.
24. Press CTRL, select TRAJ_2 and
TRAJ_3, and then right-click and
select Unhide.
26. Start the Sweep and select
the middle curve as the Origin.
27. Press CTRL and select the left
and right curves.

click Sketch View .

sketch a rectangle using the
reference points as three of four
vertices.


Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using
Tangent Trajectories
You can specify trajectories to be tangent trajectories.
• Enable tangency for a trajectory:
– Select the T check box.
– Use the Tangency tab.
• Centerline appears in Sketcher
for each tangent trajectory.
• Available options:
– None
– Side 1/Side 2
Figure 1 – References and
– Selected Tangency Tabs
Figure 2 – Viewing Tangent Figure 3 – Resultant Tangent

Centerlines Geometry
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using Tangent

Trajectories
You can specify trajectories to be tangent trajectories, which is useful when
you want the surfaces of the variable section sweep to be tangent with
existing geometry. You can specify a trajectory to be tangent either by
selecting the T check box in the References tab, or by using the Tangency
tab as shown in Figure 1.
For each tangent trajectory specified, a centerline appears in Sketcher. This
centerline pivots as necessary on the trajectory to maintain the tangency.
Therefore, any geometry constrained to the centerline remains tangent as
well along the sweep. In Figure 2, there is a tangent centerline at each
tangent trajectory. The resulting completed geometry is shown in Figure 3.
You can specify a tangent trajectory to be tangent to a surface or to the
surfaces of solid geometry. If you specify a solid geometry edge as the
tangent trajectory, the system enables you to specify to which of the adjacent

surfaces the resulting geometry will be tangent. The following tangent options
are available in the dashboard's Tangency tab:
• None – Removes the tangency from the trajectory.

• Side 1 – Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on
side 1 of the trajectory. The resulting tangent surface is specified within
the Tangency tab.
• Side 2 – Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on
side 2 of the trajectory. The resulting tangent surface is specified within
the Tangency tab.
• Selected – Enables you to manually specify surfaces for the tangent
centerlines in the sweep section.
In the References tab, there are two different T check boxes for each tangent
trajectory. Toggling the selected check box switches the tangency from Side
1 to Side 2, and vice versa. De-selecting the T check box in the References
tab is the same as selecting None from the References drop-down list in
the Tangency tab.

using Tangent Trajectories
Sweep\Tangent-Trajectory_Solid TANGENT_TRAJ.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion with tangent

trajectories.

3. Notice the Origin trajectory and
two additional trajectories.
5. Start the Sweep .

6. Select the curve as the Origin.
upper-right and upper-left
surface edges.
You are selecting edges, not

curves, so that you can set
up tangency to the adjacent
surfaces.
8. Select the References tab.

• Select the left T check box for
both Chain 1 and Chain 2.

9. Select the Tangency tab and
select Chain 1.
• Notice that it is set to be
tangent to TOP_SURF.
• Edit the References drop-down
list to Default 2, which should
specify RIGHT_SURF as the
tangent surface.
• Select Chain 2 and ensure
that it is set to be tangent to
LEFT_SURF.

• Notice that the T check marks
have updated.
drop-down list to Constant
Normal Direction, close the
References tab, and select
datum plane FRONT.
11. Click Create Section .

12. Click Conic and sketch the
conic, tangent to both the left
and right edges.
RHO to 0.35.
14. Click OK .

Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections
Trajectory Options and Rules
A variable section sweep has several trajectory options and
rules.
• Trajectory options:
– Flip trajectory direction
– Trajectory handles:
♦ Dragging
♦ Extend To
♦ Trim At
• Rules:
– Tangency
– Trajectory requirements
Figure 1 – Trajectory Start
Point on Left
Figure 2 – Trajectory Start Figure 3 – Trajectory Both

Point on Right Trimmed and Extended
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options

The following trajectory options are available when creating a variable section
sweep:
• Flip trajectory direction – You can click the arrow on the trajectory to flip
the sweep to the opposite end. The section is sketched at the indicated
start point on the trajectory. In Figure 1, the start point is located on the left
end of the trajectory. Consequently, the section is sketched from the left
side. Conversely, in Figure 2, the start point is located on the right end of
the trajectory, resulting in the section being sketched from the right side.

• Trajectory handles – You can perform several operations on the trajectory
handles to cause different resultant geometry. The following three options
are available:
– Dragging – You can drag the trajectory end handles to shorten or
lengthen the trajectory. When you shorten the trajectory, the T value at
the end becomes a negative value; if you lengthen the trajectory, the T
value at the end becomes positive.
– Extend To – Extends the sweep along the current trajectory to a
selected reference. In Figure 3, the right endpoint of the trajectory has
been extended to datum plane OFFSET.
– Trim At – Trims the trajectory at a selected reference location. In Figure
3, the left endpoint of the trajectory has been trimmed at datum point
PNT0.
To “reset” the trajectory to the original curve length, you can simply
re-select the curve.
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Rules

The following are rules regarding tangency for variable section sweeps:
• When using the Variable section option, all entities within the trajectory
must be tangent.
• You can use the Constant section option for non-tangent trajectories.
• When using the Normal To Projection Section plane control, the projection
of entities on the reference must be tangent as viewed in the reference
direction.
The following are rules regarding trajectory requirements for variable section
sweeps:
• An X-Trajectory cannot intersect the origin trajectory, except at the

endpoints.
• All trajectories must intersect the moving frame of the sweep, at least for
the desired length of the sweep.
• When using trajectories of different lengths, the shortest trajectory sets the
length of the sweep.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections
Trajectory Options and Rules
Sweep\Options-Rules_Solid OPTIONS_RULES.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with the various trajectory options and rules for a
variable section sweep.

Display types: .
2. Start the Sweep .
3. Select the center curve as the
Origin.
4. Notice that the start point is on
the left.
5. Click the arrow to flip the start

point to the right.
7. Notice the crosshairs on the
right.
8. Click Center and Point and

sketch a circle with center at the
crosshairs.
diameter to 40.
10. Click OK .

arrow to flip the start point to the
left.
13. Notice that the Sketch and
crosshairs are now on the left.
14. Click OK .

orientation.
16. Drag the left handle to -15.
17. Right-click the left handle and

select Trim At.
18. Select datum point PNT0.
19. Right-click the right handle and

select Extend To.
20. Select datum plane OFFSET.
21. Re-select the center curve as the

Origin.
22. Notice that it returns to the
default length.
23. Press CTRL and select the upper
curve.
select the N check box for Chain
1.
25. Notice that the section is normal
to this Chain 1 trajectory.
26. Press CTRL and select the lower

curve as an additional trajectory.
27. Notice that the sweep is limited
to the shortest trajectory.

Using Trajpar with Solid Features
“Trajpar” stands for trajectory parameter.
• Value ranges from 0 to 1.

• Used in Sketcher relations.
• Make dimensions increase/
decrease along a length according
to a formula.
Figure 1 – Variable Section
Sweep, No Relations
Figure 2 – Using Trajpar to Figure 3 – Using Trajpar for

Vary Slope a Sine Wave
Using Trajpar with Solid Features

“Trajpar” stands for trajectory parameter. Its value ranges from 0 to 1 and can
be used with variable section sweeps, helical sweeps, and composite curves.
In the context of a sweep, trajpar is a percentage along the sweep. At the
start point of the sweep, its value is 0. At the midpoint of the sweep, its value
is 0.5, and at the end of the sweep its value is 1. You can reference the
trajpar variable in section relations for a variable section sweep to control
section dimensions along the sweep length. For example, you can make
dimensions increase or decrease along the length according to a formula.
Dimensions can even be driven to zero.
Figure 1 displays a “standard” variable section sweep feature that contains
no relations. The section is constant along the entire sweep length.
Figure 2 displays a variable section sweep feature that contains a Sketcher
relation for slope using trajpar in the following equation:
• sd3 = trajpar * 20 + 10, where sd3 is the section's width
Because trajpar varies from 0 to 1, the section's width varies from 0 to 20,
plus 10 (therefore, varies from 10 to 30) along the sweep length.
Figure 3 displays a variable section sweep feature that contains a Sketcher
relation for a sine wave using trajpar in the following equation:
• sd3 = 20 + (5 * sin(trajpar * 360 * 4)), where sd3 is the section's width.
Because trajpar varies from 0 to 1, the sine wave starts at 0 and has a
magnitude of 5 with four cycles, plus 20.

PROCEDURE - Using Trajpar with Solid Features
Sweep\Using_Trajpar TRAJPAR.PRT
Task 1: Use trajpar to vary the section of a variable section sweep

protrusion.

2. Notice the sweep section does
not vary.
3. There are currently no relations
in this model.

6. Select the Tools tab, then click
Relations from the Model
Intent group.
• Notice that dimensions display
in an sd# syntax.
• Identify the length dimension
number as sd3.
• Type /* Relation for Slope
and press ENTER.
• Type sd3=trajpar*20+10.
The length dimension
varies from 0–20, plus 10
(therefore, 10–30).
7. Click OK in the Relations dialog

box, then select the Sketch tab
and click OK .
8. Click Variable Section if

necessary, then click Complete
Feature .
Orientation.

Task 2: Use trajpar to make a sine wave section for a variable section
sweep protrusion.
1. Click the Model Intent

Relations .
2. In the Relations dialog box, edit
the Look In drop-down menu
from Part to Section.
• Select the sweep feature.
• Comment out the previous
relation by preceding the
equation with /*.
• Create a new line and type /*
Relation for Sine wave and
press ENTER.
• Type sd3=20+(5*sin(trajpar*
360*4)).

box and click Regenerate .

Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid
Features
The EVALGRAPH function returns the Y-value of the datum
graph, given the graph name and an x-value.
• EVALGRAPH returns Y-value.

• Trajpar provides the X-value.
• Syntax example:
– sd# = EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1",
trajpar*360)/10
Figure 1 – Sketched Section

Swept Along Trajectory
Figure 2 – Before and After using

Trajpar with EVALGRAPH Figure 3 – Datum Graph
Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid Features

In addition to the trajpar variable, you can also use the EVALGRAPH function
in a relation. The EVALGRAPH function returns the Y-value of the datum
graph, given the graph name and an X-value. You can combine usage of the
EVALGRAPH function with the trajpar percentage variable to effectively move
along the X-axis of the graph, and return the associated Y values. In Figure
1, a section is swept along a circular trajectory to produce the result in the
left image of Figure 2. The section height location is then governed by a
relation that uses trajpar and the graph in Figure 3 to produce the result in
the right image of Figure 2.
The following syntax should be used in a relation when you want to use the
EVALGRAPH function:
• sd# = EVALGRAPH ("graphname", trajpar*width_of_graph)*vert_scale
where the variables are defined as follows:
• sd# – The Sketcher dimension you wish to vary based on the graph.
• “graphname” – The name of the graph feature as it displays in the model
tree.

• width_of_graph – The total X-distance in the graph feature. In Figure 3, the
width of the graph is 360, as the feature is being swept 360 degrees.
• vert_scale – An additional scaling factor that can be applied to increase the
Y-value of the graph feature.
The following are examples of relations created using trajpar with
EVALGRAPH:
• sd# = EVALGRAPH ("GRAPH1", trajpar * 100) / 2
In this example, the graph feature in the model tree is GRAPH1, the width
of the graph is 100 degrees, and the scaling factor for the Y-axis of the
graph is such that it halves the resultant value.
• sd# = EVALGRAPH ("GRAPH1", trajpar *360) / 10
In this example, the graph feature in the model tree is GRAPH1, the width
of the graph is 360 degrees, and the scaling factor for the Y-axis of the
graph is such that it divides the resultant value by 10.

PROCEDURE - Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with
Solid Features
Sweep\Using_Trajpar_Graphs TRAJPAR_GRAPH.PRT
Task 1: Use datum graphs and trajpar to modify the geometry of a variable
section sweep cut.

2. Edit the definition of GRAPH1
and click Done from the menu
manager.
3. Press ENTER to accept the
name for the feature.
4. Observe the sketch.
5. Click OK .

7. Notice the section is swept along
a single trajectory.
9. Notice that the section is
controlled by three dimensions
only.
10. Select the 4 dimension, then right-click and select Modify.

11. In the Modify Dimensions dialog box, drag the Sensitivity handle all
the way to the right.
• Drag the dimension from approximately 4 to 12.
• This range is what the trajpar relation will be doing.
• Click Quit Modification .

12. Select the Tools tab then click
Relations from the Model
Intent group.
• Notice that the height
dimension number is sd7.
• Type /* Adjust the height
dimension for the section
based on GRAPH1 and press
ENTER.
• Type sd7 = EVALGRAPH (
"GRAPH1" , trajpar * 360 ) /
10.

box and notice that the Sketch
updates.
14. Also notice the message in the
message window.
15. Select the Sketch tab, then click

OK .
16. Click Variable Section if

necessary, then click Complete
Feature .
orientation.
18. Notice that the relation has
driven surfaces to zero.
19. Edit the definition of GRAPH1

and click Done from the menu
manager.
20. Press ENTER to accept the
name for the feature.
21. Modify the vertical dimensions to
40 and 120 as shown.
22. Click OK .

updated.

Module 11
Helical Sweeps
Module Overview
The helical sweep feature enables you to create geometry by sweeping a
section along a helix, which is based on a pitch value. These sweeps are
commonly used to create solid springs or threads. However, they can also be
used to create helical swept surfaces, which may be used as construction or
reference geometry for other surfaces, or be used in the creation of datum
curves.
Objectives
• Understand the theory behind helical sweeps.
• Create helical sweeps for springs.
• Create helical sweeps for threads.
• Analyze the profile and pitch variations available for helical sweeps.
• Utilize variable sections in helical sweeps.

Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory
Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other
helical geometry.
• Can be protrusions, cuts, or

surfaces.
• Helical sweep components:
– Sketch profile
– Sketch section
– Pitch values
• Helical sweep options:
– Pitch points
– Section orientation
– Variable section Figure 1 – Threads Cut Into
– Helix direction a Part Model
Figure 3 – Helical Surface

Figure 2 – Spring Geometry
Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory

Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other helical
geometry. The dashboard interface enables helical sweeps to be created by
adding or removing material, or as surfaces. In Figure 1, the threads were
created by removing material, in Figure 2, the spring was created by adding
material, and in Figure 3, the helical geometry was created with surfaces.
Components of a Helical Sweep

The helical sweep feature uses each of the following components to generate
a helical shape:
• Sketch profile – Defines the shape and diameter of the helix. For example,
the sketched profile for a typical spring is a straight line parallel to the
center axis.
• Sketch section – Defines the shape to be swept along the helix. For
example, the section for a typical spring is a circular section.

• Pitch values – The distance between the spring coils. The pitch value can
also be defined by a relation, for example, the profile length divided by
the number of coils.
Helical Sweep Options

The following options are available in the dashboard when defining a helical
sweep feature:
• Pitch points – Adding a single pitch value causes the pitch to remain
constant along the entire sweep profile, whereas adding multiple pitch
values enables you to define a graph that specifies the pitch values at
specific points.
• Section orientation – Defines how

the cross-section is oriented as
it sweeps along the trajectory.
For Normal to trajectory, the
cross-section is oriented normal
to the trajectory, as shown in
the upper image of Figure 4.
For Through axis of revolution,
the cross-section lies in a plane
that passes through the axis of
revolution, as shown in the lower
image of Figure 4.
Figure 4 - Cross-section Angle
• Variable section – Defines the behavior of the cross-section as it travels

along the trajectory of the sweep. Vary section enables the cross-section
to change size and shape, based on its position along the sweep
trajectory.
• Helix direction – Defines which direction the trajectory is wrapped about

the helix. For Use Right Handed, the trajectory is defined using the
right-hand rule, and for Use Left Handed the trajectory is defined using
the left-hand rule.
Using Trajpar with a Helical Sweep

Helical Sweeps, like variable section sweeps, can utilize the trajpar
parameter. Trajpar can reference a datum graph using the EVALGRAPH
function if desired. Trajpar can also be used in section relations to control
dimensions as the section is swept along the helix. For example, trajpar
enables you to vary the spring section size along the swept helix length, or it
enables you to taper the end of a worm gear helix to blend into the shaft.

Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs
You can create springs using helical sweep features.
• Spring characteristics:
– Typically normal to the
trajectory.
– Typically a round or rectangular
section.
• Tips:
– Create hooked ends or
extensions using an additional
sweep.
– Use a relation to control pitch
based on length.
Figure 1 – Spring Profile
Figure 3 – Completed Right and

Figure 2 – Spring Section Left Hand Springs
Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs

You can create springs using helical sweep features. Typically, the helical
sweep feature maintains the following characteristics for solid spring models:
• The section is usually normal to the trajectory.
• The sketched section is usually round or rectangular in shape.
Figure 3 depicts two completed springs, one right-handed, the other
left-handed. Consider these tips for further enhancing the spring:
• You can create an additional sweep feature from the ends of the spring to
create hooked ends or extensions.
• You can write a relation to control the spring's pitch based on its length,
while maintaining an equal number of coils. This enables both natural,
as well as stretched or compressed, versions of the spring by simply
modifying its length.

PROCEDURE - Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs
Sweep\Helical_Springs NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Create a spring.
1. Click New , select Part, edit the Name to SPRING, and click OK.
2. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .
3. From the Shapes group, select Helical Sweep from the Sweep
5. Click Define to create the Helix sweep profile.
6. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree, as the Sketch plane.
• Click Sketch.
• Disable Plane Display .
8. Click Sketch View from the Setup group in the ribbon.

a centerline on the vertical
reference.
• Click One-by-One .
Designate Axis of
Revolution.
a vertical line to the left of
the centerline, starting on the
horizontal reference.
11. Edit the revolved diameter to 4.
• Notice that the system
created the revolved diameter
automatically.
12. Edit the height to 10.
13. Click OK .

14. Click Create Section from
the dashboard.
15. Click Center and Point from
the Sketching group and sketch
a circle as shown.
diameter to 1.
17. Click OK .
18. Select the Pitch tab.
19. Edit the Pitch value from 1.00 to
2.00.
20. Click Left Handed from the

dashboard.
21. Click OK .
Task 2: Create a relation to control the spring pitch.
1. Right-click Helical Sweep 1 and

select Edit.
2. Right-click again and enable
Display Sketch Dimensions.

3. In the ribbon, select the Tools
tab.
4. Click Relations from the
Model Intent group.
5. Select pitch dimension d2.
=.
7. Select length dimension d1.
8. Type /6, where 6 is the desired
number of coils.
9. The final equation should read
d2=d1/6.
10. Click OK from the Relations
dialog box and press CTRL+G.
11. Right-click Helical Sweep 1 and

select Edit.
12. Right-click again and enable
Display Sketch Dimensions.
13. Select the upper endpoint of the
profile and drag to approximately
12.00, then to approximately
8.00.
14. Click in the background of the
graphics window to regenerate
the model.
15. Notice the new compressed
spring shape, with the same
number of coils.

Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads
You can create threads using helical sweep features.
• Create protrusions or cuts.

– Protrusions add material to the
model.
– Cuts remove material the from
model.
• Usually use the Through axis of
revolution option.
Figure 1 – Completed Threads
Figure 2 – Viewing the Sketched Figure 3 – Viewing the Sketched

Profile Section
Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads

You can create threads using helical sweep features. You can create threads
as both protrusions and cuts. Protrusions are created for adding material to
the model, while cuts are created to remove material from the model. You
typically use the Through axis of revolution option when using helical sweeps
to create threads.
Best Practices
Typically, you do not create threads for fasteners, threaded holes, and so on,
because the threads would be for purely cosmetic purposes. You typically
create helical sweeps for major helical model geometry that needs to be
visualized, or in cases where clearances are close and must be measured or
where tolerances are of importance.

PROCEDURE - Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads
Sweep\Helical_Threads THREADS.PRT
Task 1: Create a helical sweep cut.

2. Select Helical Sweep from the Sweep types drop-down list in
the Shapes group.
3. Click Left Handed and Remove Material from the dashboard.

• Select Through axis of revolution, if necessary.
• Click Define to define the Helix sweep profile.
5. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree as the Sketch plane.
• Click Sketch.

.

8. Click References .
• Select the left and right edges,
and the top silhouette edge.
• Click Close.
a centerline on the center
horizontal reference.
Designate Axis of
Revolution.

a horizontal line from left to right,
on top of the horizontal silhouette
edge reference, overhanging at
both ends.
each overhanging end to the
closest vertical edge, editing
each dimension to 3.
12. Click OK .
13. Edit the Pitch value to 20.

14. Right-click in the graphics
window and select Axis of
Revolution and select axis A_1.
15. Click Create Section .
16. Click Sketch View .

17. Click Palette and drag the
thread sketch into the graphics
window, then click Close from
the dialog box.
• Drag the rotation handle to
rotate the sketch 180 degrees.
• Right-click the location handle
and drag it to the midpoint of
the left, vertical line.
• Locate the sketch at the
intersection of the bottom
horizontal and left vertical
references.
• Edit the Scale to 1 and click
Accept Changes .
18. Click OK .

Orientation.

Task 2: Copy the helical sweep to make two sets of threads.
1. Select Helical Sweep 1 in the

model tree, click Copy and
then click Paste Special
from the Paste types drop-down
list.
2. In the Paste Special dialog box,
select the Apply Move/Rotate
transformations to copies
check box, and click OK.
3. In the dashboard, click Rotate
.
• Select the axis running through
the part.
• Edit the rotation angle to 180.

Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch
Variations
You can control pitch values along the length of the profile and
you can control the profile shape.
• Controlling pitch values along

length:
– Added via Pitch tab in
dashboard
♦ First added value is the
endpoint pitch.
♦ Additional points are added
along length.
– Locate pitch value drag
handles using:
Figure 1 – Constant Profile, Constant
♦ By value
and Variable Pitch
♦ By Ratio
♦ By Reference
• Controlling profile shape:
– Profile must be tangent to use
Normal to trajectory option.
– Example shapes:
♦ Straight line = Cylinder
♦ Angled line = Cone
Figure 2 – Variable Profile, Constant

and Variable Pitch
Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch Variations

You can control pitch values along the length of the profile and you can
control the profile shape. Both of these options are valuable when you want
to create a nontraditional spring.
Controlling Pitch Values Along the Profile Length

You control the pitch along the profile by adding pitch points at the locations
you want the pitch to be different. The first value added is the endpoint
pitch. If no others are specified, then the pitch is constant as shown in the
left image of Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Additional pitch points are added along the sweep axis either through the
Pitch tab in the dashboard, or by right-clicking and selecting Add Pitch Point.
When a point is added, a drag handle is available for it. The location of each
point can be defined by the following options:
• By value – Distance along sweep axis measured from the start point.

• By reference – Point can snap to a datum point, datum plane, geometry
reference, and so on.
• By ratio – Measured as a length ratio along sweep axis.
As you specify the pitch at the various points, the system displays them on the
sweep axis so that you can view the pitch specified at each point. In the right
image of Figure 1 and Figure 2, the pitch begins at a value of 1, increases to
4, and then decreases back to 1. This is in contrast to the left image of Figure
1 and Figure 2, where the pitch is a constant value of 1 along the entire profile.
Controlling Profile Shape

You can control the profile shape based on how you sketch it. The following
are examples of the resulting spring shape for a given sketched section:
• Straight line – Creates a cylindrical shaped spring, as shown in Figure 1.
• Angled line – Creates a cone-shaped spring.
• Multiple lines/arcs – Enables you to create a custom profile. For example,
in Figure 2 the profile was created with three vertical lines and two diagonal
lines connecting them. The resulting spring bows out in the center. You
can even use splines and conics.
To use the Normal to trajectory option, the profile entities must be tangent to
each other.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and
Pitch Variations
Sweep\Helical_Profile-Pitch_Solid
PROFILE-PITCH_SOLID.PRT
Task 1: Edit the shape of a spring by modifying its profile and pitch.

Display types: .
2. In the model tree, expand Helical
Sweep 1.
3. Select Sketch 1, then right-click
and select Edit.
• Notice the profile sketch
consists of multiple line
segments.
• Notice the vertical centerline
and datum points on the
sweep axis (the centerline).
4. Drag or edit the center dimension

to 6.
• Click in the background to
regenerate the model.
• Notice the changed profile of
the spring.
5. Click Undo from the Quick

Access toolbar.

6. Select Helical Sweep 1 in the model tree, then right-click and select
Edit Definition.
7. Select the Pitch tab.
• Edit the existing pitch point to 1.00 and press ENTER.
• Click Add Pitch to create a pitch value at the end point, edit it to 1
and press ENTER.
• Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the first datum
point from the bottom.
• Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the second
datum point from the bottom.
• Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the third datum
• Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the fourth datum
8. Edit the pitch values as shown.

Press ENTER after typing each
value.
10. Select Sketch 1, right-click,

select Edit and edit the center
dimension to 6.
• Click in the background to
regenerate the model.
11. Select the Sketch 1 feature in
the model tree, then right-click
and select Hide.

Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps
You can define a section for a helical sweep to be variable along
the length of the sweep.
• Along Trajectory options include:

– Keep constant section
– Vary section
• Constrain the section to other
geometry with Vary section.
Figure 1 – Viewing the Original

Constant Section Helical Sweep
Figure 3 – Viewing the Variable

Figure 2 – Redefining the Section Section Helical Sweep
Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps

You can define a section for a helical sweep to be variable along the length of
the sweep. This is accomplished by selecting the desired Along Trajectory
option in the dashboard. Along trajectory can be set to either of the following:
• Keep constant section
• Vary section
By setting the Vary section option, you are able to constrain the section to
other geometry, as long as the system can regenerate the section along
the entire helical path. For example, a surface that followed the range of
the helical sweep can be utilized as a reference, whereas a datum plane
referenced in the sketch plane is not valid.

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical
Sweeps
Sweep\Helical_Variable-Section_Solid
HELICAL_VAR-SOLID.PRT
Task 1: Redefine a helical sweep to use the Vary section option.

2. Notice the constant section in
the helical sweep feature.

Extrude 1 and select Unhide.
• Edit the definition of Extrude 1
and notice it is a surface.

Helical Sweep 1 and select Edit
Definition.
select FRONT from the Named
Views drop-down list.
6. Notice the current sweep profile
raises the center of the circular
section.
7. In the dashboard, click Create

Section .
8. Click Tangent from the
Constrain group in the ribbon,
and constrain the circle to be
tangent to the cylindrical surface.
• Click Delete from the Resolve
Sketch dialog box to delete the
dimension.
9. Click OK .

Options tab.
• Select Vary section.
Extrude 1 and select Hide.
13. Notice that the current sweep
profile still raises the center of the
circular section, but the section
is constrained to the cylinder,
resulting in a smaller diameter.

Module 12
Swept Blends
Module Overview
The swept blend feature utilizes multiple sections placed along a main
trajectory. The system creates geometry by blending between the sections
while sweeping along the trajectory path. The sections can vary in shape and
size along the swept blend. An additional trajectory can also be used to orient
the sections along the main trajectory.
In this module, you learn how to use the swept blend to create solid geometry.
You also learn about the many options provided to control the orientation
and tangency of the sections.
Objectives
• Understand the theory behind swept blends.
• Create swept blends by selecting sections.
• Create swept blends by sketching sections.
• Analyze the section options for a swept blend.
• Analyze swept blend section plane control.
• Analyze horizontal and vertical control in a swept blend.
• Analyze swept blend tangency.
• Analyze swept blend options.
• Analyze swept blend rules.

Understanding Swept Blend Theory
A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend
multiple sections along a main trajectory.
• Create a solid or surface feature.

• Add or remove material.
• Main components:
– Trajectories
♦ Use one or two
– Sections
♦ Two sections minimum
♦ Each must have same
number of entities
♦ Select or sketch sections Figure 1 – Swept Blend Feature
Figure 2 – Trajectories Highlighted Figure 3 – Sections Highlighted

in Green in Green
Understanding Swept Blend Theory

A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend multiple
sections along a main trajectory. With the Swept Blend feature, you can
create a solid or surface feature. You can add or remove material, and the
sections can be open or closed.
Trajectory Information
A swept blend can have two trajectories: an Origin trajectory (required) and
a Secondary trajectory (optional). The swept blend in the figures uses both
an Origin trajectory and a Secondary trajectory. To define a trajectory of the
swept blend, you can select a sketched curve, a chain of datum curves, or
edges. Each selected trajectory has end handles that you can dynamically
drag if you want the feature to not follow the entire trajectory. You can specify
a length from the end of the trajectory, or you can use the Trim At and Extend
To options. Plus, you can use SHIFT to snap the trajectory endpoint onto
other existing geometry.
Section Information
Each Swept Blend feature must have at least two sections, and additional
sections may be added between these two sections. While the sections may
change shape, they must each contain the same number of entities. The one
exception to this rule is that you can blend sections to a point. You can also

add blend vertices to sections that need additional entities to equal those of
other sections. Each blend vertex counts as one entity.
You can sketch the sections to be blended at specified segment vertices
or datum points on the Origin Trajectory. To orient a section, you specify
the direction of the sketch plane (the Z-axis) and the horizontal and vertical
direction to that plane (the X or Y axis).
You can use the Selected Sections option to select existing sketches, or edge
and curve references and use them as sections for a swept blend.

Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections
You can select existing sketches to become sections for a swept
blend feature.
• Insert
– Enables you to select the next
section
– Section inserted after currently
selected section
– # entities in section displayed
• Remove
– Removes currently selected
section
• Details
– Enables advanced selection Figure 1 – Selecting Sections
Figure 2 – Inserting a Section Figure 3 – Start Point Moved
Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections

After selecting an Origin trajectory, you can select existing sketches or edge
and curve references to become sections for the swept blend protrusion or
cut.
Options for selecting sections include:
• Insert – Used to insert the next section after the currently selected section.
If two sections are already selected, you can insert a new section between
these existing sections by selecting the first section and clicking Insert. In
Figure 1, two sections are selected, one at the trajectory start and another
at the trajectory end. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, a new section was inserted.
Selected sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard. The
system lists the number of entities in the reference sketch next to each
section. If the sections contain an unequal number of sides, you can use
the divide tool to maintain an equal number of entities. For example, you
can blend a triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three
arcs. In the figures, a circle is blended into a rectangle.
• Remove – Removes the currently selected section.
• Details – Opens the Chain dialog box for advanced selection tools for
selecting series of chains for sections.

Manipulating Selected Sections
The start point is displayed on the selected section. The system lines up the
start points from each section. A twisting effect occurs if the start points for
each of the sections are not in same relative position, as shown in Figure 2.
You can select and drag the start points to a different vertex to remove or
change the twisting effect, as shown in Figure 3.

PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blends by Selecting
Sections
Swept_Blend\Select_Sections SELECT_SECTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Create a swept blend protrusion by selecting sections.

2. In the model tree, select SEC_1.
3. Notice that the feature is a
rectangle.
4. Edit the definition of SEC_2.

.
6. Notice that this section is a circle
divided into four entities.
7. Click OK .
8. Edit the definition of SEC_3.

9. Notice that this section consists
of four arcs.
10. Click OK .
12. Click Swept Blend from the

Shapes group in the ribbon.
13. Click Solid from the
dashboard, if necessary.
14. Select the trajectory.

Sections tab.
• Select the Selected Sections
option.
16. Select the right circle as Section
1.

17. In the Sections tab, click Insert
and select the rectangle as
Section 2.

the Section 1 tag, right-click,
and select Insert Section.
19. Notice that a new section is
inserted, making Section 2 now
Section 3.
20. Select the left circle as Section 2.
21. Notice the twisting effect in the
geometry.
22. Drag the start point up to the

next entity endpoint to remove
the twisting effect.

SEC_1 and select Edit.
25. Edit the angle from 0 to 20 and
click Regenerate in the
Operations group in the ribbon.
26. Spin the model, and notice that
the sections do not have to be all
the same angle.

Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections
You can create all the sections within the swept blend feature
if desired.
• Select trajectory
– You can flip the trajectory
direction.
• Select section location
– Default locations
– Optional locations
• Sketch the section
– Start point
• Manage Sketched Sections Figure 1 – Sketching Sections
– # entities in section
displayed
– Insert
– Remove
Figure 2 – Changed Section Location
Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections

You can create all the sections within the swept blend feature if desired.
Use the following procedure to create swept blend protrusions or cuts by
sketching the sections.
Selecting the Trajectory

First, you must select the Origin trajectory. The direction of the sweep along
the trajectory is displayed with an arrow. You can flip the direction of the
arrow, which reverses the direction of the swept blend.
Selecting the Section Location

Next, you can select where to place a section along the trajectory. The
default locations are the trajectory start and trajectory end, both denoted
by a green “X” symbol, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. Optionally, you
can also select vertices or datum points as the location to place a section.
In Figure 1, Section 2 is placed at the vertex of the arc and line. When
you select the location of the section, it is specified in the Section Location
collector. To relocate a section after sketching it with this option, select the
section, activate the Section Location collector, and select a different chain

end, vertex, or datum point as the section location. In Figure 2, the section
location for Section 2 has been relocated to the right trajectory endpoint.
You cannot locate a section at a sharp corner of a trajectory,
because the system is not able to determine the orientation of the
section at that point.
Sketching the Sections

Once the location for a section is specified, you can sketch that section.
When sketching the section in Sketcher, a start point appears on the first
entity sketched. The system lines up the start points from each section when
they are swept along the trajectory. A twisting effect occurs if the start points
are not in the same relative position. You can change the location of the
start point within Sketcher by selecting the desired vertex, right-clicking, and
selecting Start Point. Unlike selecting sections for creating swept blends, you
cannot move the start point except within Sketcher.
Managing Sketched Sections

The sketched sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard.
The system lists the number of entities in the reference sketch next to each
section. If the sections contain an unequal number of sides, you can use the
divide tool to maintain an equal number of entities. For example, you can
blend a triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three arcs.
Within the Section tab of the dashboard, the following two options are
available for managing sketched sections:
• Insert – Used to insert the next section, after the currently selected section.
If two sections are already selected, you can insert a new section between
these existing sections by selecting the first section and clicking Insert.
• Remove – Removes the currently selected section.

PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blends by Sketching
Sections
Swept_Blend\Sketch_Sections SKETCH_SECTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Create a swept blend protrusion by sketching a section.
2. Click Swept Blend from the Shapes group in the ribbon.

3. Click Solid from the dashboard, if necessary.
4. Select the curve as the trajectory.

Sections tab.
6. Notice that the ends are available
points for sketching sections.
7. Select the left endpoint and click
Sketch.

.
starting in the upper-left corner,
sketch a symmetrical rectangle.
width and height to 150 and 100,
respectively.
11. Click OK .
12. In the Sections tab, click Insert.

13. Select the vertex between the
line and arc and click Sketch.

15. Click Center and Point from
the Circle types drop-down list
and sketch a 100 diameter circle.
Sketching group and sketch two
centerlines at angles of 45.
17. Click Divide from the Editing
group and divide the circle
at each of the four centerline
intersections.
18. Select the upper-left corner, then
right-click and select Start Point.

20. Select the far right trajectory
endpoint, and notice that the
section relocates.
21. In the Sections tab, select

Section 1 and click Insert.
22. Select datum point PNT0 from
the model tree and click Sketch.

24. Click Corner Rectangle and,
starting in the upper-left corner,
sketch a symmetrical rectangle.
both the width and height to 75.
26. Click OK .

Orientation.
28. Right-click and select Trajectory.
29. Click the trajectory direction
arrow to flip the blend.
30. Notice that the sections maintain
the same reference numbers.

32. Select datum point PNT0 in the
model tree, then right-click and
select Edit.
33. Edit the point ratio value from 0.5
to 0.7 and click Regenerate .

Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options
There are numerous section options available when creating
a swept blend feature.
• Z-Rotation
– Each section independent
– Range: +/-120 degrees
• Section X-axis directions
– Sets X-axis direction for active
section
– Only available with Automatic
Horizontal/Vertical control
• Blend vertices
– Sketched sections:
♦ Managed in section Figure 1 – Blend Vertices
– Selected sections:
♦ Managed using Sections tab
and drag handles
Figure 2 – Modified Section

X-Axis Directions Figure 3 – Z-Rotation Modified
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options

Consider the following section options that are available when creating a
swept blend protrusion or cut.
Adding Blend Vertices

For a sketched section, blend vertices are created and managed in the
section itself, within Sketcher. That is, you add blend vertices within Sketcher
while sketching the section.
For selected sections, blend vertices are added using the Add Blend Vertex
option in the Sections tab of the dashboard. Each blend vertex displays in the
graphics window as a drag handle. You can move the blend vertex locations
by dragging their handles. In Figure 1, two blend vertices were added to the
rear section and dragged to the top corners.
You cannot add a blend vertex at the start point of a section.
You can add blend vertices only to start and end sections that are
located at trajectory vertices. You cannot add blend vertices to
intermediate sections.

Modifying the Section X-Axis Directions
The Section X-axis directions option enables you to set the X-axis direction
for the active section. When Horizontal/Vertical control in the References tab
is specified as Automatic, the Section X-axis directions in the Sections tab
is synchronized with the X direction reference at the start in the References
tab. This option is available only when Automatic is specified as the
Horizontal/Vertical control. In Figure 2, the X-axis direction was modified from
one datum plane to another datum plane. Notice how the section reoriented.
Modifying the Z-Rotation

You can specify the section’s rotation angle about the Z-axis for each location
at which a sketched section is defined. Rotation angles can range in value
between –120 and +120 degrees. In Figure 3, the Z-rotation was modified for
each section individually to create different geometry.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options
Swept_Blend\Section_Options OPTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Edit the swept blend Z rotation and section X-axis direction.

2. Edit the definition of Swept
Blend 1.
3. Select the Sections tab and
select Section 2.
• Edit the Rotation angle to 20.
4. Select Section 3 and click

Sketch.
.

7. Notice the default X-direction in
the Sketch view.
8. Press CTRL, select both
construction lines, right-click,
and select Geometry.
9. Click Delete Segment and

delete all of the top, right, and
bottom line segments.
10. Click One-by-One , then
select the right triangle point and
right-click Blend Vertex.
11. Notice that the triangle faces in
the X-direction.

13. In the Sections tab, click in
the Section X-axis directions
collector and select datum plane
DTM1 from the model tree.
14. Notice the change in geometry
orientation.
Task 2: Create a swept blend protrusion and add blend vertices to a

section.
1. Click Swept Blend from the

shapes tab in the ribbon.
2. Click Solid from the
dashboard, if necessary.
3. Select TRAJ_2 as the trajectory.

Sections tab.
• Select the Selected Sections
option.
5. Select the rectangle as Section
1.
6. In the Sections tab, click Insert

and select the front sketch as
Section 2.
• Notice that the # column in
the Sections tab has 4 and 6
entities, respectively.

7. Select Section 1 and drag the
start point to the lower-left.
8. Click Add Blend Vertex and
drag it to the upper-right corner.
9. Click Add Blend Vertex again
and drag it to the upper-left
corner, if necessary.
10. Notice that the # column in the
Sections tab now has 6 and 6
entities.

Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control
You can modify the swept blend's moving section frame
orientation to create different geometry.
• Section plane control options:
– Normal To Trajectory
♦ Normal to Origin trajectory
by default
– Constant Normal Direction
♦ Section Z-axis parallel to
specified reference direction
– Normal To Projection
♦ Origin trajectory projected
onto specified reference
Figure 1 – Section Normal
to Trajectory
Figure 2 – Section Constant Figure 3 – Section Normal

Normal Direction to Projection
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control

Each sketched or selected section is placed on a moving section frame. You
can adjust the orientation of this moving section frame using section plane
control settings in the References tab of the dashboard.
The following three section plane control options are available:
• Normal To Trajectory – The moving section frame is always normal to a
specified trajectory. By default, the section frame is normal to the Origin
trajectory. If you have specified a Secondary trajectory, you can make the
section frame normal to it by selecting the N check box in the References
tab for the Secondary trajectory. In Figure 1, the section frame has been
specified normal to the Secondary trajectory. Notice that the section is
perpendicular to this Secondary trajectory.
• Constant Normal Direction – The Z-axis (or section normal) of the moving
frame is parallel to a specified direction. In the case of a datum plane, the
Z-axis is parallel to the plane normal direction, so the section becomes
parallel to the plane. The Direction reference collector enables you to add
or delete the reference to which the Z-axis is parallel. In Figure 2, the

section plane control has been set to Constant Normal Direction, with the
direction reference set to a datum plane. Notice that the section is parallel
to the datum plane.
• Normal To Projection – The section frame remains normal to the Origin
trajectory as it is viewed along the projection direction. The Z-axis is
tangent to the projection of the Origin trajectory at the direction specified.
In Figure 3, the section plane control has been set to Normal To Projection.
The Origin trajectory is projected onto Direction reference TOP. The
resulting section frame is normal to this projected Origin trajectory.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane
Control
Swept_Blend\Section_Plane SECTION_PLANE.PRT
Task 1: Analyze the section plane control options available for a swept
blend protrusion.

2. Select TRAJ_1.
orientation.
4. Notice that the trajectory is
curved in this view, also.
Orientation.

Blend 1.
References tab.
• Notice that the Section plane
control is Normal To Trajectory.
additional trajectory.

orientation.
9. In the References tab, select the
N check box for the Secondary
trajectory.
to the Secondary trajectory.
11. In the References tab, select

the N check box for the Origin
trajectory.
• Right-click Secondary and
select Remove.
12. Reorient the model and notice
that the section is normal to the
Origin trajectory.

13. Edit the Section plane control
from Normal To Trajectory to
Constant Normal Direction.
15. Select datum plane DTM1, orient
to the TOP view orientation, and
notice that the section is parallel
to the datum plane.
Orientation.
17. Edit the Section plane control

from Constant Normal Direction
to Normal To Projection.
• Select the References tab to
close it and select datum plane
TOP from the model tree.
• Select the References tab
and click Flip.
orientation.
to datum plane TOP.

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a
Swept Blend
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame
rotation around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along
the swept blend feature.
• Automatic
– Section plane automatically
oriented in XY direction
• Normal To Surface
– Y-axis “points” normal to
selected surface
• X-Trajectory
– Only available with two
trajectories
– X-axis of section plane “points”
to Secondary trajectory
Figure 1 – Automatic Control
Figure 2 – Normal to Surface Control Figure 3 – X-Trajectory Control
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame rotation
around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the swept blend
protrusion or cut. There are three types of Horizontal and Vertical control:
• Automatic – The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction.
Creo Parametric calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the
swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic is the default for an
Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference
collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation
at the start of the swept blend. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the
X-axis direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or trajectories that
have a straight segment at the start.
When the Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as Automatic, you can
specify the X-Direction reference at start. The X-Direction reference at start

sets the initial X-orientation of the section frame. The X-orientation is the
positive X direction in the sketch view for the section. You can either specify
this reference or leave it at Default, meaning that the system specifies a
default orientation. In Figure 1, the Horizontal/Vertical control is set to
Automatic. In turn, the X-Direction reference at the start is a datum plane.
• Normal To Surface – The Y-axis of the section frame points in the direction
of the surface selected, normal to any surface associated with the Origin
trajectory. This is the default selection when the Origin trajectory has
at least one associated surface. Click Next to toggle through possible
surfaces, as shown in Figure 2.
• X-Trajectory – This option becomes available when there is both an Origin
and Secondary trajectory specified. The X-trajectory is the Secondary
trajectory, and it must be at least as long as the Origin trajectory. For this
option, the X-axis of the section plane passes through the intersection
point of the specified X-trajectory and the section plane along the sweep,

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control
in a Swept Blend
Swept_Blend\Horiz_Vert HORIZ-VERT.PRT
Task 1: Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a swept blend.

Display types: .
2. View the geometry:
• Orient to the TOP view
orientation.
• Orient to the RIGHT view
orientation.

Blend 1.
References tab and view the
current settings.
6. Notice that the current
Horizontal/Vertical control is
specified as Normal To Surface
in the drop-down list.
• Click Next four times to view
the different possibilities.
7. Select Automatic from the

Horizontal/Vertical control
drop-down list.
8. Notice that the sections have
been reoriented.
9. Click in the X direction reference

at start collector, select the
References tab to close it, and
select datum plane RIGHT from
the model tree.
• Select the References tab to
open it and click Flip.

Section 2, then right-click and
select Sketch.

13. Notice the current X direction.
14. Click OK .

Orientation.
16. Right-click and select Trajectory,
if necessary.
Secondary trajectory.

• Edit the Horizontal/Vertical
control from Automatic to
X-Trajectory.
• Notice that the X check
box is now selected for the
Secondary trajectory.
19. Notice that the sections have
been reoriented.

22. Notice the new X-direction.
23. Click OK .

Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency
You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end
of the swept blend feature.
• Tangency conditions:
– Free
– Tangent
– Normal
• Sketcher point conditions:
– Sharp
Figure 1 – Geometry Before
– Smooth
Tangency
Figure 3 – Smooth and Sharp

Figure 2 – Geometry After Tangency Conditions
Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency

You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end of the swept
blend protrusion or cut. You can change tangency condition settings either in
the Tangency tab of the dashboard or by right-clicking the tangency condition
icons in the graphics window and selecting the desired condition.
There are three available tangency conditions:
• Free – The start or end section is a free end; tangency is not defined.
• Tangent – The specified end is to be tangent to the selected adjacent

surfaces. You must specify the adjacent surface to which each edge is to
be tangent. The Entities collector advances automatically to the next entity.
• Normal – The start or end of the swept blend is normal to the section
plane. The Entities collectors are not available and references are not
required.
If a Sketcher point is used at the start or end of the swept blend feature, you
can define the condition for the geometry as Sharp or Smooth.
You cannot define tangency for a thin protrusion.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency
Swept_Blend\Tangency TANGENCY.PRT
Task 1: Add tangency constraints to the End Sections of a swept blend

protrusion.

Blend 2.
Tangency tab.
• Edit the Boundary Condition
for the Start Section from Free
to Tangent.
• Select the surface adjacent to
the highlighted edge.
4. Continue selecting the remaining
three adjacent surfaces. Notice
that the first surface highlights
after all four surfaces have been
selected.

right-click the icon for the
End Section and select Tangent.
• Select the surface adjacent to
the highlighted edge.
6. Continue selecting the remaining

three adjacent surfaces.
7. Notice the change in the
geometry shape.

Task 2: Edit the tangency for a Sketcher point condition of a swept blend
protrusion.

Blend 1.
2. Select Section 2, if necessary.

5. Drag a window around the
existing rectangle sketch and
delete it.
Sketching group and place a
sketch point at the crosshairs.
7. Click OK .

Orientation.
10. Notice the sharp cap that has
formed at the end.

Tangency tab.
• Edit the Boundary Condition
for the End Section from Sharp
to Smooth.

14. Right-click Draft 1 and select
Edit.
15. Edit the draft angle from 10 to
-10 and click Regenerate .

Analyzing Swept Blend Options
You specify blend control for a swept blend feature.
• Blend control
– No blend control
– Set perimeter control
♦ Create curve through center
of blend.
– Set cross-section area control
♦ Predefined cross-sections
cannot be edited.
Figure 1 – No Blend Control
Figure 3 – Cross-Section
Figure 2 – Options Tab Area Control
Analyzing Swept Blend Options

You can control swept blend geometry by controlling the cross-sectional
area between defined sections and by controlling how the perimeter varies
between the sections. The following options are available:
• No blend control – No blend control is specified for the swept blend. In
Figure 1, no blend control is specified.
• Set perimeter control – Forces the perimeter of the blend to vary linearly
between sections. You can also have the system create a curve through the
center of the blend. This curve becomes a part of the swept blend feature.
• Set cross-section area control – Enables you to specify the cross-section
area at designated locations of the swept blend. A table displays each
specified location and the cross-sectional area at that location. The
predefined cross-sections display in the table but the area cannot be edited
in this table. To add additional locations, click in the table to activate it,
then select points on the trajectory and edit the desired cross-section
area. In Figure 2, the Options tab displays the four locations where the
cross-section's area is controlled. For Sections 1 and 2, the Area cell is

grayed out because these sections are predefined. The resulting geometry
for the specified cross-section control is shown in Figure 3.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Options
Swept_Blend\Swept_Blend_Options SW—BL_OPTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Analyze swept blend options.

Display types: .
Blend 1.
• Select Set perimeter control.
• Notice that the preview
geometry updated.
• Select the Create curve
through center of blend
check box.
select Wireframe from the
Model Display types drop-down
menu.
6. Notice the new center curves
close to the original trajectory.
7. Select Shading from the

menu.
• Select Set cross-section
area control.
• Notice the defined Area for
Section 1 and Section 2.
These areas are defined
by the sketch or selected
section and cannot be
modified in this table.

10. Select the vertex between the
arc and line.
11. In the Options tab, edit the Area
from approximately 9750 to
12000.

point PNT0.
13. Edit the Area to 8500.
15. Select datum point PNT0 in the

model tree, then right-click and
select Edit.
16. Edit the ratio from 0.3 to 0.7.

Analyzing Swept Blend Rules
There are rules and restrictions to consider when creating a
swept blend feature.
Figure 1 – A Swept Blend Cannot Figure 2 – Creating a Swept Blend

Intersect Itself Over Non-Tangent Trajectory
Figure 3 – Start Points Not Lining Up Figure 4 – Using Blend Vertices
Analyzing Swept Blend Rules

Consider the following rules and restrictions when creating a swept blend
feature:
• For a closed trajectory profile, one section must be located at the start point
and at least one other section at another location.
• A swept blend cannot intersect itself. Common causes of intersection are:
– The trajectory intersects itself.
– A section that is too wide is swept around too sharp of a corner, resulting
in intersecting geometry.
In Figure 1, the circular section is swept along the curved trajectory,
resulting in the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, the red
cross-section lines in the front view display that the geometry does not
overlap. In the right image, however, the section is too wide for the corner
radius, resulting in intersection, and therefore failing, geometry.

• Creating a swept blend over a non-tangent trajectory results in a mitered
effect in the geometry. In Figure 2, notice the sharp corner due to the
non-tangent trajectory.
• Section references at the chain start and end points of the trajectory are
dynamic and update if the trajectory is trimmed.
• When using the Normal To Trajectory section plane control option, the
secondary trajectory must consist of entities that are tangent to one
another.
• Section locations can be referenced to model geometry, but modifying the
trajectory may invalidate the references and cause the swept blend to fail.
• If the start points do not line up between sections, a twisting effect is
created, and this twisting effect can cause a feature to fail. In Figure 3, the
swept blend start points are mismatched, resulting in the twisted geometry.
You can also view the resulting geometry when the start points of the same
sections are properly aligned.
• If there are unequal quantities of entities between sections, you must divide
them or use blend vertices to create an equal number. In Figure 4, one
section of the swept blend has four entities, while the other has six. It
was necessary to add two blend vertices to the section containing fewer
entities, and the resulting preview geometry can be seen.

Module 13
Advanced Layers
Module Overview
Layers provide a means of organizing model items, such as features,
datum planes, parts in an assembly, and even other layers, so that you can
perform operations on those items collectively. Layers enable you to simplify
geometry selection by temporarily hiding or displaying specific model features
or assembly components in the graphics window. Layers can also be used
to perform actions, such as suppress all the items in a layer at once. You
can create rules in a layer so that items that fulfill the rule are automatically
added to the layer.
Objectives
• Understand layers.
• Create and manage layers.
• Create layer rules.
• Create layers in assemblies.

Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize
features, components, and even other layers.
• Managed in layer tree

• Uses include:
– Collectively perform operations
♦ Hide/Unhide
♦ Select
– Model management
• Layer types include:
– Default
– Automatic
– User-created
Figure 2 – Viewing the Layer Tree
Figure 1 – Hiding Items using Layers
Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, assembly
parts, and even other layers. You can create as many layers as you need
and associate items with more than one layer.
Layer Uses
A layer enables you to collectively perform operations on items in a layer.
Layers are most often used from a model management standpoint to control
the amount of information displayed in the graphics window. This helps you
to more easily perform tasks.
The two most common operations performed on items on a layer include:
• Hiding and Unhiding Layers — You can hide and unhide layers in parts and
assemblies. This hides or unhides the items on the layer. In Figure 1,

the datum axes layer has been hidden, preventing you from viewing any
datum axes on the model.
Hiding items on a layer seems similar to suppressing those same items.
However, there are significant differences:
– When you suppress an item, it is removed from the regeneration cycle of
the model, whereas hiding an item simply removes it from the graphics
window.
– A hidden item is included in Creo Parametric calculations, such as mass
properties analyses. A suppressed item is not included in calculations.
• Selecting Items on the Layer — Layers enable you to easily select
multiple items, rather than selecting them individually. Mass selection is a
beneficial, timesaving approach to follow in certain circumstances, such as
needing to select 82 out of 100 part axes.
Once the items in a layer are selected, you can perform operations on them.
Typical operations include deleting those items or suppressing/resuming
them. However, you could also edit their display or add them to a simplified
representation.
The Layer Tree

You use the layer tree to add items to layers and perform operations on layers.
You can access the layer tree by selecting the View tab and clicking Layers
from the Visibility group. This toggles on the layer tree. Clicking the icon
again toggles off the layer tree. You can also click Show from the top
of the model tree and select Layer Tree. Figure 2 displays the layer tree.
Layer Types
There are three types of layers that you can create in a model:
• Default — Layers can be included in part and assembly templates. If your
company uses part and assembly templates containing default layers,
Creo Parametric automatically associates different features of a model to
specific default layers. When using default layers, all parts have the same
initial set of default layers. This enables you to use cascading layer control
at the assembly level since each model’s layers are identically named.
• Automatic — When you hide items in the model tree, those hidden items
are automatically added to the Hidden Items Layer.
• User-Created — You can create your own layers in a model and add items
to them manually.

Creating and Managing Layers
You can create layers manually by naming the layer and
selecting geometry items or components to add from the model
tree or the graphics window.
• Layer Properties:
– Name
– Contents
– Rules
• Different icons for layers with or
without rules
• Set the Active Layer
• Status
– Save
– Reset
– Warning Figure 1 – Layer Properties
Dialog Box
Figure 2 – Layer with No Rule Figure 3 – Layer Created with Rule
Creating and Managing Layers

You can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometry
items or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window. This
type of layer is useful for specific tasks. As a best practice, it is recommended
that you name the layer to enable other designers to recognize the task.
When you create a layer, the Layer Properties dialog box displays, as shown
in Figure 1. The dialog box displays the following information:
• Name — This is the name of the layer.
• Contents — The Contents tab displays which items are included or
excluded from the layer. Items that are included on the layer are displayed
with a green plus (+) symbol in the Status column, while items that are
excluded from the layer are displayed with a red minus (–) symbol in the
Status column. When selected, items are included on the layer if the
Include button is turned on, while items are excluded from the layer if the
Exclude button is turned on.
• Rules — The Rules tab displays any applicable rules that have been
defined for the layer. Rules enable you to create layers based upon
defined criteria. To create a layer based on a rule, simply create a layer,
name it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the Layer
Properties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool. In

addition to its usefulness in specific tasks, this type of layer is excellent
when creating templates.
Layers that are created with rules display with a different icon than those
layers that were created without rules. In Figure 2, the layer does not
contain rules, while the layer in Figure 3 was created with a rule.
The Layer Properties dialog box also displays when you view the layer
properties of any existing layer by selecting the layer, right-clicking, and
selecting Layer Properties.
You may also decide to set a layer as the active layer. When a layer is set as
the active layer, all subsequently created features are automatically placed
on the active layer. Note that a layer containing rules cannot be set as the
active layer.
Understanding Layer Status

Whenever you hide or unhide a layer, you are modifying the layer status for
that model. This new layer status is not automatically saved, even when the
model is saved. Thus, it is necessary to save the layer status if you wish to
retain it for the next time the model is opened. You can save the layer status
by selecting the View tab and selecting Save Status from the Status
types drop-down menu in the Visibility group. You can also right-click in the
layer tree and select Save Status.
If you save a model and forget to save the layer status, the
message log alerts you with a warning message, as shown here:
.
You can also reset the layer status to the last saved status by selecting the
View tab and selecting Reset Status from the Status types drop-down
menu in the Visibility group, or by right-clicking in the layer tree and selecting
Reset Status.

Creating Layer Rules
Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria.
• Layer options:
– Associate
– Rules Enabled
– Independent
• Different icons for layers
with/without rules.
• The Rule Editor:
– Look for
– Look in
– You can search for:
♦ Attributes
♦ History
♦ Status
♦ Geometry
• Query Builder
Figure 1 – Rule Editor Dialog Box
Creating Layer Rules

Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria. The Rules tab
of the Layer Properties dialog box displays the rules, if any, that are defined
for the layer. To create a layer based on a rule, you simply need to create a
layer, name it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the
Layer Properties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool.
In addition to being useful in specific tasks, a ruled layer is beneficial when
creating templates.
There are three options for ruled layers:
• Associative – Enables the rules to apply for existing model features. Layers
are non-associative by default.
• Rules Enabled – Enables the rules to apply for new features as they are
created.
• Independent – Enables the layer to be independent of the default layer
model, therefore enabling customization. Layers are dependent by default.
Layers that are created with rules are indicated by a different icon than those
layers that were created without rules.

Using the Rule Editor
You can create rules using the Rule Editor dialog box, which is very similar to
the Search Tool. The Rule Editor includes several options to search models
by a variety of criteria including:
• Look For – Specify the type of items for which you want to search. For
example, you can search for features, components, or solid models.
• Look In – Specifies against which model or models to conduct the search.
You can have the rule look in a top-level assembly, a sub-assembly, or a
part. If an assembly or sub-assembly is specified as the Look in object,
you can select whether sub-models are included. You can set the Look
in object either by selecting it from the drop-down list in the Search Tool
dialog box, or you can click Select Model and select the model from
the graphics window.
• The Rule Editor dialog box enables you to further narrow your criteria by
using the following search options:
– Attributes – Enables you to search for the following attributes:
♦ Name – Feature or component name.
♦ Type – Feature type (round or hole, for example).
♦ Size – Solid model size.
– History – Includes feature or component ID, and feature or component
Number.
– Status – Includes Regeneration status, Layer status, and Display status.
– Geometry – Enables you to search for the following geometry
parameters:
♦ Zone – The component or solid model based on a defined zone.
♦ Distance – Component or solid model based on a defined distance
from a point.
♦ Exterior Comps – Component or solid model based on a location
towards the outside of an assembly.
Using the Query Builder

The Rule Editor dialog box contains the Query Builder area. The Query
Builder enables you to build a set of rules. Rules can be combined using
AND and OR operators in the Query Builder. You can switch the operator
from AND to OR and vice versa.
The Query Builder enables you to add new rules and remove and update
existing rules. You can also move selected rules up and down, as well as
save the query for reuse.

PROCEDURE - Creating Layer Rules
View\Rule_Layers RULES.PRT
Task 1: Create a rule on a new part layer.

Display types: .
2. In the top of the model tree, click
Show and select Layer
Tree.
3. Right-click in the layer tree and
select New Layer.
4. Type HOLES as the Name.
5. Select the Rules tab and click

Edit Rules.
6. In the Rule Editor dialog box,
click Options and verify that
Build Query is not selected.
• Edit the Look for drop-down
list to Feature, if necessary.
• Select Type as the Rule.
• Select Hole as the Value.
• Click Preview Results.
• Click OK.
By default, only new holes
are added to the layer.
7. Click Options > Associative in

the Layer Properties dialog box
and click OK.
8. Right-click the HOLES layer and
select Hide.
9. Click Repaint .
10. In the top of the layer tree, click
Show and select Model
Tree.

11. Press CTRL, select Hole 2 and
Hole 3, and click Mirror
from the Editing group.
12. Select datum plane RIGHT and
Tree.
14. Expand the HOLES layer and
notice the additional holes.
15. Click Regenerate to update the rule.

16. Right-click HOLES and select Unhide.
17. Right-click HOLES and select Hide.
18. Click Repaint .

19. Click Close .
Task 2: Create a rule on a new assembly layer.
1. Click Open and double-click

RULES.ASM.
Tree.
3. Right-click and select New
Layer.
4. Type HARDWARE as the Name.

5. Select the Rules tab and click
Edit Rules.
6. In the Rule Editor dialog box,
click Options > Build Query.
• Edit the Look for drop-down
list to Component.
• Select Name as the Rule.
• Type bolt* as the Value.
• Click Add New.
7. Edit the Look for drop-down list
to Solid Model.
• Select Size as the Rule.
• Select Relative as the Criteria
Type.
• Select is less than as the
Criteria Comparison.
• Type 0.20 as the Value.
• Click Add New.
• Click Preview Results and
click OK.
8. Click Options > Associative

and click OK.
9. Right-click layer HARDWARE,
select Hide, and click Repaint
.
10. Assemble BOLT_20DIA.PRT
into the front hole and click
Regenerate to update the
rule.
11. The bolt is automatically hidden.

Creating Layers in Assemblies
Options are available when you try to add an external item onto
a layer.
• Place External Item options:
– Place component on current
layer
– Place item on all selected layers
– New layer
– Ignore item
– Ignore All
• Cascading layer control:
– Control a part level layer from
an assembly.
– Both part and assembly must Figure 1 – Placing an External
contain layer of the same name. Component on a Layer
Figure 2 – Placing an External

Feature on a Layer Figure 3 – Cascading Layer Control
Creating Layers in Assemblies

You can place any assembly feature or assembled component onto an
assembly layer the same as you can with a part layer in a part. However, if
you try to place an external item onto an assembly layer, such as a part
feature from an assembled component or a component belonging to an
assembled sub-assembly, the Place External Item dialog box appears and
requires that you make some decisions.
• Place component on current layer – If you select a component to place
on a layer that is found within a sub-assembly, you can select this option
to place the component on the layer. The layer is only created at the
assembly level, and not the sub-assembly. Note that, as shown in Figure 1,
when a component is selected, the option Place item on all selected layers
is grayed out in the Place External Item dialog box.
• Place item on all selected layers – If you select a part level feature from
a component, the dialog box displays all the layers found in the part. It
automatically selects the layer or layers that the feature is already on.

You then have the option of selecting additional layers to which you want
the feature added. Remember that selecting this option causes the part
feature item to be placed on a part level layer, not the assembly level layer.
Note that, as shown in Figure 2, when a feature is selected, the option
Place component on current layer is grayed out in the Place External Item
dialog box.
• New layer – Creates a new layer and places the selected component or
feature on that layer. Again, note that the layer is created in the part from
which the selected component or feature is selected. The new part layer
name is the same as the one you are creating at the assembly level, and
helps to facilitate cascading layer control.
• Ignore item – Closes the dialog box and does not create any new layers or
add any features or components to existing layers.
• Ignore All – Closes the dialog box and does not create any new layers or
add any features or components to existing layers.
Cascading Layer Control in Assemblies

Layers in assemblies can provide you with cascading control. You can control
a part level layer from an assembly if the part and assembly both contain a
layer of the same name. When this circumstance occurs, you can edit the
layer properties and layer display of each component individually, as shown
in the Figure 3.
The layer tree also displays a different layer icon for the common
layer.

PROCEDURE - Creating Layers in Assemblies
View\Assy_Layers LAYER.ASM
Task 1: Experiment with the active object drop-down list.

2. Examine the model tree and expand HARDWARE.ASM.
3. Notice that some of the nuts and bolts are in the sub-assembly, and
some are at the top level.

Tree.
5. Expand 01__PRT_DEF_DTM_
PLN and notice that this layer is
found both in the assembly and
in part models.
6. Right-click 01__PRT_DEF_
DTM_PLN and select Hide.
7. Click Repaint and notice

the cascading effect from the
assembly through the parts.
8. Select LAYER_BASE.PRT from

the active object drop-down list
at the top of the layer tree.
9. Notice that the 01__PRT_DEF_
DTM_PLN layer is hidden at this
level.
10. Select LAYER.ASM from the
active object drop-down list.

Task 2: Create layers in assemblies.
1. Right-click in the layer tree and

select New Layer.
2. Type BOLTS as the Name.
3. Select BOLT_12DIA.PRT.
4. Select BOLT_20DIA.PRT.
• The Place External Item dialog
box displays.
• Click Place component on
current layer.
5. Click OK.
6. Right-click the BOLTS layer,

.

Layer.
8. Type NUTS as the Name.
9. Select NUT_12MM.PRT.
10. Select NUT_20MM.PRT. The
Place External Item dialog box
displays because the nut is in a
sub-assembly.
• Click New Layer.
11. Click OK.
12. Expand the BOLTS and NUTS

layers.
13. Notice that the BOLTS layer is
just at the assembly level.
14. Notice that the NUTS layer is
in both the HARDWARE and
LAYER assemblies.
15. Right-click the NUTS layer,
.

Orientation and enable Axis
Display .

Layer.
18. Type HOLES as the Name.
19. Query-select the left rear hole.
The Place External Item dialog
box appears because the feature
is in the part model.
• Click New Layer.
20. Query-select the right rear hole.
• In the Place External Item
dialog box, select the HOLES
layer and click Place item on
all selected layers.
21. Click OK.
22. Expand the HOLES layers in the

part.
23. Notice that there are no items in
the top-level assembly HOLES
layer.
24. Right-click the HOLES layer,
.

Module 14
Advanced Reference Management
Module Overview
Creo Parametric's advanced reference management tools enable you to
efficiently manage parent/child relationships and design intent. You can edit
and replace feature references without redefining those features. You can
replace Sketcher geometry to reroute children to the new reference, and
you can replace missing Sketcher references and solve the section with
the new references.
Objectives
• Edit feature references.
• Replace feature references.
• Replace Sketcher references.
• Replace Sketcher geometry.

Editing Feature References
You can use Edit References to reroute feature references to
alternate selections.
• You can roll the model back.

• The system highlights each
reference during reroute.
• Reroute options:
– Alternate
– Same Ref
– Ref Info
Figure 1 – Selecting an Alternate

Reference
Figure 3 – Viewing Reference

Figure 2 – Viewing the Rerouted Hole Information
Editing Feature References

You can use Edit References to reroute feature references to alternate
selections. When you edit the references of a feature, the system cycles
through and highlights all the references used to create the feature, in the
order originally selected. For each reference, you can then select to either
maintain the same reference, or select or create a new one.
When you initialize the Edit References functionality, you are prompted to
decide whether to roll back the model. The options for this prompt are:
• No – The feature Insert Indicator is left in its current position in the
model tree.
• Yes – The feature Insert Indicator is automatically moved to the current
feature, temporarily suppressing all subsequent features in the model tree
and display. Rolling a model back is useful because it simplifies the display
when several features follow the feature being rerouted.

Reroute Options
To handle each feature reference, you can select from the following three
options:
• Alternate – Enables you to select or create an alternate reference for the
feature. You can use the datum features toolbar if necessary, while in the
Reroute menu, to construct new references.
• Same Ref – Causes the currently highlighted reference to remain the same.
• Ref Info – Displays information about the highlighted reference in an
information window. This option provides the reference identifier and the
type of reference. This is important because you can only reroute to like
reference types.
You can create datum features on-the-fly while in Reroute mode.
These features are placed before the current feature in the model
tree, and are available for selection during Reroute. If you quit the
Reroute operation, the datum features remain.

PROCEDURE - Editing Feature References
Edit\Edit_References EDIT_REFERENCES.PRT
Task 1: Reroute feature references using Edit References functionality.

Display types: .
2. Select Hole 1 from the model
tree.
• Notice this feature is midway
in the model tree.
References.
4. Click Yes to roll back the model.
5. Notice that the Insert Indicator
is now beneath Extrude 2,
and that all downstream features
are temporarily suppressed.
6. Read the prompt in the

message window and notice the
highlighting.
7. Notice that Alternate is specified
in the menu manager, and select
the top of the cylinder.
8. Read the prompt and notice the

highlighting.
9. Select datum axis CYL.
10. Notice that the hole is rerouted,
and the downstream features are
restored.

Edit References.
12. Click No to keep the model from
rolling back.
13. Notice that the Insert Indicator
location is unchanged.

highlighting.
15. Notice that Alternate is specified
in the menu manager, and select
datum axis A_2.

highlighting.
17. Click Same Ref.
18. Read the prompt in the message
window, notice the highlighting,
and click Same Ref.
19. Notice that the hole is rerouted.

21. Right-click Extrude 3, select
Edit References, and click No.
highlighting on the hole surface.
23. Select the main model surface
as the alternate reference.

highlighting.
25. Notice that Alternate is specified,
and select datum plane RIGHT.

26. Read the prompt and click Ref Info.
27. Notice that the reference is datum plane, and click Close.
28. Click Same Ref from the menu manager.
29. Read the prompt and click Ref

Info.
30. Notice that the reference is the
round edge, and click Close.
31. Click Alternate and select the
front model surface.
32. Notice that the protrusion is
taller.

Replacing Feature References
You can replace a reference with an alternate reference for all
children of that reference.
• You can replace:
– A feature.
– Individual entities.
• You can replace a reference for:
– A selected feature.
– All children of the reference.
Figure 1 – Replacing an
Individual Entity
Figure 3 – Model with Replaced

Figure 2 – Original Model Sketch Feature
Replacing Feature References

You can replace a reference with an alternate reference. You can select
whether to replace the reference for a specified feature or for all children of
that reference. The All Children option is a powerful function, because it can
replace downstream usage of the reference for multiple features at once.
To replace a reference, you simply select the entity you want to replace,
then select the new, alternate entity. The following two types of entities can
be replaced:
• Feature – Enables you to select a feature.
• Indiv Entity – Enables you to select an individual entity, such as an edge,
vertex, or plane.
Once you have specified the entity to be replaced, you must specify how
to handle the children of the replaced entity. You have two options from
which to select:

• Sel Feat – Replaces the reference in a selected feature.
• All Children – Replaces the reference in all child features. In Figure 1,
all three holes reference the left datum axis. When the left datum axis is
replaced with the right datum axis for all children, all three holes move to the
right datum axis. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, both the rib and variable section
sweep features reference the sketch. When the sketch is replaced for all its
children, the geometry for both the rib and variable section sweep updates.
It does not matter which feature you select to initiate the Replace
Ref command, unlike Reroute.

PROCEDURE - Replacing Feature References
Edit\Replace_References REPLACE_REFS.PRT
Task 1: Replace an individual entity reference.

Display types: .
2. Examine the model tree, and
notice that the two datum axes
are not individual axis features.
3. Select Hole 1, Hole 2, and Hole
3 from the model tree to review
their locations.
4. With Hole 3 still selected,
References.
5. Click No to prevent the model
from rolling back.
6. In the menu manager, click

Replace Ref > Indiv Entity.
• Select the datum axis running
through the hole as the
reference to be replaced.
• Select the other datum axis as
the alternate axis.
• Click All Children.
7. Notice that all three holes
update, even though each hole
individually references the axis,
not each other.
Task 2: Replace feature references.

drop-down list and select
orientation.

3. Select SKETCH_A, SKETCH_B,
Profile Rib 1, and Sweep 1 to
review their locations.
SKETCH_A is currently
referenced by Profile Rib 1
and the sweep as a sketch
and trajectory, respectively.
4. With Sweep 1 still selected,

References.
5. Click No to prevent the model
from rolling back.
Replace Ref > Feature.
• Select SKETCH_A as the
reference to be replaced.
• Select SKETCH_B as the
alternate feature.
• Click All Children.
• Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
7. Notice that both features have
updated to the new reference.

Replacing Sketcher References
References can be replaced using the References dialog box.
• Replace missing or valid

references.
• Similar to Reroute, but in Sketcher.
• Reference status.
• Solve option.
Figure 1 – Replacing a Missing

Reference
Figure 2 – Solving with Replaced Figure 3 – Viewing the Solved

Reference References
Replacing Sketcher References

You can replace valid, invalid, and/or missing references in Sketcher. This
is similar to using the Reroute option in Part mode, but is available from
within Sketcher mode. The system preserves the original ID of the replaced
reference for the best possible handling of any child features. The following
options are found in the References dialog box:
• Replace – Enables you to select a reference from the list and replace it
with a new reference.
• Delete – Deletes the currently selected reference.
• Reference status – Indicates the current status of references.
– Unresolved References – There are missing and/or unresolved
references. References need to be replaced or additional references
may be required.
– Unsolved Sketch – Adequate references exist to place the sketch, but
there still may be missing or invalid references.
– Fully Placed – All references are valid and there are adequate
references to place the sketch.

• Solve – Attempts to solve the sketch based on the current references.

PROCEDURE - Replacing Sketcher References
Edit\Replace_Sketch_Refs REPLACE_SK_REFS.PRT
Task 1: Resume a feature and replace a reference in Sketcher using the

new option.

2. Click Resume > Resume All from the Operations group drop-down
menu.
• Notice that some features failed to regenerate and that the features
are highlighted in the model tree.
3. Edit the definition of

OVAL_SKETCH.
4. Notice the missing references.
5. Select the first MISSING

REFERENCE and click Replace.
• Select datum plane RIGHT
from the model tree.
6. Select the next MISSING
REFERENCE and click Replace.
• Select datum plane RIGHT
• Since the reference is now the
same, it is removed from the
list.
• Notice that the Reference
status is currently "Unsolved
sketch."

7. Click Solve.
• Notice that the Reference
status is now "Fully Placed."
8. Notice that the remaining
reference is not missing, but is to
an edge of a round.
• Select the
Edge:F12(ROUND_2) refer-
ence and click Replace.
• Select datum plane FRONT
• Click Solve and then click
Close.

.
10. Edit the dimensions as shown.
11. Click OK .

Replacing Sketcher Geometry
The Replace function helps mitigate missing reference failures
when editing sketches.
• Select Replace from the
Operations group drop-down
menu:
– Select the original entity.
– Select the new entity.
– The children of the replaced
entity are rerouted to the
new entity.
Figure 1 – Deleting an Entity

without Replace
Figure 3 – Part Model Before

Figure 2 - Replacing an Entity and After Replace
Replacing Sketcher Geometry

When a change is made to a parent feature, it automatically updates any
children. This is beneficial functionality and demonstrates the power of Creo
Parametric. However, if a change to a parent feature results in a child not
being able to find a particular parent's reference, a failure occurs. Creo
Parametric reports this error in the message window and failure diagnostics
window as, “Feature references are missing.”
Editing a sketch can result in changed or removed edges and surfaces in a
model. If those changed or removed edges and surfaces are parents to other
features, failures can occur. In Figure 1, the sketched entity is being deleted
to modify the sketch. However, Creo Parametric indicates that this entity is
referenced by other entities (a round feature). If you decide to continue and
delete this entity, the child features fail due to this reference being removed.
One way to help mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketches is
to use the Replace function. The Replace function transfers references from
an old entity to the new entity you have created. This means the children of

the replaced entity are automatically rerouted to the new entity. You can click
the Operations group drop-down menu, then select Replace. You then select
the original entity that contains the references, then select the new entity to
which you want references transferred.

PROCEDURE - Replacing Sketcher Geometry
Edit\Replace_Sketch_Geom REPLACE_SK_GEOM.PRT
Task 1: Replace Sketcher geometry in a part model.

BASE_PROTRUSION.
Internal Sketch.

Setup group.
6. Select the right side angled
line, then right-click and select
Delete.
7. Read the warning message and
click Yes.
8. Click 3-Point / Tangent End
from the Sketching group and
sketch an arc in its place.
9. Click OK .
11. Notice that SIDE_ROUND and
its children fail.

12. Click OK in the caption to accept
the changes.
SIDE_ROUND and select Info >
Feature.
14. Notice that SIDE_ROUND
is failing because feature
references are missing.
15. Close the Browser.

SIDE_ROUND.
tab, select Set 2, and click in the
Driving Surface collector.
18. Spin the model and select the
surface to satisfy the missing
reference.
Task 2: Transfer references using Replace to avoid a missing references

failure.

BASE_PROTRUSION.
Internal Sketch.

Setup group.
5. Select the right arc and click
Mirror from the Editing
group.
• Select the vertical centerline
and de-select the mirrored arc.

Replace.
• Select the left angled line.
• Select the newly mirrored arc.
• Click Yes in the Replace Entity
dialog box.
7. Click OK .
Using the Replace
functionality enables you to
transfer references to the
arc entity and avoid failures.

Module 15
Family Tables
Module Overview
When creating design models, you can vary existing models and quickly
create multiple instances by using family tables. This is especially useful for
common hardware items such as screws, bolts, and nuts.
In this module, you learn how to create multiple design variations of models
using family tables.
Objectives
• Understand the theory behind family tables.
• Learn how to create a family table and multi-level family table.
• Pattern family table instances.
• Edit family table members.

Understanding Family Table Theory
Family tables enable you to create a large number of common
parts quickly based upon an initial or "generic" design model.
• Family tables:
– Collection of parts, assemblies,
or features.
– Spreadsheets comprised of
rows and columns.
– Promote use of standardized
components.
• Family tables consist of:
– A “generic” model.
♦ Original model
– Items that can be varied.
– One or more “instance” models.
♦ Family members Figure 1 – Family Table
Figure 2 – Family Table Instances Figure 3 – Selecting the Instance
Understanding Family Table Theory

Family tables are a collection of parts, assemblies, or features that are similar,
but deviate slightly in some aspect, such as size or which detail features are
included. For example, bolts of a certain type, though different in size, all look
alike and perform the same function. Thus, it is useful to think of them as a
“family” of part models. Parts in family tables are also known as table-driven
parts. Family tables promote the use of standardized components.
Family Table Structure

Family tables are essentially spreadsheets, comprised of columns and rows.
A family table consists of the following three components:
• The generic object, or base object – All members of the family table are
based on the generic object.
• The items specified in the generic that can be varied in the instances.
• Instances – The family members created in the table based on the generic
model.

The family table rows contain the generic model and instances of parts and
their corresponding values. The generic model is the first row in the family
table.
The family table columns are used to specify the items in the generic model
that can be varied in the instances.
The family table also contains a header that specifies the column names.
It is important to note that when creating a family table, the system is not
actually creating additional *.prt files for each instance; the instances are
virtual. When a particular instance is opened, the system actually opens the
“generic” model first, and then regenerates it according to the information in
the family table row for that instance.
Family Tables Uses

You can use family tables for any of the following reasons:
• Create and store large numbers of objects simply and compactly within
a single model.
• Save time and effort by standardizing part generation.
• Generate variations of a part from one part file instead of having to model
each one.
• Create slight variations in parts without having to use relations to change
the model.
• Create a table of parts that can be included in part catalogs or on a drawing.
Family Table Instance Identification and Facts

Instances are identified in the following ways:
• You can set the config.pro option menu_show_instances to yes to display
all instances in the File Open dialog box and Browser. Instances display as
instance_name<generic_name>.prt.
• When you open a generic model, the system prompts you to specify which
file to open in the Select Instance dialog box. You may select to open the
generic file or an instance associated with it. You can open a file By Name
or By Column. The By Column option enables you to filter which instance to
open based on the values defined for the variable items in the family table.
• When a family table model is opened in Creo Parametric, the lower-left
corner of the graphics window indicates whether it is a generic or instance.
• You use the config.pro option modeltree_show_gen_of_instance to control
the display of the name of the generic instance in the model tree. The
default setting displays the generic name. For example, if the generic model
is called BOLT_FAM.PRT and you open instance BOLT_6-15.PRT from it,
the instance displays in the model tree as BOLT_6-15<BOLT_FAM>.PRT.
• You can right-click an instance and select Open Generic to open the
generic model. This option is available from the top node in a part model,
or from a component in an assembly model.

Creating a Family Table
You can create variations of design models using family tables.
• To create a family table:

– Create the generic
– Create the table and
specify items to be varied
– Insert and configure new
instances
– Verify instances Figure 1 – Family Table
• Other family table
operations:
– Cut/Copy/Paste
– Find Instance
– Preview Instance
– Lock/Unlock Instance
– Edit With Excel
Figure 2 – Family Table Instances
Creating a Family Table

Adhere to the following steps to create a family table:
• Create the model that is to be used as the generic model in the family table.
• Create the new family table in the model. Specify the items in the generic
model that can be varied in the instances using Add Columns in the
Family Table dialog box. Each item specified in the generic is added as
a new column to the table, in the order in which the items were specified.
The following items can be added to the family table:
– Dimensions – Features – Merge Parts
– Components – Parameters – Ref Models
– Groups – Pattern Tables – Other
All aspects of the generic model that are not included in the family table
as items to be varied, automatically occur in each instance. For example,
if the generic model contains a 2” hole, all instances contain the same 2”
hole in the same location.
• Add rows with the names of instances using Insert Instance , and
configure each instance based on the items available to be varied in the
table. For each instance, depending upon the item type, you can specify a
value of Y or N (Yes or No) or type a numerical value. For example, you
can specify a different value for a dimension or parameter. All dimension
table cells must have a value specified. If the value is specified as an
asterisk (*), that item uses the generic's value. If a value is specified as N,

the feature is suppressed in the regeneration cycle for that instance. If the
value is specified as Y, the feature is included in the regeneration cycle for
that instance. In Figure 1, the 6-POINT feature is included in only the 1/4”
socket, while the 12-POINT feature is included in only the 3/8” and 1/2”
sockets. In Figure 2, the left image displays the 1/4” socket and notice that
only the 6-POINT feature is visible.
• Verify the family table instances using Verify Instances in the Family
Table dialog box. The Verify function attempts to regenerate each instance
in the table utilizing the values specified for that instance. If the values
enable the instance to properly regenerate, its verification status is listed as
“Success”. If the values cause a geometry failure or some other type of
failure, the verification status is listed as “Failure.”
Any time a change is made to the family table you must reverify
all instances.
Other Family Table Operations

Within the Family Table dialog box, the following additional operations can
be performed:
• Cut Cells /Copy Cells /Paste Cells Operations – You can cut,
copy, and paste cell values. You can also use CTRL+C, CTRL+X, and
CTRL+V, or right-click and select Delete Rows to remove any unwanted
instances.
• Find Instance – Enables you to find a particular instance or group of
instances based on Type and the Type's value.
• Preview Instance – Enables you to preview an instance in a separate
window.
• Lock Unlock Instance – Enables you to lock an instance so its values

cannot be modified.
• Edit With Excel – Enables you to use Microsoft Excel (if it is installed)
to populate the family table.
Best Practices
To make identification easier, rename dimensions that are to be used in family
tables. The column header name for dimensions displays as the name of the
dimension. Thus, in the family table it is easier to identify the dimension as
“DRIVE_SIZE”, rather than d3, as shown in Figure 1.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Family Table
Feature-Tools\Create_Fam-Tab FAMILY_TABLE.PRT
Task 1: Create a family table for a socket set.

DRIVE and select Edit.
Switch Symbols.
4. Notice the dimensions defining
the socket drive.
5. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Family
Table .
6. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add Columns .
7. In the Family Items dialog box,

select Dimension if necessary,
and select the DRIVE_SIZE
dimension.
• Select Parameter, select the
Description parameter, and
click Insert Selected > Close
in the Select Parameter dialog
box.
• Select Feature, select the
6-POINT and 12-POINT
features, and click Done > OK.
8. In the Family Table dialog box,

click Insert Instance .
• Click Insert Instance two
more times to add a total of
three instances.
• Edit the three Instance
Names to 1-4_SOCKET,
3-8_SOCKET, and
1-2_SOCKET.

9. In the DRIVE_SIZE column,
type 6.35, 9.55, and 12.70 for
the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets,
respectively.
10. In the DESCRIPTION column,
type 1/4” SOCKET, 3/8”
SOCKET, and 1/2” SOCKET for
the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets,
respectively.
11. In the 6-POINT column, type Y,

N, and N for the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2
sockets, respectively.
12. In the 12-POINT column, type N,
Y, and Y for the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2
sockets, respectively.

click Verify Instances .
14. In the Family Tree dialog box,
click Verify > Close.
15. Notice that the graphics window
now displays the original model
as the GENERIC Instance.
select the 1-4_SOCKET and
click Preview Instance .
• Click Close.

right-click 1-2_SOCKET and
select Open.
18. Notice that the instance opens
in a new window and that the
graphics window displays its
name.
19. Notice that 6-POINT is absent

FAMILY_TABLE.PRT, and
click Open.
21. In the Select Instance dialog box,
select 3-8_SOCKET, and click
Open.
22. Notice the model tree displays
the instance name with the
generic name in brackets.

Patternizing Family Table Instances
You can use the Copy with Increments tool to automatically
generate a large number of instances by incrementing
dimensions.
• Direction
• Quantity
• Items
• Increment value
Figure 1 – Patternizing Instances
Figure 2 – Family Table Figure 3 – Patternized Models
Patternizing Family Table Instances

You can use the Copy With Increments tool to automatically generate a
large number of instances by incrementing dimensions. This tool works well
for family tables of parts whose family items are consistently incremented,
such as nuts, bolts, socket sets, and so on.
When you start the Copy with Increments tool, the Patternize Instances
dialog box appears, enabling you to configure the patternizing options. The
following options are available for patternizing instances:
• Direction – Defines the group of items that are to be patternized.
• Quantity – Specifies the quantity of instances that are patternized in a
given direction.
• Items – Specifies which Family Items are to be patternized. Any Family
Item that requires a value can be patternized. Features that are defined as
Y or N in the family table cannot be patternized.
• Increment value – Defines the value that the Item is patternized for each
instance.
If you define multiple directions to be patternized, the system creates a matrix
of instance results. In Figure 2, the socket size is incremented in the first
direction for a total quantity of 6, and the socket depth is incremented in the

second direction for a total quantity of 2. Therefore, a total of 12 instances
are created, 6 for all socket sizes at one depth, and 6 for all socket sizes
at the second depth.

PROCEDURE - Patternizing Family Table Instances
Feature-Tools\Patternize PATTERNIZE.PRT
Task 1: Patternize a part model to create multiple instances.

Parameters .
3. Notice that there is a parameter
named SOCKET_SIZE.
• Click OK.

Edit.
Switch Symbols .
Relations .
7. Notice that the DIA dimension is
controlled by the SOCKET_SIZE
parameter.
• Click OK.

Family Table .
click Add Columns .
10. In the Family Items dialog box,
select Parameter, select the
SOCKET_SIZE parameter, and
click Insert Selected > Close in
the Select Parameter dialog box.
• In the Family Items dialog box,
select Dimension, select the
DEPTH dimension, and click
OK > OK.
click Insert Instance .
12. Click Copy With Increments

.
13. In the Patternize Instance
dialog box, edit the Quantity for
Direction1 to 6.
• Select SOCKET_SIZE and
click Add Item .
• Edit the Increment to 1.
• Select Add Direction and
edit its quantity to 2.
• Select d1, DEPTH and click
Add Item .
• Edit the Increment to 30.

14. Click OK in the Patternize
Instance dialog box.
right-click PATTERNIZE_INST
and select Delete Rows.
16. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog
box.
17. Edit the Instance Names
for the 25.4 depth to
XXmm_SHALLOW, where
XX is the socket size.
18. Edit the six “*” values to 25.4.
19. Edit the Instance Names for the
55.4 depth to XXmm_DEEP,
where XX is the socket size.

select 15MM_SHALLOW and
click Preview Instance .
• Click Close.
• Select 15MM_DEEP and click
Preview Instance .
• Click Close.
23. Click OK in the Family Table
dialog box.

Creating a Multi-Level Family Table
You can use an instance from a family table as the generic for
a different family table.
• Creation
– Instance from one family
table is the generic for
another family table.
• Recognition
– Folder icon in original
generic table's Type column.
– Select Instance dialog box
displays twice.
Figure 1 – The 1/4 Inch Drive

12mm Socket
Figure 2 – Opening a Multi-Level

Instance Figure 3 – Multi-Level Family Table
Creating a Multi-Level Family Table

A family table is not restricted to a single level of a table. You can create
instances of instances by opening an instance and creating a new family
table for it. In other words, the instance of the first family table is now the
generic for a second family table. This is known as a “nested” family table.
Another way to create a nested family table is to open a generic model's
family table, select the desired instance that is to become the generic of the
new family table, and click Insert > Instance-Level Table in the Family Table
dialog box main menu.
Recognizing a Multi-Level Family Table

When you open a generic model, the Select Instance dialog box enables you
to select any instance in the family table. If you select an instance that is the
generic for another family table, the Select Instance dialog box opens again
and displays the instances for this second family table, enabling you to select
any instance in the second family table.

If you open the family table of the original generic model, the instances that
contain family tables of their own display a folder icon in the Type column
of the Family Table dialog box, as shown in Figure 3. You can also switch
from the generic family table into the instance's family table within the Look
In drop-down list, as shown in Figure 3. Because the nested instances are
children of the original family table, they must also be reverified any time a
change is made to the generic model.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Multi-Level Family Table
Feature-Tools\Multi-Level MULTI_FAM-TAB.PRT
Task 1: Create a multi-level family table.

select The generic and click
Open.
Family Table .
4. Notice that the family table
consists of three different drive
sizes.

select the 1-4_DRIVE instance.
• Click Insert > Instance-Level
Table from the top menu.
6. A new family table is created for
the 1-4_DRIVE instance.
7. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add Columns .

8. In the Family Items dialog box, select Parameter, select
SOCKET_SIZE, and click Insert Selected > Close.
• In the Family Items dialog box, select Feature, select Revolve
1, and click Done > OK.

click Insert Instance six
times to insert six instances.
• Increment the cells in the
SOCKET_SIZE column from 8
to 13, one millimeter at a time.
• Type Y for REVOLVE_1 for the
8 and 9 SOCKET_SIZE.
• Type N for REVOLVE_1 for
the 10–13 SOCKET_SIZE.
• Type XXmm_SOCKET for the
Instance Name, where XX is
the SOCKET_SIZE.

11. Notice that these instances are
sub-instances to the 1-4_DRIVE
instance.

edit the Look In drop-down to
MULTI_FAM-TAB.
14. Notice that the 1-4_DRIVE
instance now displays a folder
icon in the Type field.
15. Right-click 1-4_DRIVE and
select Open.
Family Table .
17. Notice the family table and click
OK.

MULTI_FAM-TAB.PRT, and
click Open.
19. In the Select Instance dialog
box, select 1-4_DRIVE and click
Open.
select 12MM_SOCKET and click
Open.

21. In the model tree, right-click 12MM_SOCKET<MULTI_FAM-TAB>.PRT
and select Open Generic.
22. In the Select Instance dialog box, select 1-2_DRIVE and click Open.
23. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and select Family Table ,
click Add Columns , and add the SOCKET_SIZE parameter.
• Click Insert Instance six times to insert six instances.
24. Increment the cells in the

SOCKET_SIZE column from 14
to 19, one millimeter at a time.
25. Type XXmm_SOCKET for the
Instance Name, where XX is the
SOCKET_SIZE.
26. In the Family Table dialog box, click Verify Instances .

• Click Verify > Close.
27. Click OK in the Family Table dialog box.
28. Select the View tab, click

Windows , and select
MULTI_FAM-TAB.PRT.
Family Table and notice that
1-2_DRIVE is now a multi-level
family table.
30. Edit the Look In drop-down list to 1-2_DRIVE.

31. Click OK in the Family Table dialog box.

Editing Family Table Members
The resulting geometry and behavior of models varies depending
upon whether you edit a family table generic or instance.
• Editing feature dimensions in the generic model.

• Editing feature dimensions in an instance.
• Adding or editing features in the generic model.
• Adding or editing features in an instance.
Figure 1 – Creating a Feature in the Generic
Figure 2 – Creating a Feature in the Instance
Editing Family Table Members

The behavior of Creo Parametric models and the resulting geometry can be
different depending upon whether you edit a generic model or an instance.
Consider the following scenarios and what happens to the generic model
and family table instances.
Editing Feature Dimensions in the Generic Model

If you edit a dimension in the generic model that is not a dimension able to be
varied in the family table, the geometry updates in both the generic model
and all instances.
If you edit a dimension in the generic model that is a dimension able to be
varied in the family table, only the geometry in the generic model updates
unless an instance's dimension value in the family table is set to “*”. The
instance geometry remains at the dimension value set in the family table
column.

Editing Feature Dimensions in an Instance
If you edit a dimension in an instance that is not a dimension able to be
varied in the family table, the geometry updates in both the generic model
and all instances.
If you edit a dimension in an instance that is a dimension able to be varied
in the generic's family table, the system informs you that the dimension is
table-driven. Upon confirming the family table modification, you can edit
the value and update the geometry in the instance. The family table in the
generic is updated for that particular instance row, but no other instance.
Adding or Editing Features in the Generic Model

If you suppress or delete a feature in the generic model that is not a feature
able to be varied in the family table, the feature is automatically suppressed
or deleted in all instances.
If you suppress a feature in the generic model that is able to be varied in the
family table, only the feature in the generic model updates unless the variable
value in the family table is set to a value of “*”. The instance feature remains
at the value set in the family table column. That is, if the value is set to Y, then
the feature is displayed; if the value is set to N then the feature is suppressed.
If you delete a feature in the generic model that is a feature able to be varied
in the family table, the column is removed from the family table, and the
feature is deleted from all instances.
If you add a feature to the generic model, the feature is added to all instances,
Adding or Editing Features in an Instance

If you suppress a feature in an instance that is not a feature able to be varied
in the generic's family table, the feature is suppressed only in that particular
instance. You are warned that suppressing instance features has only a
temporary effect. If you delete a feature, it is deleted only in that particular
instance. The generic's family table is modified by adding the deleted feature
as an item that can be varied. This then enables you to suppress the feature
in other instances.
If you suppress a feature in an instance that is a feature able to be varied in
the generic's family table, the feature is suppressed only in that particular
instance. You are warned that suppressing instance features has only
a temporary effect. The feature in the other instances is suppressed or
resumed according to the value set in the family table column. The value in
the family table for the feature that was suppressed does not change. If you
delete a feature from an instance, the feature is deleted only in that particular
instance. The feature in the other instances is suppressed or resumed
according to the value set in the family table column. The value in the family
table for the feature that was deleted changes to N for that particular instance.
If you add a feature to an instance, the feature is added as an item to be
varied in the generic's family table. The column value is set to Y for the
instance to which the feature was added, and N for the generic and all other
instances. In Figure 2, the round was added to the instance. Consequently,
the round was added to the generic's family table as an item to be varied.

PROCEDURE - Editing Family Table Members
Feature-Tools\Edit_Members EDIT-MEMBERS.PRT
Task 1: Edit the members of a family table.

double-click The generic.
Family Table .
4. Notice that the family table drives
the socket's depth, but not its
diameter.
5. Click OK.
6. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit.

• Edit the diameter from 27 to 30 and edit the depth from 31.86 to 40.
• Click Regenerate .

EDIT-MEMBERS.PRT.
select 3-8_SOCKET and click
Open.
Edit.
10. Notice the diameter updated, but
not the depth.

11. Edit the diameter from 30 to 35.
12. Double-click the 31.86 depth
dimension and notice it is table
driven.
13. Click Confirm from the menu
manager, edit the depth to 45,
and click Regenerate .
14. Click Close .
Family Table , and notice
that the 3/8” socket depth value
updated to 45.
• Click OK.
Task 2: Create new features in family table members.
1. Select Edge Chamfer from

list.
2. Spin the model and select the
edge.

Family Table .
• Right-click 1-2_SOCKET and
select Open.
6. Notice that the chamfer is found
in the instance model.
7. Click Round from the Round

8. Right-click to select the four
intent edges.
11. Click Close .

12. Notice that the round is not found
on the generic model in the
graphics window.

> Tree Filters.
14. Enable Suppressed Objects in
the Model Tree Items dialog box,
and click OK.
15. Notice that the round is in the
generic model's model tree, but
it is suppressed.

Family Table .
17. Notice that the round has
been added to the family table,
and it is only turned on in the
1-2_SOCKET instance.
18. Click OK.

Module 16
Reusing Features
Module Overview
Creo Parametric enables you to reuse existing geometry when creating new
design models. You can create inheritance features that enable one-way
associative propagation of geometry and feature data from a reference part
to a target part within an assembly. You can vary dimensions and other data
propagated from the reference part.
You can also reuse geometry in a design model by creating user-defined
features (UDFs). A UDF consists of selected features, all their associated
dimensions, any relations between the selected features, and a list of
references for placing the UDF on various design models.
Objectives
• Create user-defined features (UDFs) to reuse geometry.
• Place user-defined features.
• Create user-defined features using on-surface coordinate systems.
• Create inheritance features to transfer geometry from existing design
models.
• Use external merge to add and remove material.

Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) save time by helping establish a
library of commonly used geometry.
• Define a UDF from a “template”

model.
– Standalone
♦ Reference Part option
– Subordinate
• Select features to include.
– Must be sequential
• Define prompts.
– Every reference requires a
prompt.
• Define any variable items
(optional). Figure 1 – “Template” Model
– Variable elements or
dimensions
– Family Table
Figure 2 – Highlighted Surface

While Defining Prompts
Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) are groups of features, references, and
dimensions that can be saved for use on future models. UDFs save time by
helping you establish a library of commonly used geometry.
Defining a UDF from a “Template” Model

To create a UDF, you must first create a "template" part containing the same
base geometry that is in the target model (new model). Then model the
features that you wish to include in the UDF on this part. An example is
shown in Figure 1. When modeling the features, be sure to consider the
number of references being created. In most cases, minimizing the number
of references makes the most efficient UDFs.
Define the UDF (*.gph file) in the UDF library, and give it a recognizable name.
The UDF library location is most likely a location unique to your company,

and is defined by your administrator. The UDF library can be accessed from
the Group Directory Common Folder, which displays when appropriate.
Specify the storage option type. There are two types of storage options:
• Subordinate – Creates a reference to the original template model and
automatically uses the template model as a reference part to guide the
UDF placement in the future. The original model must be present for the
subordinate UDF to function. If you make any dimensional changes to the
original model, they are automatically reflected in the UDF.
• Standalone – Does not reference the template model. It copies all the
original model information into the UDF file. If you make any changes to
the original model, they are not reflected in the UDF. When you create a
standalone UDF, you have the option to create a separate reference part.
If created, the reference part has the same name as the UDF, but with a
“_GP” suffix.
Selecting Features to Include

Next, you must select the features to be placed in the UDF. The features
must be sequential in the model tree.
Defining Prompts
You must define a prompt for each reference created within the selected
features. All references from the features selected for the UDF require
prompts. The prompts are displayed for each original feature reference
when placing a UDF to help you select a corresponding reference in the
target model. Therefore, the prompts you create for each reference should
be descriptive. Each reference is highlighted in the graphics window as you
define its prompt, as shown in Figure 2. If a reference was used to create
more than one feature, you are asked to create either Single or Multiple
prompts for that reference.
• Single – Specifies a single prompt for the reference used in several
features. When the UDF is placed, the prompt appears only once, but the
reference you select for this prompt applies to all features in the group
that use the same reference.
• Multiple – Specifies an individual prompt for each feature that uses this
reference. If you select Multiple, each feature using this reference is
highlighted, so you can type a different prompt for each feature.
Defining Variable Items

You can also define any variable items to be stored in the UDF. This is an
optional step in UDF creation. Variable dimensions provide a prompt for a
dimension value upon placement. Variable elements enable the feature's
dashboard to be accessed during placement, to redefine the feature for the
current application. A family table enables you to create different instances of
the feature, with each instance containing different combinations of features,
dimensions, and parameters.
Modifying a UDF
When the UDF is complete, a *.gph file is saved to the current directory. You
can edit a defined UDF by selecting the Modify option in the UDF menu.

PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs
Feature-Tools\Create_udf CREATE_UDF.PRT
Task 1: Create a UDF from a feature in a part model.

Display types: .
2. Right-click Extrude 2 in the
model tree and select Info >
Reference Viewer.
3. In the Reference Viewer dialog
box, notice that Extrude 2
references datum plane RIGHT
and Extrude 1.
4. Click the down arrow next to
Extrude 1 and cursor over each
of the surface references.
5. Notice that the top, flat surface
and the circular surface are the
two references on the model.
6. Click Close from the Reference
Viewer.
7. In the ribbon, select the Tools

tab.
8. Click UDF Library from the
Utilities group.
9. Click Create from the menu
manager.
10. Type keyway as the name and
press ENTER.
Subordinate > Done > Add >
Select.
12. Select Extrude 2 as the feature
to add and click Done/Return.

13. Notice the top surface highlighted
in red. This is the first required
reference.
14. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the surface.
15. Type sketching plane and press
ENTER.
16. Notice datum plane highlighted in

red. This is the second required
reference.
18. Type orientation reference
plane and press ENTER.
19. Notice the cylindrical surface

highlighted in red. This is the
third required reference.
21. Type cylinder surface and
press ENTER.
22. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
23. In the UDF dialog box, select Var Dims and click Define.
24. Zoom in on Extrude 2 and select the left (width) and right (length)
2 dimensions.
25. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the menu manager.

26. Notice that the first dimension is
highlighted.
the prompt for the dimension.
28. Type key width and press
ENTER.
29. Notice that the second dimension

is highlighted.
the prompt for the dimension.
31. Type key length and press
ENTER.
32. Click OK > Done/Return to
complete the UDF creation.

Placing UDFs
To save time, place user-defined features (UDFs) from your
company's UDF library into your model.
• Open existing UDF (*.gph)

• Select Placement references
– Prompts can aid you
• Edit Variable Dimensions and
Annotations Elements
• Options
– Scaling
– Dimension display
– Redefine features on-the-fly
• Adjustments Figure 1 – Viewing References
– Flip orientation on the Original UDF

for UDF Placement Figure 3 – The Placed UDF
Placing UDFs
If you recreate the same geometry regularly when creating your design
models, it can be more efficient to have the system create that geometry for
you using UDFs. Creating geometry by placing a pre-existing UDF can be
much faster than creating it new each time.
Opening an Existing UDF (*.gph)

When placing a UDF, first you must open the target model. You can insert a
UDF by clicking User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group in the
ribbon, and selecting the corresponding *.gph file. The original template
model is required when placing a subordinate UDF. Creo Parametric provides
the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box to enable you to easily place
UDFs in multiple models.
When you place a UDF, the system copies the features into the target model.
The copied features become a group. The resulting group of features created
from a UDF can be dependent or independent of the UDF.

Selecting Placement References for the Prompts
Next, you must select references in the target model for each prompt that
was defined during the creation of the UDF. When selecting the references,
you can view the reference part in a subwindow to help you select the
correct references. As you select references, the UDF preview placement
dynamically updates in the graphics window.
Editing Variable Dimensions and Annotation Elements

You can edit any of the items defined as Variable Items during UDF creation.
These include Dimensions, Parameters, and any Annotation Element Items.
Specifying Options
Next, you can specify options, such as scaling dimensions upon placement.
You can keep the same dimension values or feature sizes, or specify a
scaling factor for the features to be placed. This enables you to scale the size
of the UDF for different size models, or between models of different units.
Plus, you can specify whether you want to lock, unlock, or hide dimensions of
the elements that are not specified as variables in the UDF.
You also have the ability to redefine any features contained in the UDF
on-the-fly. This enables you to customize a UDF upon placement. After
selecting features to redefine, you must step the regeneration of the UDF
back past the selected features, and then step forward to regenerate them.
After the selected UDF feature is regenerated, its dashboard appears,
enabling you to redefine it.
Adjusting Placement Orientation and Finishing Placement

Certain portions of UDFs, depending on what they are, can be oriented in
one of two ways. These items are displayed as Orientation Items in the
Adjustments tab. You can select each available Orientation Item and flip its
orientation, watching the preview dynamically update. If the placement is
successful, a local group is created in the model tree. Items hidden in the
UDF remain in their hidden status when placed into the model.
You can duplicate UDFs easily using the Copy and Paste tools.
Updating a Modified UDF

If you make the placed group of features independent of the UDF, then it
results in all the UDF information being copied to the target model as a group
without any associative ties to the UDF. If the UDF is modified, the copied
group is not updated. However, if you establish a dependency to the original
UDF, then changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the
group. You must manually update the group to the UDF change by clicking
UDF Operations > Update All from the Operations group drop-down menu
and then regenerating the model.

PROCEDURE - Placing UDFs
Feature_Tools\Place_UDF PLACE_UDF.PRT
Task 1: Place a UDF for a keyway in a model.

2. Click User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group.
• Select KEYWAY.GPH and click Open.
• Accept the default selection of Advanced reference configuration
and click OK.
3. Notice that a reference model

has been created for this UDF,
and displays in a subwindow.
• Notice that the first required
reference is highlighted in the
subwindow, and placement
preview of the feature is shown
in the main graphics window.
• Notice that Reference 1 is
highlighted in the User Defined
Feature Placement dialog box
and the description prompt
reads sketching plane.
• Select a corresponding planar
surface, as shown.
4. Select Reference 2 in the dialog

box.
• Notice that this reference is
highlighted in the subwindow.
• Notice that the description
prompt reads orientation
reference plane.
• Select a corresponding plane,
as shown.

5. Select Reference 3 in the dialog
box.
• Notice that this reference is
highlighted in the subwindow.
• Also notice that the description
prompt reads cylinder
surface.
• Select a corresponding
surface, as shown.
6. In the User Defined Feature

Placement dialog box, select the
Variables tab.
7. Edit the Value for the d5
dimension from 2.00 to 4.

Placement dialog box, select the
Adjustments tab.
Placement dialog box, click Flip
and then click Accept .
For a more complex UDF,
there may be multiple
reference directions that can
be flipped. The system lists
each reference direction
in the dialog box, enabling
you to flip/preview each
reference.

Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate
Systems
UDFs gain capability when utilizing an on-surface Csys.
• Set up UDF features to reference

only an on-surface Csys.
– Quick and flexible placement.
– Drag location and angle.
• Include on-surface Csys in UDF.
– No UDF prompts required.
– Specify on-surface Csys
references upon placement.
Figure 1 – UDF Fea-
tures Referencing
On-Surface Csys
Figure 3 – Placing UDF on

Figure 2 – Locating UDF Alternate Surface
On-Surface
Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems

The placement of a User-Defined Feature (UDF) gains some capabilities
when the features used to create the UDF reference is an on-surface
coordinate system. Upon placement, the UDF appears in a dynamic preview
that can be dragged to locate the UDF. You can also specify an additional
rotation angle for the UDF.
Keep in mind the following regarding the on-surface Csys and UDFs:
• The features comprising the UDF should reference ONLY the on-surface
Csys. They should not have any parents other than the on-surface Csys
in the model from which the UDF is created. To simplify this, create three
orthogonal datum planes through the on-surface Csys to act as a set of
“default datum planes.”
• If an on-surface Csys is included in the UDF features, the UDF setup
requires prompt creation only for the references of the Csys.

– When placing the UDF in this case, you can select references to place
the on-surface Csys in the destination model.
• If an on-surface Csys is NOT included in the UDF features, the UDF setup
requires the creation of one prompt for the selection of a coordinate system.
– When placing the UDF in this case, you have the option to create an
on-surface Csys on-the-fly.

PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs Using On-Surface
Coordinate Systems
Feature_Tools\UDF_On-Surface CREATE_UDF.PRT
Task 1: Create and place a UDF using an on-surface coordinate system.

Display types: .
2. Select CS0 from the model tree.
3. Right-click and select Edit.
This in an on-surface Csys,
and is the only parent to the
geometry for the UDF.
4. Select the Tools tab and click

UDF Library .
• Click Create, type UDF1 as
the name, and press ENTER.
5. Click Stand Alone > Done > No.
6. Select CS0, press SHIFT, and
select HOLE from the model
tree.
7. Click Done > Done/Return.
8. Press ENTER, if necessary, to
accept the default prompts.
9. Click Done/Return and OK.
10. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

11. Click Open . Select PLACE_UDF.PRT and click Open.
12. Disable Csys Display .

13. Click User-Defined Feature
from the Get Data group, select
UDF1, and click Open.
14. Click OK and select a surface to
place the on-surface Csys.
15. Drag the placement handles to
the front and right surfaces, then
position the UDF as shown.
16. Drag the additional rotation

handle to approximately 90.
• Scroll down and select the
HOLE check box.
• Disable Auto Regeneration.
• Click First Feature and
then Last Feature .
18. Enable Countersink from

the dashboard.
• Disable Counterbore .
19. Click Complete Feature to
complete the UDF.
20. Click User-Defined Feature

from the Get Data group, select
UDF1, and click Open.
21. Click OK and select a surface to
place the UDF.
References. Press CTRL and
select the top and right surfaces,
then position the UDF.

• Select the Pattern 1 check
box.
• Disable Auto Regeneration.
• Click First Feature and
then Last Feature .
24. Edit the 5 quantity to 3 in the
dashboard.
• Click Set Angular Extent .
25. Click Complete Feature to
complete the UDF.
26. Click Regenerate , if
necessary.

Creating Inheritance Features
You can transfer geometry from existing design models by
creating inheritance features.
• Transfer features from one design model to another.

• Inheritance features can be dependent or independent of the original
design model.
• Inheritance features can be edited without affecting the original design
model.
• External inheritance features can be created.
Figure 2 – Target Figure 3 – Completed

Figure 1 – Reference Part Part Inheritance Feature
Creating Inheritance Features

Inheritance features enable one-way associative propagation of geometry
and feature data from a reference part (the original, existing model) to a target
part (the new model). The created target part is fully functional, even when
the reference part is not in session, and can contain one or more inheritance
features. Inheritance features promote data reuse.
Defining Inheritance Feature Dependency

You can control whether inheritance features are dependent on the reference
part. By default, inheritance features are dependent on the reference part.
Any design changes that you make in the reference part are associatively
propagated to the dependent inheritance feature when both reference
and target parts are in the same Creo Parametric session. Independent
inheritance features do not update when the reference part is modified.
Defining Varied Items in an Inheritance Feature

By default, the geometry and data contained in the inheritance feature are
identical to the reference part from which they are derived. However, you can
define geometry items that can be varied in the inheritance features without
changing the reference part, by selecting Varied Items from the Options tab
of the dashboard. These items include dimensions, parameters, geometric
tolerances, and a suppressed or resumed state of features. You can modify
these items without having the reference part in the session.

External Inheritance Features
External inheritance features are useful when representing the evolution of a
design during manufacturing, or when creating standard design elements.
You can externalize an inheritance feature, thus creating an external
inheritance feature. The relative location of the target and reference part in
the assembly is used for placement of inheritance features in the target part.
The externalize operation removes reference to the assembly context and
enables you to use placement constraints to define placement of the external
inheritance feature in the target part. An inheritance feature created within a
part model is automatically created as an external inheritance feature.
A target part can contain one or more external inheritance features. Features
propagated from the reference part are represented in the target part as
sub-features of the external inheritance feature. You can create a reference
pattern in the target part based on the pattern of external inheritance
sub-features.
Editing External Inheritance Features

An external inheritance feature displays in the model tree as a single feature.
Expanding its node displays the features that comprise the original reference
part, as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4 – Inheritance Feature Model Tree

Editing the definition of an external inheritance feature enables you to view
the varied items for that feature and modify them accordingly in the Varied
Items dialog box. If you know the items that can be modified, you can simply
edit them in the graphics window. You cannot edit any area of the inheritance
feature that is not specified as a varied item. However, if you try to edit
a dimension within the inheritance feature that is not a varied dimension,
the system enables you to add it as a varied dimension, thus enabling you
to edit the dimension.
If you update the reference part, any dependent external inheritance feature
must be updated to reflect those changes. You can do this by right-clicking
the external inheritance feature in the model tree and selecting Update
Inheritance. A warning dialog box appears, indicating that the inheritance
will be recreated according to the current base model state and defined
modifications. The base model is the reference part.

PROCEDURE - Creating Inheritance Features
Feature_Operations\Inheritance SPROCKET.PRT
Task 1: Create an external inheritance feature in a part model.

Display types: .
2. Click Close from the
Quick Access toolbar to close
SPROCKET.PRT.
3. Click Working Directory in
the folder browser.
• Double-click INHERITANCE.
PRT from the Browser to open
it.
4. Click the Get Data group
Merge/Inheritance.
5. In the dashboard, click Open

.
6. In the Open dialog box, select
SPROCKET.PRT and click
Open.
7. Select coordinate system
SPROCKET in the
SPROCKET.PRT window.
8. Select coordinate system
SPROCKET in the
INHERITANCE.PRT window.
9. In the Component Placement
dialog box, select the Preview
check box.

10. Click Apply-Save Changes
in the Component Placement
dialog box.
11. In the dashboard, click Toggle
Inheritance .
12. Disable Csys Display .

13. Spin the model to observe it.
Task 2: Add a varied item to the inheritance feature, and update the
reference model SPROCKET.PRT.
1. Edit the definition of External

Inheritance.
Options tab.
• Click Varied Items.
3. In the SPROCKET.PRT model
tree, select the Protrusion id
5388 feature.
• Select the 8 dimension.
4. In the Varied Items dialog box,
edit the New Value to 12.
• Click OK.

6. Notice that the sprocket depth
has increased.

External Inheritance and
select Open Base. The
SPROCKET.PRT model opens.
Pattern (CUT_1) and select
Edit.
• Edit the number of cuts from
57 to 43.
regenerate.
10. Click Close to return to

INHERITANCE.PRT. Notice that
the teeth have not updated.
External Inheritance and select
Update Inheritance.
• Click OK in the Warning dialog
box.
12. Notice that the teeth have
updated.

Using External Merge to Add Material
Using the merge feature to add material, you can add geometry
from another model into the current model.
• Process
– Insert merge into target model.
– Open source model.
– “Assemble” source model into
target model.
• References:
– Annotations
– Copy Datums
• Options:
– Dependent
– Refit Datums
Figure 1 – Completed External

Merge
Figure 2 – Target Model Figure 3 – Source Model
Using External Merge to Add Material

Using the merge feature to add material, you can add geometry from another
model into the current model. You can use the external merge feature to add
solid geometry into a part model that already contains solid geometry, or you
can use the external merge feature to add solid geometry into a part with
no current solid geometry.
To use a merge feature to add material, insert the merge from the current
model to which you wish to add material (the target model), then open or
select the source model. Next, “assemble” the source model into the target
model using assembly-type constraints. Finally, toggle the Remove Material
icon, if necessary, to disable it before completing the feature.
When creating the merge feature, you must select whether to copy each of
the following from the source model:
• Annotations

• Copy Datums – If the datums are copied into the target model from the
source model, the copied datums have a “_1” suffix appended to their
names.
There are also two different options available when creating the merge
feature:
• Dependent – Controls whether the merge feature is dependent on the
source model.
• Refit Datums – Enables you to adjust the size of the copied datums. This
option is only available when you decide to copy the datums from the
source model.
There is also a Merge component operation in Assembly mode,
used to add component geometry in the current assembly.

PROCEDURE - Using External Merge to Add Material
Feature_Operations\Merge_Add-Mtl CASTING.PRT
Task 1: Use external merge to create a machined part from its casting.

Display types: .
2. Notice the model geometry.
3. Click Close .

ADD_MATL.PRT.
5. Notice that there is no geometry.
6. Click the Get Data group
Merge/Inheritance.
7. In the dashboard, click Open
and double-click CASTING.PRT.

8. Resize and reposition the
accessory window, if necessary.
check box.
• Edit the Constraint Type
to Default and click
Apply-Save Changes .
Options tab.
• Notice that the Dependent
check box is selected.
12. Notice that the target model
seems identical to the source
model.
13. In the model tree, notice the
External Merge feature.
14. Click File > Options.

15. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, click Model Display and
select Show silhouette edges to enable it.
16. Click Entity Display and select Show smooth lines, if necessary.
17. Click OK and then No in the warning dialog box.
18. Select one surface of the model,

then right-click and select Solid
Surfaces.
19. Select the View tab and click the
Appearance Gallery drop-down
menu.
20. From the Library section, select
the ptc-std-steel appearance.

21. Select the Model tab.
22. Click Revolve from the Shapes group, then right-click and select
Remove Material.
23. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree as the Sketch plane.
24. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

25. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Model
Display types drop-down menu.

.
27. Click References from the

Setup group and select the three
additional vertical references.
Datum group and sketch the
centerline.
29. Sketch and dimension as shown.
30. Click OK .
31. Select Shading from the

menu and click Change Material
Direction .
32. Click Complete Feature
and spin the model to view the
underside.
34. Click File > Options.

35. Click Entity Display and disable Show smooth lines.
36. Click OK and then No in the warning dialog box.

37. Click Hole from the
Engineering group and select the
flange surface.

• Press CTRL and select datum
planes RIGHT and FRONT
Placement tab.
• Edit the Offset for datum plane
RIGHT to 22.
• Edit the Offset for datum plane
FRONT to Align.
40. Edit the diameter to 4 and the
depth to Through All .
42. With the hole still selected, click

Pattern from the Editing
group.
43. Edit the pattern type to Axis and
select the datum axis running
through the model.
44. Accept the default options and
45. Disable Plane Display and
Axis Display .

46. Right-click the External Merge
feature and select Open Base.
Edit.
48. Edit the diameter from 10 to 20
49. Click Close .
50. Click Regenerate . Notice

that the hole diameter updated.

Using External Merge to Remove Material
Using the merge feature to remove material, you can subtract
geometry in another model from the current model.
• Process:
– Insert merge into target model.
– Open source model.
– “Assemble” source model into
target model.
– Toggle on Remove Material
icon.
• References:
– Annotations
– Copy Datums
• Options:
– Dependent Figure 1 – Completed External
– Refit Datums Merge
Figure 2 – Target Model Figure 3 – Source Model
Using External Merge to Remove Material

Using the merge feature to remove material, you can subtract geometry in
another model from the current model. You can use the external merge
feature to remove solid geometry from a part model that already contains
solid geometry.
To use a merge feature to remove material, insert the merge from the current
model to which you wish to remove material (the target model), then open or
select the source model. Next, “assemble” the source model into the target
model using assembly-type constraints. Finally, toggle the Remove Material
icon, if necessary, to enable it before completing the feature.
When creating the merge feature, you must select whether to copy each of
the following from the source model:
• Annotations
• Copy Datums – If the datums are copied into the target model from the
source model, the copied datums have a “_1” suffix appended to their
names.

There are also two different options available when creating the merge
feature:
• Dependent – Controls whether the merge feature is dependent on the
source model.
• Refit Datums – Enables you to adjust the size of the copied datums. This
option is only available when you decide to copy the datums from the
source model.
There is also a Cutout component operation in Assembly mode,
used to subtract component geometry in the current assembly.

PROCEDURE - Using External Merge to Remove Material
Feature_Operations\Merge_Remove-Mtl LATCH.PRT
Task 1: Use external merge to remove material from a part model.

2. Notice the model geometry.
3. Click Close .
4. Click Open , select REMOVE_MATL.PRT, and click Open.

5. Click the Get Data group drop-down menu and select
Merge/Inheritance.
6. In the dashboard, click Open , select LATCH.PRT, and click Open.
7. Resize and reposition the

accessory window, if necessary.
check box.
• Edit the Constraint Type to
Default .
• Click Apply-Save Changes
.

Options tab.
• Notice that the Dependent
check box is selected.
10. Click Remove Material .

12. Click View Manager from
the In Graphics toolbar and
select the Sections tab.
• Right-click Xsec0001 and
select Show Section.
• Click Close.
14. In the model tree, right-click the

External Cut Out feature and
select Open Base.
Edit.
16. Edit the thickness from 1.5 to 3.5
17. Click Close twice.

SEAT_BELT.ASM, and click
Open.
that the cut out geometry has
been updated.

Module 17
Advanced Copy
Module Overview
Creo Parametric enables you to create copies of features and groups using
various advanced options. You can copy features so that they are still
dependent on the original, but alter certain aspects of the copied feature to
make it different than the original. You can also copy features and replace
their references to move them to different locations.
Objectives
• Configure the independency of dimensions and sections.
• Perform advanced reference configuration on features.
• Copy features fully dependent with options to vary.

Configuring Independency
You can edit the dependency of specific areas of a dependently
copied feature.
• Make a dimension independent
– All other aspects still dependent.
• Make a section independent
– Depth still dependent.
Figure 1 – Creating Dependent

Copies
Figure 2 – Dimension Independent

Height Figure 3 – Section Independent
Configuring Independency
There are two different methods you can use to edit the dependency of a
dependently copied feature:
• Make Dimension Independent – You can break the dependence of any
of the copied feature's dimensions by selecting the dimension, then
right-clicking and selecting Make Dim Indep. All other aspects of the
copied feature remain dependent on the original feature. For example, in
Figure 2, the dependently copied feature's height dimension has been
made independent of the original. Consequently, when the height of the
original feature is modified, the copied feature's height remains unchanged.
However, notice that when the width of the original feature is modified, the
copied feature's width increases also.
• Make Section Independent – You can break the dependence of the copied
feature section by selecting the copied feature, then right-clicking and
selecting Make Sec Indep. This enables you to edit any dimension in the
copied feature's section independently of the original feature. However, the
copied feature's depth is still dependent on the original value. For example,
in Figure 3, the section of the highlighted dependently copied feature has

been made independent. Consequently, if the original feature's section
width is modified, the copied feature's section width remains unchanged.
However, notice that when the height of the original feature is modified, the
copied feature's height increases also.

PROCEDURE - Configuring Independency
Feature_Operations\Config_Indep INDEPENDENCY.PRT
Task 1: Move and rotate copied features, then configure independency

on those copied features.

Display types: .
3. Click Copy from the
Operations group.
4. Click Paste Special from the

Paste types drop-down menu.
check box and click OK.
the model tree and edit the offset
value to 3.

check box, and click OK.
the model tree and edit the offset
value to 3.

Move.
12. Right-click and select Rotate.
13. Select the datum axis in the
original feature, and edit the
offset angle to 90.

15. Disable Plane Display and Axis Display .

Edit.
• Edit the feature height to 3.
• Edit the feature width to 1.5.
regenerate. The feature width
and height of all three features
updates.

Extrude 2 (3) and select Edit.
19. Select the 3 height dimension,
then right-click and select Make
Dim Indep.
• Select feature Extrude 2 (2).
• Click OK in the Select dialog
box.
20. Edit the feature height of Extrude
2 (2) to 2 and click twice in the
window to regenerate. Only that
feature's height updates.

Extrude 2 (3) and select Make
Sec Indep.
• Edit the feature width to 1.
• Click twice in the background
regenerate. Notice that the
width of Extrude 2 (3) remains
unchanged.

• Edit the feature height to 4.
• Click twice in the background
regenerate.
24. Notice that the height of Extrude
2 (2) remains unchanged
because its height dimension
was made independent.
25. Notice that the height of Extrude
2 (3) updates even though its
section was made independent.

Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration
You can utilize advanced reference configuration to copy
features by changing the placement references of the original
feature.
• Map references from original

feature to copied feature.
– Select a replacement reference
– Use original reference
– Used By
• Define alternate orientation.
Figure 1 – Advanced Reference

Configuration Dialog Box
Figure 2 – Selecting a Replacement

Reference Figure 3 – Copied Group
Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration

You can utilize advanced reference configuration to copy features by changing
the placement references of the original feature. This is done by mapping
references of the original feature to new references for the copied feature.
When you enable advanced reference configuration in the Paste Special
dialog box, the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box opens and
displays all the original feature's placement references in a list. You can
now replace the original placement references with new ones for the copied
feature, or keep some of the original references.
When you select any of the original feature's placement references from
the list, the reference highlights in the graphics window. Also, the Used By
field in the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box displays which
other features use this reference. You can either replace that reference by

selecting a different reference, or you can select the Use Original Reference
check box, which forces the system to use the reference from the original
feature for the copied feature.
If there are alternate orientation options for placing the copied feature, the
Preview dialog box opens. The Preview dialog box displays which items can
have more than one orientation. You can select the desired item and flip its
orientation.
Advanced reference configuration settings do not enable you to edit
dimension values associated with the references. For example, if the offset to
a given datum plane is 10 in the original feature, you cannot edit the copied
feature's offset during the advanced reference configuration procedure.
Depending on the dependency you specified for the copied feature, you can
edit the offset value after the copy has been created.
When you perform advanced reference configuration, you cannot
apply move or rotate transformations to the copies.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Advanced Reference
Configuration
Feature_Operations\Adv_Ref_Config ADV_REF_CONFIG.PRT
Task 1: Use advanced reference configuration to copy a group.

2. Select Group TAB1 from the model tree.
3. Click Copy from the Operations group.
4. Select Paste Special from the Paste types drop-down menu.

5. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Advanced reference
configuration check box and click OK.
6. In the Advanced Reference

Configuration dialog box, select
each of the four references
to highlight the corresponding
geometry.
• Click Apply Changes .
7. In the Preview dialog box, click
Apply Changes to accept
the default orientation.
8. Notice that the copy is created
coincident with the original.
9. De-select all geometry and

rename Group TAB1_1 to
TAB2.
10. Right-click Group TAB2 and
select Edit.
11. Select the 80 dimension, then
right-click and select Make Dim
Indep.
• Click Yes in the Confirmation
dialog box.
12. Edit the 80 dimension to 140 and
regenerate.

13. Select Group TAB1. Click Copy and click Paste Special .

the first reference RIGHT and
select datum plane MOUNT_2
• Select the second reference
SURF and select the left
vertical cylindrical surface.
• Select the third reference
TOP_2 and select datum
plane MOUNT.
16. Click Apply Changes .

17. In the Preview dialog box, click
Apply Changes .
18. De-select all geometry and
rename Group TAB1_1 to
TAB3.
19. Click Plane Display to
disable their display.
20. Select Group TAB1. Click Copy and click Paste Special .

the first reference RIGHT and
select datum plane MOUNT_2
• Select the second reference
SURF and select the right
vertical cylindrical surface.
• Select the third reference
TOP_2 and select datum
plane MOUNT_3 from the
model tree.

23. Click Apply Changes .
24. In the Preview dialog box, select
the Offset direction and click
Flip.
• Select the Section
Orientation and click Flip.
• Click Apply Changes .

Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options
to Vary
You can create copies of features that are fully dependent on the
original but vary in specified ways.
• Denoted in model tree with

'Copied' prefix.
• Right-click to access Copied
Feature menu:
– Varied Items
– Break Dependence
– Remove Dependence
Figure 1 – Copied Feature with

Varied Dimensions
Figure 2 – Copied Feature in

the Model Tree Figure 3 – Varied Items Dialog Box
Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options to Vary

By default, when you copy a feature dependently using Paste Special,
only dimensions and annotation element details of the resulting copy are
dependent on the original. Selecting the Fully Dependent with options to
vary option in the Paste Special dialog box enables you to create a feature
copy that is fully dependent on the original. However, you can also specify
items to vary in the copied feature.
The fully dependent copied feature is identified in the model tree by its prefix
'Copied'; for example, Copied Extrude 3, as shown in Figure 2. Initially, this
copied feature is created directly on top of the original feature in the graphics
window. However, you can now vary options of the copied feature. When
you right-click the copied feature, the following options are available in the
Copied feature menu selection:

• Varied Items – Enables you to edit the dependency of specific copied
feature elements including Dimensions, References, 3D Notes, and
Parameters. Each feature element specified is placed in the Varied Items
dialog box. Within the Varied Items dialog box you can view the original
value, and you can specify the new value of the feature element within
the copied feature, as shown in Figure 3. An alternate method of adding
dimensions to the Varied Items dialog box is to simply edit the feature and
double-click the dimension you wish to vary. The system warns you that
the dimension is to be added to the Varied Items table.
• Break Dependence – Makes the copied feature temporarily independent
of the original feature. This enables you to make changes to the copied
feature or original feature while not affecting the other. You can then
restore the dependency between the original feature and copied feature
after the desired changes have been made.
• Remove Dependence – Permanently breaks the link between the copied
feature and the original feature. The copied feature becomes independent
of the original feature.

PROCEDURE - Copying Features Fully Dependent with
Options to Vary
Feature_Operations\Vary_Options
FULL_DEP_VARY-OPTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Copy a feature fully dependent and vary its dimensions.

2. Select Extrude 2 and click Copy
from the Operations group.

select the Fully Dependent with
options to vary option.
• Click OK.
5. Notice the feature name in the
model tree.
6. Notice that the copied feature is
coincident with the original.

Copied Extrude 3 and select
Copied feature > Varied items.
the 2 feature length dimension,
the 4.5 distance dimension, and
the 1 feature width dimension.
9. Notice each dimension in the
Varied Items dialog box.
10. Middle-click to finish selecting
items.

edit New Value for the 2.000 Orig
Value to 2.5.
• Edit the New Value for the
4.500 Orig Value to 1.75.
• Edit the New Value for the
1.000 Orig Value to 2.00.
• Click OK.

Copied feature > Break
dependence.
model tree.
Edit.
15. Edit the height from 1 to 3 and
regenerate.

Extrude 3 and select Copied
feature > Restore dependence.
model tree.
18. Notice the copied feature height.

Copied feature > Varied items.
edit the 2.500 New Value to 3.
• Click OK.

Copied feature > Remove
dependence.
22. Read the contents of the Warning
dialog box and click Yes.
24. Edit the height from 1 to 3 and
regenerate.
25. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 3 and notice that there is no
Copied feature selection.

Module 18
Advanced Patterns
Module Overview
Creo Parametric enables you to create complex patterns of features by using
various advanced options such as Curve pattern, Fill pattern, and pattern
tables. You can use pattern tables if your design calls for irregular patterns
of features, components, or groups of features. Using pattern tables, you
can specify unique dimensions for each instance in the pattern. Multiple
tables can be established for a pattern, enabling you to change the pattern
by switching the table that drives it. You can also perform editing operations
such as unpatterning. You can even move and mirror patterns, and create
patterns of patterns.
Objectives
• Understand pattern regeneration options.
• Create dimensional patterns in one and two directions.
• Create rotational dimension patterns in one and two directions.
• Create fill patterns and specify fill pattern settings.
• Create and apply pattern tables.
• Create curve patterns.
• Create point patterns.
• Understand how to unpattern patterned members.
• Create patterns of patterns.
• Move and mirror patterns.

Understanding Pattern Regeneration Options
The three types of pattern regeneration are a trade-off between
robustness and regeneration speed.
Pattern regeneration options:

• General
– Default regen option
– Most robust
– Slowest regen speed
• Variable
• Identical
– Least robust
– Fastest regen speed Figure 1 – General Pattern
Figure 2 – Variable Pattern Figure 3 – Identical Pattern
Understanding Pattern Regeneration Options

There are three types of regeneration options when creating a pattern. The
three regeneration types are a trade-off between robustness and regeneration
speed. The three types of pattern regeneration option are:
• General – Patterns are the most robust, but take the longest to regenerate.
All patterns are created as General by default. For the general pattern
regeneration option, the pattern members may intersect each other and
other features. In Figure 1, the pattern must be a general pattern because
its members intersect both themselves and other geometry.
• Variable – Patterns' members cannot intersect each other, but may intersect
other features. In Figure 2, the pattern can be set to variable because its
pattern members do not intersect, but it does intersect other features. This
pattern can also be set to general, but cannot be set to identical.
• Identical – Patterns are the least robust, but regenerate the fastest. For
the identical pattern regeneration option, the pattern members must be
identical to the original pattern leader. They cannot intersect each other,
nor can they intersect other features. This option automatically becomes
grayed out if the pattern leader intersects other features. In Figure 3, the
pattern can be set to identical because its pattern members do not intersect
each other or other features.

Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction
The dimension pattern enables you to linearly pattern features in
a given direction.
• Direction and increments based

on selected dimension.
• Dimension must be in feature or in
another feature within the group.
• Select a first direction dimension
and specify the increment.
• Specify number of members.
• Specify additional, optional
dimensions to increment.
Figure 1 – Dimension Patterning

an Extrude in One Direction
Figure 2 – Editing the Dimension Pattern and Pattern Leader
Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction

The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features linearly in a given
direction. The following items are required to create a dimension pattern
in one direction:
• Specify a First Direction dimension – The pattern extends in a direction
based on the dimension selected. The dimension selected must belong
to the feature being patterned, or, in the case of a group, belong to a
feature in the group. In Figure 1, the first direction dimension specified is
the 1 distance dimension.
• Specify the increment in the first direction – The increment is the spacing
between pattern members. When you select the dimension reference, you
must specify the increment to be used. You can edit the increment in the
Dimensions tab in the dashboard.
• Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction – Type the
number of members in the dashboard. The number of pattern members
includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the left-most image has four

pattern members, while in the image second from the left, the number
of pattern members is six.
Make sure to select a distance dimension when specifying the
direction dimension. If you select a dimension that denotes the
width or height of the feature you are patterning, all pattern
instances are created directly on top of the pattern leader, because
it is the width or height dimension that is being incremented rather
than the distance between pattern members.
Incrementing Additional Dimensions

You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the
same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to
increment additional dimensions in the first direction:
• Select additional dimensions to be incremented from the pattern leader –
The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.
• Specify the increment value – In Figure 2, the extrude feature height was
incremented 0.5. Consequently, each pattern member's height increases
0.5 over the previous pattern member.
Make sure to press CTRL when specifying additional dimensions
to be patterned. If you do not press CTRL, the original dimension
that was selected for patterning is replaced with the newly selected
dimension.

PROCEDURE - Creating Dimension Patterns in One
Direction
Pattern\Dim_Pattern_1st DIM_PATTERN_1ST.PRT
Task 1: Dimension pattern an extrude feature in one direction.

2. Select Extrude 2 and click
group.
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern
type to Dimension, if necessary.
4. Select the 1 distance dimension.
• Edit the spacing to 2.
5. Edit the number of members to
4.
7. With the Pattern feature still

selected, right-click and select
Edit.
8. Edit the number of patterned
extrudes from 4 to 6.
regenerate.

10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of
Extrude 2.
Dimensions tab.
• Click in the Direction 1
Dimension collector.
• Press CTRL and select the 1
height dimension.
• Edit the increment to 0.5.


pattern feature.
15. Select the pattern leader, then
16. Edit the width from 2 to 3.
regenerate.

Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions
The dimension pattern enables you to linearly pattern features in
a given direction.

on selected dimensions.
• Select a first and second direction
dimension and specify the
increments.
• Specify number of members in first
and second directions.
• Specify additional, optional Figure 1 – Dimension Patterning
dimensions to increment. a Group in Two Directions
Figure 3 – Dimension Pattern, Two

Figure 2 – Dimension Patterning a Directions, Three Additional
Group in Two Directions Result Dimensions
Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions

The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features linearly in two
directions. The following items are required to create a dimension pattern
in two directions:
• Specify the First and Second Direction dimensions – The pattern extends in
the directions based on the dimension references selected. In Figure 1, the
first direction dimension reference specified is the 2 distance dimension,
and the second direction dimension reference specified is the 1 distance
dimension.
• Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions – The increment
is the spacing between pattern members. When you select the dimension
reference, you must specify the increment to be used for that direction.
You can edit the increment in the Dimensions tab in the dashboard. The
increment can be different between the first and second directions. In
Figure 2, the first direction increment is 2.5, while the second direction
increment is 2.0.
• Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions
– Type the number of members in the dashboard. Again, the number of
pattern members can be different for each direction. The number of pattern

members includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the first direction has four
pattern members, while the second direction has five pattern members.
Be sure to select distance dimensions when specifying the direction
dimensions. If you select dimensions that denote the width or
height of the feature you are patterning, all pattern instances are
created directly on top of the pattern leader, because it is the width
or height dimension that is being incremented rather than the
distance between pattern members.

You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,
or both, at the same time to create a “varying” pattern. The following items are
required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:
The dimensions selected can be different for each direction.
• Specify the increment value – Again, the increment value for each direction
can be different. In Figure 3, the extrude feature width was incremented
by -0.2 in the first direction, the radius dimension was incremented 0.075
in the first direction, and the extrude feature height was incremented 0.5
in the second direction. Consequently, each pattern member's width
decreases by 0.20 in the first direction and the height increases by 0.5 in
the second direction over the previous pattern member. Additionally, each
pattern member's radius increases by 0.075 in the first direction.
Be sure to press CTRL when specifying additional dimensions to
be patterned. If you do not press CTRL, the original dimension
dimension.

PROCEDURE - Creating Dimension Patterns in Two
Directions
Pattern\Dim_Pattern_2nd DIM_PATTERN_2ND.PRT
Task 1: Dimension pattern an extrude feature in two directions.

2. Press CTRL, and select Extrude
2 and Round 1.
3. Right-click and select Group.
4. Rename the group to OVAL.
5. Select Group OVAL and click

group.
7. Select the 2 distance dimension
as the first direction reference.
• Edit the spacing increment to
2.50.
4.

Direction 2 Reference collector.
• Select the 1 distance
dimension as the second
direction reference.
• Edit the second direction
spacing increment to 2.
number of members to 5.

OVAL.
Dimensions tab.
• Press CTRL and select the 2
extrude width dimension.
• Edit the increment to -0.20.
• Press CTRL and select the R
0.1 radius dimension and edit
the increment to 0.075.
13. In the Dimensions tab of the

dashboard, click in the Direction
2 Dimension collector.
14. Press CTRL and select the 1
extrude height dimension and
edit the increment to 0.50.

pattern feature.
17. Select the pattern leader, then
18. Edit the width from 1 to 0.75.
regenerate.

Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns
The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features angularly
and radially.

on selected dimension.
• Dimension must be in feature or in
another feature within the group.
• Select a first and second direction
dimension and specify the
increment.
• Specify number of members in
each direction.
• Specify additional, optional Figure 1 – Dimension Patterning
dimensions to increment. an Extrude in One Direction
Figure 2 – Dimension Pattern in Two Directions and Incre-

menting Additional Dimensions
Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns

The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features both angularly and
radially in a given direction. The following items are required to create a
rotational dimension pattern in two directions:
• Specify the First and Second Direction dimensions – The pattern extends
in the directions based on the dimensions selected. The dimension
selected must belong to the feature being patterned. In the case of a
group, the dimension selected must belong to a feature in the group. In
Figure 1, the first direction dimension specified is the 30 degree dimension.
In Figure 2, the second direction dimension specified causes the pattern
to extend outward. When creating a rotational dimension pattern of a
sketch-based feature (such as extrude), use a datum plane to create the
angle dimension. Do NOT use an angle dimension from a centerline in
the sketch for patterning. Unlike datum planes, centerlines do not have a
distinct positive and negative side that the system can use to correctly
determine the angular pattern dimension.
• Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions – The increment
is the spacing between pattern members. When you select the dimension
reference, you must specify the increment to be used. You can edit
the increment in the Dimensions tab in the dashboard. In Figure 1, the
increment is 45 degrees. In Figure 2, the increment was edited from 45

degrees to 90 degrees in the first direction, and set at 2.5 in the second
direction.
• Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions
– Type the number of members in the dashboard. The number of pattern
members includes the pattern leader. The number of pattern members can
be different for each direction. In Figure 2, the left and center images have
eight pattern members in the first direction, and the right image has four
pattern members in the first direction. There are three pattern members in
the second direction.

You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,
or both, at the same time to create a “varying” pattern. The following items are
required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:
The dimensions selected can be different for each direction. In Figure 2,
the left hole diameter is incremented in the first direction by 0.075. The
right hole diameter, feature height, and angle are also incremented. It is
important to note that the same 30 degree dimension was incremented in
both directions, which results in the pinwheel effect.
• Specify the increment value – Again, the increment value for each direction
can be different. In Figure 2, the 30 degree dimension was incremented
45 degrees in the first direction and the same 30 degree dimension was
incremented 10 degrees in the second direction. In the right image, the
increment was edited to 90 degrees.
Be sure to press CTRL when specifying additional dimensions to
be patterned. If you do not press CTRL, the original dimension
dimension.

PROCEDURE - Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns
Pattern\Rot_Dim_Pattern ROT_DIM_PATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Create a rotational dimension pattern in two directions.

Display types: .
2. Press CTRL and select ANGLE,
Extrude 2, Hole 1, and Hole 2.
3. Right-click and select Group.
4. Rename the group to TAB.
5. Select Group TAB and click

group.
7. Select the 30 dimension as the
first direction reference.
• Edit the spacing angle to 45.
8. Edit the number of members in
the first direction to 8.

TAB.
spacing increment to 2.5.


TAB.
Dimensions tab.
• Zoom in, press CTRL, and
select the left 0.25 hole
diameter dimension. Edit the
increment to 0.075.
16. In the Dimensions tab of the

dashboard, click in the Direction
2 Dimension collector.
• Press CTRL, select the right
0.25 hole diameter dimension,
and edit the increment to 0.25.
• Press CTRL, select the 1
height dimension, and edit the
increment to 1.
• Press CTRL, select the 30
degree angle dimension, and
edit the increment to 10.

Orientation.

19. Right-click Pattern 1 of TAB and
select Edit.
20. Edit the pattern from 8 LOCAL
GROUPS to 4.
21. Edit the 45 dimension to 90.
regenerate.

Creating Geometry Patterns
You can select geometry, not features, and use Geometry Pattern
to pattern it.
• Create geometry patterns using any

conventional pattern type except for
Dimension patterns.
• Use cases:
– Pattern resultant geometry from
multiple features.
– Features to be patterned are not
consecutive in the model tree.
– Pattern geometry exists on
imported geometry not in
conventional features.
Figure 1 – Geometry Selected
from Multiple Features
Figure 3 – Viewing the Completed

Figure 2 – Creating a Geometry Pattern Geometry Pattern
Creating Geometry Patterns

You can select geometry, not features, and use Geometry Pattern to pattern
it. You can select surfaces using any method, including manually, seed and
boundary, and so on. You can create geometry patterns using any of the
conventional pattern types available, except for Dimension patterns.
Geometry patterns are useful in the following cases where:
• Resulting geometry from multiple features is to be patterned.
• Features to be patterned are not consecutive in the model tree, and
therefore cannot be easily grouped.
• Geometry to be patterned exists on imported geometry that does not have
conventional features.
The resulting feature creates a pattern of copy geometry surface features,
and therefore does not include the pattern leader in the geometry pattern

branch in the model tree. However, the total quantity of the pattern is
maintained as in a typical feature pattern.
Geometry pattern functionality is technically not new for Creo
Parametric, but it is easier to find. It was available in Creo
Elements/Pro 5.0 (formerly Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 5.0), although
only from the Edit menu and not via the pattern icon from the
feature toolbar.

PROCEDURE - Creating Geometry Patterns
Pattern\Geometry GEOM_PATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Investigate and select geometry to be patterned.

2. Press CTRL and select Hole 1
and Extrude 2 from the model
tree.
3. The geometry that these features
create is to be patterned,
however the features are not
consecutive.
4. Press ALT to directly select the

surface.

boundary surface.
6. Release SHIFT and notice the

resulting surface selection.

Task 2: Create a geometry pattern.
1. With the surfaces still selected,

from the Editing group select
Geometry Pattern from the
Pattern types drop-down menu.
2. Select the front face of the
model.
3. In the dashboard, click Flip

Pattern Direction .
4. Edit the number of members to 3
and edit the spacing to 250.

6. Notice that the pattern in
the model tree contains two
instances, but the total pattern
quantity is three.

Creating Fill Patterns
A fill pattern fills the area of a sketch with the specified feature
or group.
• Select or define a Sketch feature

for “filling.”
• Fill spacing types include:
– Square
– Diamond
– Hexagon
– Circle
– Spiral Figure 1 – Square Fill Pattern
– Curve
• Fill options:
– Spacing
– Boundary Spacing
– Grid Rotation
– Radial Spacing
Figure 2 – Circle Fill Pattern
Figure 3 – Spiral Fill Pattern Figure 4 – Curve Fill Pattern
Creating Fill Patterns

A fill pattern fills in the area of a selected sketch feature with the feature or
group of features you wish to pattern. The sketch feature defines the outline
for “filling.” You can either select an existing sketch or define a new, internal
sketch. If the shape or size of the sketch feature referenced by the Fill pattern
is edited, the pattern updates.
Fill Pattern Spacing Types

The following fill pattern spacing types are available:
• Square Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a square pattern.
• Diamond Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a diamond

pattern.
• Hexagon Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a hexagon
pattern.

• Circle Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a concentric circle
pattern.
• Spiral Spacing – Spaces the pattern members in a spiral pattern.

• Curve Spacing – Spaces the pattern members along the specified
sketch feature.
Fill Options
Once the fill pattern type has been specified, you can edit the following fill
options:
• Pattern Spacing – Sets the spacing between pattern member centers.
• Pattern Boundary Spacing – Sets the minimum distance between

the pattern member centers and the sketch boundary. Negative values
enable centers to lie outside the sketch.
• Pattern Grid Rotation – Sets the grid rotation angle about the origin.
The origin is the location of the pattern leader.
• Pattern Radial Spacing – Sets the radial spacing. Available only for
Circular and Spiral fill pattern types.

PROCEDURE - Creating Fill Patterns
Pattern\Fill_Pattern FILL_PATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Experiment with the different fill pattern spacing types and options.

group.
type to Fill.
4. Select Sketch 2 from the model
tree.
5. Edit the Pattern Spacing to
1.5.

Extrude 2.
8. Edit the Pattern Grid Rotation
to 45.

Extrude 2.
11. Edit the Pattern Boundary
Spacing to 1.

Extrude 2.
14. Select Hexagon Spacing
from the Spacing types
drop-down menu.
15. Edit the Pattern Boundary
Spacing back to 0.
16. Edit the Pattern Grid Rotation
back to 0.

Extrude 2.
19. Select Circle Spacing from
the Spacing types drop-down
menu.
20. Edit the Pattern Radial Spacing
to 2.5.

Extrude 2.
23. Select Spiral Spacing from
menu.
24. Edit the Pattern Radial Spacing
to 2.
25. Select Curve Spacing from

menu.
26. Edit the Pattern Spacing to
2.
27. De-select the pattern leader
dot and the two corner pattern
members.

Specifying Fill Pattern Settings
Fill pattern settings can be edited to affect how the resulting
fill pattern geometry appears.
Options include:
• Use alternate origin
• Follow leader location
• Follow surface shape
– Follow surface direction
– Spacing
♦ As projected
♦ Map to Surface space
♦ Map to Surface UV space
Figure 1 – Using an Alternate Origin
Figure 2 – Follow Surface Shape: Follow Surface Direc-

tion Enabled and Disabled
Specifying Fill Pattern Settings

Once you have specified a Fill pattern, you can set some options to affect
how the resulting geometry appears.
Use Alternate Origin

The default origin specified for a fill pattern is the pattern leader center.
The resulting pattern members are created based on this location. You can
specify an alternate origin location using the Use alternate origin option.
Selecting an alternate origin enables the system to recalculate the pattern
member arrangement as if the pattern leader were in that newly specified
origin. Note that the pattern leader is not actually relocated to the newly
specified origin; instead, the pattern remains in the alternate arrangement,
but the system adjusts the pattern placement to be centered on the pattern
leader. You can select any one of the following as the alternative origin:
• Datum points
• Coordinate systems
• A vertex

• The end of a sketched curve
You can only select features created before the pattern leader as
the alternative origin.
Follow Leader Location

With Follow leader location enabled, the system offsets pattern members
from the sketch plane of the fill curve by the same distance as the leader.
With the option disabled, the system centers the pattern members around the
sketch plane of the fill curve.
Follow Surface Shape

You can configure the pattern members to follow a surface contour by
enabling the Follow surface shape option. In the images of Figure 2, the
pattern members move up and down with respect to the surface shape
specified.
You can then control the instance orientation to follow the surface direction,
if desired. Enabling the Follow surface direction option ensures that each
pattern member is oriented to follow the surface, as shown in the left image of
Figure 2. Disabling the Follow surface direction option ensures that all pattern
members have a constant orientation on the selected surface, but will still
relocate according to the shape of the surface. The orientation of all members
is the same as the pattern leader, as shown in the right image of Figure 2.
Spacing Options
When using the Follow surface shape option, you have the following spacing
options available:
• As projected
• Map to surface space
• Map to surface UV space

PROCEDURE - Specifying Fill Pattern Settings
Pattern\Fill_Settings FILL_PATT_SETTINGS.PRT
Task 1: Create a fill pattern and specify an alternate origin.

2. Select EXTRUDE_1 and click
group.
3. Edit the pattern type to Fill.
• Select SKETCH_1.
• Edit the Pattern Spacing
to 1.5.
• Edit the Pattern Boundary
Spacing to 1.0.
4. Select Diamond Spacing

from the spacing types
drop-down menu.

select BOTTOM.
6. Notice that the pattern is
using the leader as the pattern
origin, and therefore it is not
symmetrical within the sketch.
7. Enable Point Display .

Options tab.
• Select the Use alternate
origin check box.
• Select datum point PNT0 as
the new origin.
• Notice that the pattern is now
using the point as the pattern
origin, and is symmetrical
within the sketch.

10. Select SKETCH_1 to view it.
• Notice that the pattern remains
in the alternate arrangement,
but the system has adjusted
the pattern placement to be
centered on the pattern leader.
11. Disable Point Display .
Task 2: Create a fill pattern and make it follow a surface shape.

2. Select EXTRUDE_2 and click
Pattern .
3. Edit the pattern type to Fill.
• Select SKETCH_2.
• Edit the Pattern Spacing
to 2.00.
• Edit the Pattern Boundary
Spacing to 0, if necessary.

SHAPE and select Unhide.
6. Right-click Pattern 2 of
EXTRUDE_2 and select Edit
Definition.
Options tab.
• Enable Follow surface
shape.
• Select the surface quilt.
direction, if necessary.
Notice that all pattern
members follow the
specified surface contour.
9. Right-click Pattern 2 of
EXTRUDE_2 and select Edit
Definition.
Options tab.
• Disable Follow surface
direction.
Notice that all pattern
members are now facing in
the same orientation as the
pattern leader, but they still
follow the specified surface
contour.

Creating Pattern Tables
You can create complex or irregular patterns of features,
components, or groups using pattern tables.
• Specify the dimensions for the

table.
– Table Dimensions tab
• Edit the table using Pro/TABLE.
– Exit and Save
– Quit does not save
Figure 1 – Table Dimensions Tab
Figure 2 – Pro/TABLE Editor Figure 3 – Created Table Pattern
Creating Pattern Tables

A pattern table is a pattern created by specifying pattern instances in a tabular
format within Creo Parametric's Pro/TABLE editor. You can create complex
or irregular patterns of features, components, or groups using pattern tables.
Using pattern tables, you can also control the location of individual instances
by specifying absolute dimensions for each instance in the pattern to the
same reference, such as the pattern leader.
You can use pattern tables in Assembly mode to pattern assembly features
and components. Pattern tables do not act as family tables. Pattern tables
can only drive pattern dimensions. You have to unpattern the members to
make them independent. You can also include pattern tables in family tables,
so a particular family instance can use a specified pattern table.

Specifying the Dimensions for the Table
A pattern table is similar to a family table. Within a family table you must
specify the items you wish to vary from instance to instance. Within a pattern
table you must specify the feature dimensions you wish to vary from pattern
member to pattern member. For example, if you know a hole feature's
diameter must change for different pattern members, you must specify that
hole diameter dimension to be varied in the pattern table. Or, if you know
the pattern members must grow vertically, you must specify the feature
dimension that enables this direction of pattern member growth. Pressing
CTRL enables you to add multiple dimensions to the pattern table. The
added dimensions can be viewed within the Table Dimensions tab of the
dashboard, as shown in Figure 1.
Editing the Table using the Pro/TABLE Editor

When you edit the pattern table, the system launches the Pro/TABLE editor
with the Table Dimensions you have specified, as shown in Figure 2. Each
Table Dimension is placed in its own column, in the order it was selected.
The system automatically creates the first column with a header name of idx.
This is simply an index number for the pattern members, and begins with a
value of 1. Each pattern member must contain an index number, and each
index number must be unique. The pattern table starts numbering at zero
(for the lead instance) but does not display this instance in the table since it
cannot be modified using the table.
Each pattern member resides in its own row in the Pro/TABLE editor. Edit the
Table Dimensions as desired for each pattern member. Specifying a value
of “*” causes that pattern instance's Table Dimension to be equivalent to
that of the pattern leader. Distance values are measured from the pattern
leader. When finished editing the pattern table, you must click File > Exit
from the Pro/TABLE editor to save the table and return to Creo Parametric.
File > Quit aborts all changes.
It can be beneficial to create the pattern as a Dimension pattern first,

and then edit the definition of the Dimension pattern and edit its type
to Table. Doing this automatically propagates the pattern table with
all pattern members from the Dimension pattern and the dimension
values used. Pattern member rows can then be deleted from the
table and additional Table Dimensions can be added.
You can modify a table pattern at any time after you create the pattern. When
editing table patterns, it is important to understand the difference between
variable and invariable dimensions. Variable dimensions are those that
are listed in the pattern table and can vary from one instance to another.
All other dimensions of the patterned feature are invariable. All instances
share the same value for invariable dimensions. Any change to a variable
dimension affects only the instance that contains that variable dimension and
the table updates with the new value. Any change you make to an invariable
dimension affects all instances.
Suppressing or deleting a table-driven pattern suppresses or
deletes the pattern leader.

PROCEDURE - Creating Pattern Tables
Pattern\Create_Pat_Table PATTERN_TEMPLATE.PRT
Task 1: Create a pattern template on a part model.

2. Select Hole 1 and click Pattern
from the Editing group.
type to Table.
• Select the Table Dimensions
tab.
7.5, 8, and 3 dimensions,
respectively.
4. Notice that these dimensions are
added to the Table Dimensions
tab.

Tables tab.
• Click in the Name field, edit
the table name to HOLES, and
press ENTER.
• Click Edit.
6. The Pro/TABLE Editor launches.

7. Notice that each Table Dimension
is added as its own column in
addition to the idx column.
8. Notice that each Table Dimension
is given a name.
9. Notice that the Table Dimension
values in the graphics window
have been replaced by the
corresponding column name
from Pro/TABLE.

10. In the idx column of Pro/TABLE,
starting in row R12, type number
1 through 15.
11. Edit the remainder of the table
as shown in the figure.
12. In the Pro/TABLE Editor, click
File > Exit.

Applying Pattern Tables
You can reuse a pattern table by writing it to a *.ptb file and
reading it into another model's pattern table.
• Write a *.ptb from a pattern table.

• Read a *.ptb file into a pattern
table.
– Number of Table Dimensions
must equal number of columns
in table.
– The order of Table Dimensions
does matter.
• You can switch the Active Table.
Figure 1 – Applying a Pattern Table
Figure 2 – Applying a Different

Pattern Table
Applying Pattern Tables

You can reuse a pattern table by writing it to a *.ptb file. This is done by
right-clicking the table you want to reuse in the Tables tab and selecting
Write. The *.ptb file has the same name as the table from which it was
written. You can maintain a library of *.ptb files for use with standard pattern
configurations, and read them into various part models to easily switch
between configurations.
Reading *.ptb Files into a Model

You can read an existing *.ptb file into a pattern table by right-clicking in the
Tables tab of the Pattern table dashboard and selecting Read. You can then
browse to find the desired *.ptb file for your pattern table. The rules about
reading in an existing pattern table *.ptb file, are as follows:
• The number of dimensions specified in the Table Dimensions tab must
equal the number of dimensions found within the *.ptb file. If the number is
different, the table fails to be read in.

• The order in which you specify dimensions in the Table dimensions matters.
The system maps the Table Dimensions to the pattern table columns in the
order they are found in the Table Dimensions tab. Thus, if your first Table
Dimension is a diameter dimension and the first column in the pattern table
is a distance, you will most likely not achieve the desired pattern results.
Switching the Active Table

Multiple tables can be established for a pattern, so you can change the
pattern by switching the table that drives it. You can either read in a *.ptb file
to create a new table or you can add a new one by right-clicking in the Tables
tab and selecting Add. Once the table is created you can edit it appropriately.
While multiple tables can be established for a pattern, only one table can
be the Active table at any given time. The Active table is displayed in the
dashboard. You can specify a different Active table by selecting it from the
drop-down list or right-clicking the desired table in the Tables tab and selecting
Apply. For example, Figure 1 displays a pattern table that is the active pattern
table. Figure 2 displays a different pattern table that was made the active
table. You can also edit the table name in the Tables tab of the dashboard.

PROCEDURE - Applying Pattern Tables
Pattern\Apply_Pat_Table APPLY_PATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Apply pattern tables to a part model.

Hole 1.
Tables tab.
• Right-click #1 (Active) and
select Write.
4. Expand the message window
and notice the message
that states, “Pattern table
MUFFLER-1 was written to the
file MUFFLER-1.PTB.1.”
6. Click Folder Browser from

the Navigator.
7. In the Folder Browser, click
Working Directory and
double-click MUFFLER.PRT to
open it.
8. Select Hole 1 and click Pattern

.
type to Table.
7.5, 8, and 3 dimensions,
respectively.

Tables tab.
• Notice that the Active table is
TABLE1.
• Right-click in the collector and
select Read.
• In the Open dialog box, select
MUFFLER-1.PTB and click
Open. Note that TABLE2 is
created.
• Edit the name from TABLE2
to MUFFLER-1 and press
ENTER.
11. Right-click in the collector and select Read.

• In the Open dialog box, select MUFFLER-2.PTB and click Open.
Note that TABLE3 is created.
• Edit the name of TABLE3 to MUFFLER-2.
12. In the Tables tab, right-click

MUFFLER-1 and select Apply.
• Right-click TABLE1 and select
Remove.

Hole 1.
MUFFLER-2 from the Active
table drop-down list.

Creating Curve Patterns
A Curve pattern follows the shape of a curve.
• The curve can be open or closed.

• Spacing options:
– Spacing between pattern
members
• Pattern options:
– Use alternate origin
– Follow surface shape
♦ Follow surface direction
♦ Spacing
– Follow curve direction Figure 1 – Follow Surface
Shape Enabled
Figure 2 – Follow Curve Direction Figure 3 – Follow Curve

Enabled Direction Disabled
Creating Curve Patterns

You can create a Curve pattern of a feature or a group of features by selecting
an existing curve as the reference. In a Curve pattern, the pattern members
follow the shape of the curve. The selected curve can be open or closed.
The original feature should be located at the starting point of the
reference curve to prevent the pattern objects from being offset
from the curve. Creo Parametric determines the starting point by
the first sketched entity. The location at which you first click to begin
sketching the curve becomes the starting point.
Controlling the Number of Pattern Members

You can control the number of pattern members that are created using either
of the following methods:
• Member Spacing – You can use the Use Member Spacing option to
specify the spacing between pattern member centers. The total quantity of
pattern members created is determined by the spacing specified.
• Member Quantity – You can use the Use Member Quantity option
to specify the total number of pattern members that are created. The
spacing between pattern members is determined by the total quantity of
pattern members.

Use Alternate Origin
The default origin specified for a fill pattern is the pattern leader center.
The resulting pattern members are created based on this location. You can
specify an alternate origin location using the Use alternate origin option.
Selecting an alternate origin enables the system to recalculate the pattern
member arrangement as if the pattern leader were in that newly specified
origin. Note that the pattern leader is not actually relocated to the newly
specified origin; the pattern remains in the alternate arrangement, but the
system adjusts the pattern placement to be centered on the pattern leader.
You can select any one of the following as the alternative origin:
• Datum points
• Coordinate systems
• A vertex
• The end of a sketched curve
You can only select features created before the pattern leader as
the alternative origin.
Follow Surface Shape

You can configure the pattern members to follow the shape of a specified
surface. Enabling Follow surface shape causes the pattern member
placement to follow the shape of the selected surface, as shown in Figure 1.
You can then set the member orientation to follow the surface direction.
Enabling Follow surface direction specifies that each pattern member be
oriented to follow the surface, as shown in Figure 1. Disabling Follow surface
direction specifies that all pattern members have a constant orientation on
the selected surface. The orientation of all members is the same as the
pattern leader.
The following spacing options are available when using Follow Surface
Shape:
• As projected
• Map to surface space
• Map to surface UV space
Follow Curve Direction

You can also configure the pattern members to follow the curve direction.
Enabling Follow curve direction specifies that each pattern member be
oriented to follow the curve on the sketch plane. For example, if the pattern
leader is normal to the curve, then each pattern member is also normal to
the curve, as shown in Figure 2. Constant, however, specifies that all pattern
members have a constant orientation along the curve on the sketch plane.
The orientation of all members is the same as the pattern leader, as shown
in Figure 3.

PROCEDURE - Creating Curve Patterns
Pattern\Curve_Pattern CURVE_PATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Create a curve pattern in a model.

group.
type to Curve.
4. Select Sketch 1.
5. Edit the Use Member Spacing
value to 1.

Extrude 1.
Member Quantity .
• Edit the quantity to 7.

Extrude 1.
11. Edit the Use Member Quantity
to 8.
Options tab.
• Disable Follow curve
direction.
14. Notice all pattern members
follow the curve but are oriented
the same as the pattern leader.

SURFACE and select Unhide.
Extrude 1.
Options tab.
• Enable Follow curve
direction.
shape.
• Select SURFACE.

Unhide.
20. Spin the model and notice that
the pattern members follow the
surface shape.

Extrude 1.
Options tab.
• Disable Follow surface
direction for the Member
orientation.
24. Notice that all pattern members
still follow the curve and the
surface shape, but they are all
oriented the same as the pattern
leader.

Creating Point Patterns
Create a pattern by referencing multiple points.
• Points can be:

– Datum point features containing
multiple points.
– Sketch features containing
multiple Geometry Points.
Figure 1 – Original Model
Figure 2 – Datum Point Selected Figure 3 – Point Pattern Created
Creating Point Patterns

You pattern a feature by selecting a datum point or sketch that contains
multiple points. By default, a pattern member is then created for each of the
multiple points. However, like other pattern types, you can disable instances
by clicking the “preview dots.” You can also create reference patterns based
on a created point pattern. Other pattern properties also apply to Point
Patterns.
The points referenced for the pattern can be of two types:
• A standard datum point feature containing multiple points.
• A sketch feature containing multiple Geometry Points. The sketch can also
contain other geometry, however the pattern members are only created at
Geometry Point locations.
– The sketch can preexist and be selected at the time of pattern creation.
– The sketch can also be created as an internal sketch, within the Point
Pattern feature. Like other internal sketches, the sketch containing the
points is hidden upon pattern creation.

PROCEDURE - Creating Point Patterns
Pattern\Point_Pattern POINT_PATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Create point patterns using different types of datum points.

Display types: .
2. Select Extrude 1 from the model
tree.
3. Click Pattern .
• Select Point as the pattern
type.
4. Click Use Point Feature

from the dashboard.
5. Select a point from the POINT_1
feature.
6. Select the “preview dots” to
disable two pattern members, as
shown.
8. Disable Point Display .
9. Select Extrude 2 from the model

tree.
10. Click Pattern .
11. Select Point as the pattern type.
12. Click Use Sketch Point .

13. Right-click and select Define
Internal Sketch.
• Click Use Previous.

14. Click Offset .
• Select the left curved outside
edge and type -0.25 as the
offset.
15. Click Divide from the Editing
group and select a point on the
arc to divide it in half.
group and place five points:
three on the arc ends and two on
the arc midpoints.
17. Click OK .
18. Click Named Views from the

In Graphics toolbar and select
3D.
19. Select the “preview dot” to
disable the pattern member
shown.
21. Select Draft 1, then right-click

and select Pattern.
• Select Reference as the
pattern type and then click
Complete Feature .
22. Select Draft 2, then right-click
and select Pattern.
• Select Reference and then

Unpatterning Group Patterns
You can unpattern a Group Dimension pattern or a Group
Reference pattern.
• Pattern feature removed, leaving Group features.

• Each Group is independent, enabling individual manipulation.
Figure 1 – Unpatterning a Patterned Group
Figure 2 – Deleted Independent Groups
Unpatterning Group Patterns

A group Dimension pattern and a group Reference pattern can both be
unpatterned. When a pattern is unpatterned, the Pattern feature is removed
from the model tree, leaving each of the resulting group members, as
shown in Figure 1. These group features are now independent and can be
individually manipulated.
For example, in Figure 2, each of the group features in the middle of the
model were deleted because they are independent of each other. The groups
could not have been deleted if they were still part of the pattern. Furthermore,
the tab groups in the top row were ungrouped, enabling the round features to
be deleted.

PROCEDURE - Unpatterning Group Patterns
Pattern\Unpattern UNPATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Pattern and unpattern groups in a part model.

2. Select Group TAB and click
Pattern .
4. Select the 2 distance dimension
as the first direction reference.
• Edit the spacing increment to
2.50.
4.

spacing increment to 2.

9. Press CTRL and select Hole 1

and Hole 2.
• Right-click and select Group.
• Rename the group to HOLES.

10. Select Group HOLES and click
Pattern .
11. Verify the pattern type is
Reference and the Reference
type is Group.

Pattern 2 of HOLES and select
Unpattern.
14. Notice that the Pattern feature
has been replaced by Group
features in the model tree.
15. Notice that all features are still
present in the graphics window.

Group LOCAL_GROUP_26 and
select Ungroup.
• Delete the first hole feature
and click OK.
Group LOCAL_GROUP_29 and
select Ungroup.
• Delete the second hole feature
and click OK.

Pattern 1 of TAB and select
Unpattern.
19. Again, notice that the Pattern
feature has been replaced by
Group features in the model tree.
20. Again, notice that all features
are still present in the graphics
window.
21. Right-click Group
LOCAL_GROUP_12 and
select Delete.
• Click OK to also delete the
child local hole group.

Creating Patterns of Patterns
You can now select an existing pattern to create a pattern.
• You can create patterns of an

existing pattern:
• You can reference pattern a pattern
along an existing pattern.
– Feature
– Group
– Both
Figure 1 – Patterning a Pattern
Figure 2 – Reference Pattern Types

(Feature, Group, Both)
Creating Patterns of Patterns

You can now create a pattern of an existing pattern. The pattern types do
not need to be the same – for example, you can create a linear pattern of an
axis pattern, or vice versa. You can also use the Unpattern option to remove
each of the patterns.
In addition, you can reference pattern a feature along a pattern of a pattern,
provided a feature is created on the pattern leader of another pattern.
Depending on how the features were created, there are three different
reference pattern types that can be created:
• Feature – The Reference pattern references an existing feature pattern. In
Figure 2, in the left image, the round feature is being Reference patterned
based on the existing axis pattern.
• Group – The Reference pattern references either a group or existing
pattern of a pattern. In Figure 2, in the middle image, an axis pattern is then

direction patterned, resulting in a pattern of a pattern. The round feature is
Reference patterned based on the axis pattern that was patterned.
• Both – The Reference pattern references both an existing feature pattern
and a group pattern. In Figure 2, in the right image, the round is Reference
patterned around both the feature pattern (axis pattern) and the group
pattern (the pattern of the axis pattern).

PROCEDURE - Creating Patterns of Patterns
Pattern\Pattern_Patterns PATTERN-PATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Pattern an existing pattern.

AXIS_PATTERN.
3. Click Pattern from the Editing
group.
4. Select Direction as the type.

• Select datum plane FRONT
• Click Flip First Direction .
• Type 3 as the quantity.
• Type 50 as the spacing.

Task 2: Reference pattern a round feature on an existing pattern of a
pattern.
1. Select ROUND_1.
2. Click Pattern .
• Notice the default pattern type
is Reference pattern and that
the default Reference type is
Feature.
• Also notice that the reference
pattern only occurs on the axis
pattern.

Reference type to Group.
• Notice that the round only
patterns once per direction
pattern group.

Reference type to Both.
• Notice that the round patterns
on each member of the
axis pattern as well as each
member of the direction
pattern of the axis pattern.

Moving/Mirroring Patterns
You can now move and mirror patterns.
Move and Mirror Patterns

• Additional pattern types:
– Fill
– Direction
– Axis
Figure 2 – Pattern Mirrored

Figure 1 – Original Model and Rotated
Moving/Mirroring Patterns
You can move or mirror patterns using Copy and Paste Special.
These operations can be performed on fill, direction, axis, dimension and
table patterns. However, the operations cannot be performed on group or
reference patterns.
You can perform multiple translate or rotate operations within a
single copy operation.

PROCEDURE - Moving/Mirroring Patterns
Pattern\Mirror_Pattern MIRROR_PATTERN.PRT
Task 1: Mirror the pattern of slots around datum RIGHT.

Display types: .
2. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 1 in
the model tree.
• Click Mirror from the
Editing group.
• Select the RIGHT datum plane
Task 2: Copy and paste the pattern of slots.
1. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 1 in

the model tree.
• Press CTRL+C to copy the
pattern to the clipboard.
• Select Paste Special from

the Paste types drop-down list.
The Paste Special dialog box
appears.
• Select Apply Move/Rotate
transformations to copies.
• Click OK.
2. Click Rotate from the

dashboard.
• Select axis through the middle
of the cover as the axis to
rotate the copy around.
• In the dashboard, type 25 for
the angle and press ENTER.

Copyright

Copyright © 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation and/or Its Subsidiary Companies.
All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies (collectively
"PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and are provided under a license agreement that restricts
copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form
of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under
which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by
PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred,
modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written
consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a
warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary
information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form
or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior
approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is, and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products,
and we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including public and private surveillance resources.
As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our
software. This data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized distributors. If you are using
an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease
using the illegal version, and contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.
Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or copyright notice, of your PTC software.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b)
(OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN’95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license
only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth
in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT’88) or Commercial
Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 01012012
Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA
PRINTING HISTORY
Document No. Date Description
T3903-390-02 05/04/2012 Initial Printing of:
Order Number DT-T3903-390-02
Printed in the U.S.A

T3903-390-02 SG-Ins Lec EN

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

T3903-390-02 SG-Ins Lec EN

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.

Authored and published using

Welcome to PTC University!

Precision Learning in the Classroom

Precision Learning After the Class

Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.0

Course Handbook Layout:

Course Handbook Layout

Procedure / Exercise Header

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Step 1: Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run

1. Notice the SampleFunc-

3. Click Working Directory

Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the

Step 4: Open the file for this procedure.

1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header

Step 5: Set the initial datum display options.

4. The model should now appear

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Figure 2 – Surface Loop

Advanced Chain Selection

Module 1 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

• Directly with the mouse.

• Using the Chain dialog box –

Figure 3 – Chain Dialog Box

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 3

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Task 1: Experiment with the different chain selection types.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Cursor over one of the vertical

6. Select the top, front horizontal

13. Select Extrude 1.

Module 1 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

20. Select the quilt on the right.

24. Select the quilt again.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 5

• Surface set types:

Figure 2 – Selecting a Surface Loop

Advanced Surface Selection

Surface Set Types

Module 1 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

• Directly with the mouse.

• Using the Surface Sets dialog

Figure 3 – Surface Sets Dialog Box

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 7

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Task 1: Experiment with the different surface set selections.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

6. Select any feature.

10. Right-click to query and select

12. De-select all geometry.

Module 1 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

16. Select the top, flat surface.

19. Press CTRL and click to

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 9

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 1

• Created like a Sketch feature:

Figure 1 – Datum Graph Features

Figure 2 – Creating a Datum

Creating Datum Graphs